BLADE OS™

Command Reference
HP GbE2c L2/L3 Ethernet Blade Switch Version 5.1 Advanced Functionality Software

Part Number: BMD00114, August 2009

2350 Mission College Blvd. Suite 600 Santa Clara, CA 95054 www.bladenetwork.net

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference Copyright © 2009 BLADE Network Technologies, Inc., 2350 Mission College Blvd., Suite 600, Santa Clara, California, 95054, USA. All rights reserved. Part Number: BMD00114. This document is protected by copyright and distributed under licenses restricting its use, copying, distribution, and decompilation. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of BLADE Network Technologies, Inc. Documentation is provided “as is” without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including any kind of implied or express warranty of non-infringement or the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. U.S. Government End Users: This document is provided with a “commercial item” as defined by FAR 2.101 (Oct. 1995) and contains “commercial technical data” and “commercial software documentation” as those terms are used in FAR 12.211-12.212 (Oct. 1995). Government End Users are authorized to use this documentation only in accordance with those rights and restrictions set forth herein, consistent with FAR 12.211- 12.212 (Oct. 1995), DFARS 227.7202 (JUN 1995) and DFARS 252.227-7015 (Nov. 1995). BLADE Network Technologies, Inc. reserves the right to change any products described herein at any time, and without notice. BLADE Network Technologies, Inc. assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the use of products described herein, except as expressly agreed to in writing by BLADE Network Technologies, Inc. The use and purchase of this product does not convey a license under any patent rights, trademark rights, or any other intellectual property rights of BLADE Network Technologies, Inc. Originated in the USA. BLADE OS and BLADE are trademarks of BLADE Network Technologies, Inc. in the United States and certain other countries. Cisco® and EtherChannel® are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. in the United States and certain other countries. Any other trademarks appearing in this manual are owned by their respective companies.

2

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

Contents
Preface 13 Additional references 13 15

Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 15 Connecting to the Switch 15 Establishing a console connection Setting an IP address 16 Establishing a Telnet connection 16 17 Establishing an SSH connection Accessing the switch 19 Setup vs. CLI 20 20 Command Line History and Editing Idle Timeout 20 21 Typographic Conventions

Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 23 25 Using the Setup Utility 25 Information Needed for Setup Starting Setup When You Log In 25 Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually 26 26 Stopping Setup Restarting Setup 26 Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration 27 28 Setup Part 2: Port Configuration Setup Part 3: VLANs 30 Setup Part 4: IP Configuration 31 31 IP Interfaces Default Gateways 32 IP Routing 33 33 Setup Part 5: Final Steps Optional Setup for Telnet Support 34 Configuring SNMP Support 35 35 Setting Passwords Changing the Default Administrator Password 36 Changing the Default User Password 38 39 Changing the Default Operator Password
BMD00114, August 2009 Contents 3

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

Chapter 3: Menu Basics 41 The Main Menu 41 Menu Summary 42 Global Commands 43 Command Line History and Editing Command Line Interface Shortcuts CLI List and Range Inputs 46 46 Command Stacking Command Abbreviation 47 Tab Completion 47

45 46

Chapter 4: The Information Menu 49 Information Menu 49 System Information Menu 52 54 SNMPv3 System Information Menu SNMPv3 USM User Table Information 56 57 SNMPv3 View Table Information SNMPv3 Access Table Information 58 SNMPv3 Group Table Information 59 59 SNMPv3 Community Table Information SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information 60 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information 61 62 SNMPv3 Notify Table Information SNMPv3 Dump Information 63 General System Information [angus] [count] 64 66 Show Recent Syslog Messages User Status Information 67 Layer 2 Information Menu 68 72 FDB Information Menu Show All FDB Information 73 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu 74 75 Show All LACP Information Layer 2 Failover Information Menu 75 Show Layer 2 Failover Information 76 77 Hot Links Information Menu Hotlinks Trigger Information 77 LLDP Information Menu 78 79 LLDP Remote Device Information

4

Contents

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

Unidirectional Link Detection Information Menu 80 UDLD Port Information 80 81 OAM Discovery Information Menu OAM Port Information 81 802.1X Information 82 84 Spanning Tree Information RSTP/MSTP Information 86 Common Internal Spanning Tree Information 88 90 Trunk Group Information[angus] [count] [grover] VLAN Information 91 Layer 3 Information Menu 92 94 IP Routing Information Menu Show All IP Route Information 95 ARP Information Menu 97 Show All ARP Entry Information [angus] [count] [grover] ARP Address List Information [angus] [count] 98 100 OSPF Information Menu OSPF General Information 102 OSPF Interface Information 102 103 OSPF Database Information Menu OSPF Route Codes Information 105 Routing Information Protocol Information Menu 106 106 RIP Routes Information Show RIP Interface Information 106 IPv6 Routing Information Menu 107 107 IPv6 Routing Table Information IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Cache Information Menu 108 IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Cache Information 108 109 Interface Information IP Information 110 IGMP Multicast Group Information Menu 114 115 IGMP Multicast Router Port Information Menu IGMP Multicast Router Dump Information 115 IGMP Group Information 116 117 VRRP Information ServerMobility™ Port Information 118 Quality of Service Information Menu 119 119 802.1p Information Access Control List Information Menu 121 Access Control List Information 122
BMD00114, August 2009

98

Contents

5

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

RMON Information Menu 123 RMON History Information 124 125 RMON Alarm Information RMON Event Information 127 Link Status Information[Grover Count Angus ] 128 131 Port Information [angus] [count] Port Transceiver Status [Grover Count Zoe ] 133 Server Link Failure Detection Information 134 134 Information Dump Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 135 135 Statistics Menu 137 Port Statistics Menu 802.1x Authenticator Statistics 139 802.1x Authenticator Diagnostics 140 143 Bridging Statistics Ethernet Statistics 144 147 Interface Statistics Interface Protocol Statistics 149 Link Statistics 149 150 RMON Statistics Layer 2 Statistics Menu 153 FDB Statistics 154 155 LACP Statistics Hotlinks Statistics 156 LLDP Port Statistics 157 158 OAM Statistics OAM Statistics 158 Layer 3 Statistics Menu 159 162 IPv4 Statistics Route Statistics 165 ARP Statistics 165 166 DNS Statistics ICMP Statistics 167 TCP Statistics 169 171 UDP Statistics IGMP Statistics 172 OSPF Statistics Menu 173 174 OSPF Global Statistics VRRP Statistics 178
6 Contents BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

Routing Information Protocol Statistics 179 Management Processor Statistics Menu 180 181 MP Packet Statistics TCP Statistics 183 UCB Statistics 183 184 CPU Statistics ACL Statistics Menu 185 ACL Statistics List 185 186 SNMP Statistics NTP Statistics 190 Server Link Failure Detection Statistics 192 192 Statistics Dump Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 193 Configuration Menu 193 195 Viewing, Applying, Reverting, and Saving Changes Viewing Pending Changes 195 196 Applying Pending Changes Reverting Changes 196 Saving the Configuration 196 198 System Configuration Menu System Host Log Configuration Menu 201 Secure Shell Server Configuration Menu 203 205 RADIUS Server Configuration Menu TACACS+ Server Configuration Menu 207 LDAP Server Configuration Menu 211 213 NTP Server Configuration Menu System SNMP Configuration Menu 214 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu 217 219 User Security Model Configuration Menu SNMPv3 View Configuration Menu 221 View-Based Access Control Model Configuration Menu 222 224 SNMPv3 Group Configuration Menu SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu 225 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration Menu 226 227 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration Menu 229

BMD00114, August 2009

Contents

7

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

System Access Configuration Menu 230 Management Networks Configuration Menu 232 233 User Access Control Configuration Menu System User ID Configuration Menu 234 HTTPS Access Configuration 235 236 sFlow Configuration Menu sFlow Port Configuration Menu 237 Port Configuration Menu 238 241 Temporarily Disabling a Port Port Link Configuration Menu 241 UniDirectional Link Detection Configuration Menu 243 244 Port OAM Configuration Menu Port ACL Configuration Menu 245 Port Spanning Tree Configuration Menu 246 247 Quality of Service Configuration Menu 802.1p Configuration Menu 248 249 Access Control List Configuration Menu ACL Configuration Menu 250 Ethernet Filtering Configuration Menu 252 253 IP version 4 Filtering Configuration Menu TCP/UDP Filtering Configuration Menu 255 ACL Metering Configuration Menu 256 258 Re-Mark Configuration Menu Re-Mark In-Profile Configuration Menu 259 Re-Mark Out-of-Profile Configuration Menu 259 260 Re-mark Update User Priority Configuration Menu Packet Format Filtering Configuration Menu 261 ACL Group Configuration Menu 262 263 Port Mirroring Port-Mirroring Configuration Menu 264 Layer 2 Configuration Menu 265 267 802.1X Configuration Menu 802.1X Global Configuration Menu 268 802.1X Guest VLAN Configuration Menu 270 271 802.1X Port Configuration Menu RSTP/MSTP Configuration Menu 273 Common Internal Spanning Tree Configuration Menu 275 276 CIST Bridge Configuration Menu CIST Port Configuration Menu 277

8

Contents

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5. August 2009 326 Contents 9 .1 Command Reference Spanning Tree Configuration Menu 279 Spanning Tree Bridge Configuration Menu 281 283 Spanning Tree Port Configuration Menu Forwarding Database Configuration Menu 285 Static Multicast MAC Configuration Menu 286 287 Static FDB Configuration Menu LLDP Configuration Menu 288 LLDP Port Configuration Menu 290 291 LLDP Optional TLV Configuration Menu Trunk Configuration Menu 293 IP Trunk Hash Configuration Menu 294 295 IP Trunk Hash Menu LACP Configuration Menu 296 LACP Port Configuration Menu 297 298 Layer 2 Failover Configuration Menu Failover Trigger Configuration Menu 299 300 Auto Monitor Configuration Menu Manual Monitor Configuration Menu 301 Manual Monitor Port Configuration Menu 302 303 Manual Monitor Control Configuration Menu Hot Links Configuration Menu 304 Hot Links Trigger Configuration Menu 305 306 Hot Links Trigger Master Configuration Menu Hot Links Trigger Backup Configuration Menu 307 VLAN Configuration Menu 308 310 Protocol-Based VLAN Configuration Menu Private VLAN Configuration Menu 312 Layer 3 Configuration Menu 313 315 IP Interface Configuration Menu Default Gateway Configuration Menu 316 IPv4 Static Route Configuration Menu 317 318 ARP Configuration Menu ARP Static Configuration Menu 319 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu 320 321 Network Filter Configuration Menu Routing Map Configuration Menu 322 IP Access List Configuration Menu 324 325 Routing Information Protocol Configuration Menu Routing Information Protocol Interface Configuration Menu RIP Route Redistribution Configuration Menu 328 BMD00114.

August 2009 .BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference Open Shortest Path First Configuration Menu 329 Area Index Configuration Menu 331 333 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu OSPF Interface Configuration Menu 334 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu 336 338 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu 339 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu 340 341 IGMP Configuration Menu IGMP Snooping Configuration Menu 342 IGMP Version 3 Configuration Menu 344 345 IGMP Static Multicast Router Configuration Menu IGMP Filtering Configuration Menu 346 IGMP Filter Definition Menu 347 348 IGMP Filtering Port Configuration Menu Domain Name System Configuration Menu 349 350 Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu VRRP Configuration Menu 351 Virtual Router Configuration Menu 353 356 Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration Menu Virtual Router Group Configuration Menu 358 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu 360 361 VRRP Interface Configuration Menu VRRP Tracking Configuration Menu 362 ServerMobility™ Configuration Menu 363 365 ServerMobility™ Port Configuration Menu ServerMobility™ Auto-Recovery Configuration Menu 366 IP Loopback Interface Configuration Menu 367 368 Remote Monitoring Configuration RMON History Configuration Menu 369 RMON Event Configuration Menu 370 371 RMON Alarm Configuration Menu Server Link Failure Detection Configuration 373 SFD Link to Monitor Menu 374 375 SFD Link to Enable Menu Setup 376 Dump 376 377 Saving the Active Switch Configuration Restoring the Active Switch Configuration 377 10 Contents BMD00114.

1 Command Reference Chapter 7: The Operations Menu 379 Operations Menu 379 Operations-Level Port Options Menu 381 Operations-Level Port 802.BLADE OS 5.1X Options Menu 383 Operations-Level VRRP Options Menu Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu 385 385 Boot Menu 386 Updating the Switch Software Image Loading New Software to Your Switch 386 Using the BBI 386 388 Using the CLI Selecting a Software Image to Run 389 Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch 390 Selecting a Configuration Block Resetting the Switch 391 391 Accessing the ISCLI 382 389 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 393 393 Maintenance Menu 395 System Maintenance Menu Forwarding Database Maintenance Menu 396 Debugging Menu 397 398 ARP Cache Maintenance Menu IP Route Manipulation Menu 399 LLDP Cache Manipulation Menu 400 401 IGMP Maintenance Menu IGMP Snooping Maintenance Menu 402 IGMP Multicast Routers Maintenance Menu 403 404 Uuencode Flash Dump FTP/TFTP System Dump Put 404 Clearing Dump Information 405 405 Unscheduled System Dumps Index 407 BMD00114. August 2009 Contents 11 .

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference 12 Contents BMD00114. August 2009 .

The BLADE OS 5. you can view information and statistics about the switch. text-based command line interfaces (BLADE OS CLI and ISCLI) for access via a local terminal or remote Telnet/Secure Shell (SSH) session Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) support for access through network management software such as HP Systems Insight Manager A browser-based management interface for interactive network access through the Web browser The command line interface provides a direct method for collecting switch information and performing switch configuration. Using a basic terminal. require some administrative configuration before they can be used effectively.1 for the HP GbE2c L2/L3 Ethernet Blade Switch (software part number 485192-B21). The extensive switching software included in the switch provides a variety of options for accessing and configuring the switch: Built-in.1 Command Reference provides a command reference for Advanced Functionality Software (AFS) release 5.Preface The HP GbE2c L2/L3 Ethernet Blade Switch (GbE2c) is ready to perform basic switching functions right out of the box. and perform any necessary configuration. however. Additional references Additional information about installing and configuring the switch is available in the following guides: HP GbE2c L2/L3 Ethernet Blade Switch User Guide HP GbE2c L2/L3 Ethernet Blade Switch ISCLI Reference HP GbE2c L2/L3 Ethernet Blade Switch Application Guide HP GbE2c L2/L3 Ethernet Blade Switch Browser-based Interface Quick Guide BMD00114. Some of the more advanced features. August 2009 13 .

August 2009 .BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference 14 Preface BMD00114.

CHAPTER 1 The Command Line Interface Connecting to the Switch You can access the command line interface in any one of the following ways: Using a console connection via the console port Using a Telnet connection over the network Using a Secure Shell (SSH) connection to securely log in over a network Establishing a console connection To establish a console connection with the switch. August 2009 15 . you need: A null modem cable with a female DB-9 connector (See the HP GbE2c L2/L3 Ethernet Blade Switch User Guide for more information.) An ASCII terminal or a computer running terminal emulation software set to the parameters shown in the table below: Table 1 Console configuration parameters Parameter Value Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control 9600 8 None 1 None BMD00114.

) Setting an IP address To access the switch via a Telnet or an SSH connection. Configuring manually—If the network does not support DHCP. you must configure the management interface (interface 256) with an IP address. The switch supports four concurrent Telnet connections. The switch can get its IP address in one of the following ways: Management port access: Using a Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP) server—When the /cfg/sys/dhcp command is enabled. Press the Enter key a few times on the terminal to establish the connection. August 2009 . If you have a BOOTP server on the network. add the Media Access Control (MAC) address of the switch to the BOOTP configuration file located on the BOOTP server. you need to have an Internet Protocol (IP) address set for the switch. operator. Connect the terminal to the console port using the null modem cable. you also must configure the management gateway (gateway 4). If you want to access the switch from a remote network. (For more information. By default. Telnet is enabled on the switch. The MAC address can be found in the System Information menu. you must configure the management port with an IP address. Configuring manually—If the network does not support BOOTP. (See the “System information” section in the “Information Menu” chapter. 4. see the “Setting passwords” section in the “First-time configuration” chapter. the management interface (interface 256) requests its IP address from a DHCP server. Telnet provides the same options for user.BLADE OS 5. Establishing a Telnet connection A Telnet connection offers the convenience of accessing the switch from any workstation connected to the network. and administrator access as those available through the console port.1 Command Reference To establish a console connection with the switch: 1. Power on the terminal. You will be required to enter a password for access to the switch. 3. 2. the management interface is set up to request its IP address from a BOOTP server. you do not have to configure the MAC address. The default value for the /cfg/sys/dhcp command is enabled. Uplink port access: Using a Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) server—By default. 16 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface BMD00114.) If you are using a DHCP server that also does BOOTP.

The Secure Shell (SSH) protocol enables you to securely log into the switch over the network. or user. followed by the switch IP address: telnet <switch IP address> You will then be prompted to enter a password. In order to use SSH.1 Command Reference Once the IP parameters are configured. Similarly. the system will fail to perform the key generation if an SSH/SCP client is logging in at that time.BLADE OS 5. As a secure alternative to using Telnet to manage switch configuration. Therefore. Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) BMD00114. an SSH/Secure Copy (SCP) client will not be able to log in if the switch is performing key generation at that time or if another client has just logged in before this client. Server Host Authentication—Client RSA authenticates the switch in the beginning of every connection Key Exchange—RSA Encryption: AES256-CBC AES192-CBC AES128-CBC 3DES-CBC 3DES ARCFOUR User Authentication—Local password authentication. See the “Accessing the switch” section later in this chapter for description of default passwords. The password entered determines the access level: administrator. Establishing an SSH connection Although a remote network administrator can manage the configuration of a switch via Telnet. To establish a Telnet connection with the switch. you can access the CLI using a Telnet connection. See the “Secure Shell Server configuration” section in the “Configuration Menu” chapter for information on how to configure SSH. operator. you must first configure it on the switch. this method does not provide a secure connection. August 2009 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 17 . The supported SSH encryption and authentication methods are listed below. The switch can perform only one session of key/cipher generation at a time. run the Telnet program on the workstation and enter the telnet command. SSH ensures that all data sent over the network is encrypted and secure.

0. You may configure the client software to use protocol SSH version 1 or version 2. followed by the user account name and the switch IP address: >> # ssh <user>@<switch IP address> You will then be prompted to enter your password.5 and 2.0. SSH service is not enabled on the switch. SSH clients of other versions are not supported.1.1 for Linux (freeware) SecureCRT® 4. Note – The first time you run SSH from the workstation. enter yes to continue.1 Command Reference The following SSH clients are supported: SSH 3. 18 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface BMD00114. you can access the command line interface to enable SSH.8 (VanDyke Technologies.0. August 2009 . By default. Inc.58 (Simon Tatham) for Windows Note – The switch implementation of SSH is based on versions 1. run the SSH program on the workstation by issuing the ssh command. and supports SSH clients from version 1.) OpenSSH_3. To establish an SSH connection with the switch. Once the IP parameters are configured.0 through version 2. At the prompt.9 for Linux (FC 3) FedoraCore 3 for SCP commands PuTTY Release 0.BLADE OS 5. a warning message might appear.

For more information. Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 19 BMD00114. admin information.BLADE OS 5. nothing can be changed on the switch. Access to switch functions is controlled through the use of unique usernames and passwords. changes that are persistent across a reboot/reset of the switch. Table 2 User Access Levels User Account Description and Tasks Performed Password User The User has no direct responsibility for switch management. you are prompted to enter a password.1 Command Reference Accessing the switch To enable better switch management and user accountability. Once you are connected to the switch via the local console. Because administrators can also make temporary (operator-level) changes as well. except the management ports. but cannot make any configuration changes to the switch. see “Setting Passwords” on page 35. August 2009 . He or she can view all switch status information and statistics. The Operator oper can reset ports. The password entered determines the access level. Administrator—Only administrators can make permanent changes to the switch configuration. including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. Because any changes an operator makes are undone by a reset of the switch. but do have access to the Maintenance menu. the switch provides different levels or classes of user access. Users may display information that has no security or privacy implications. they must be aware of the interactions between temporary and permanent changes. Telnet. The superuser Administrator has complete access to all menus. Note – It is recommended that you change default switch passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies. Administrators can access switch functions to configure and troubleshoot problems on the switch. and configuration commands on the switch. user Operator Administrator The Operator manages all functions of the switch. or SSH. Levels of access to the CLI and Web management functions and screens increase as needed to perform various switch management tasks. The default user names/password for each access level is listed in the following table. operators cannot severely impact switch operation. Operators have access to the switch management features used for daily switch operations. such as switch statistics and current operational state information. The three levels of access are: User—User interaction with the switch is completely passive. These changes will be lost when the switch is rebooted/reset. Operator—Operators can only effect temporary changes on the switch.

the switch will disconnect your Telnet session after 10 minutes of inactivity. which can be set from 1 to 60 minutes.BLADE OS 5. a utility designed to help you through the first-time configuration process. CLI Once the administrator password is verified. 20 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface BMD00114. For information about changing this parameter. see “Menu Basics” on page 41. the Main Menu of the CLI is displayed instead. the system will ask whether you wish to run Setup (see Chapter 2. access to each user level can be disabled by setting the password to an empty value. Command Line History and Editing For a description of global commands.” Idle Timeout By default. Setup vs. and command line editing functions. [Main Menu] info stats cfg oper boot maint diff apply save revert exit - Information Menu Statistics Menu Configuration Menu Operations Command Menu Boot Options Menu Maintenance Menu Show pending config changes [global command] Apply pending config changes [global command] Save updated config to FLASH [global command] Revert pending or applied changes [global command] Exit [global command. “First-Time Configuration”). The following table shows the Main Menu with administrator privileges. This function is controlled by the idle timeout parameter.1 Command Reference Note – With the exception of the “admin” user. see “System Configuration Menu” on page 198. some menu options will not be available. If the switch has already been configured. you are given complete access to the switch. shortcuts. always available] Note – If you are accessing a user account. August 2009 . If the switch is still set to its factory default configuration.

Main# sys <AaBbCc123> This italicized type appears in command To establish a Telnet session. Read your User’s Guide thoroughly. Do not type the brackets.1 Command Reference Typographic Conventions The following table describes the typographic styles used in this book. This also shows book titles.BLADE OS 5. and directories used within the text. View the readme. enter: host# telnet <IP address> examples as a parameter placeholder. [ ] Command items shown inside brackets host# ls [-a] are optional and can be used or excluded as the situation demands. Table 3 Typographic Conventions Typeface or Symbol Meaning Example AaBbCc123 This type is used for names of commands.txt file. or words to be emphasized. Replace the indicated text with the appropriate real name or value when using the command. special terms. AaBbCc123 This bold type appears in command examples. Do not type the brackets. BMD00114. It also depicts on-screen computer output Main# and prompts. files. It shows text that must be typed in exactly as shown. August 2009 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 21 .

BLADE OS 5. August 2009 .1 Command Reference 22 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface BMD00114.

Enter admin as the default administrator password.Information Menu stats . August 2009 23 .Show pending config changes [global command] apply . HP GbE2c L2/L3 Ethernet Blade Switch for HP c-Class BladeSystem Copyright(C)2003 Hewlett-Packard Development Company.Revert pending or applied changes [global command] exit . the login prompt displays. always available] >> Main# 3. From the Main Menu. L.Exit [global command. Password: 2. 1.P.Configuration Menu oper .Save updated config to FLASH [global command] revert . The system displays the Main Menu with administrator privileges.CHAPTER 2 First-Time Configuration This chapter describes how to perform first-time configuration and how to change system passwords. perform the following steps. Connect to the switch console.Maintenance Menu diff .Apply pending config changes [global command] save . [Main Menu] info .Operations Command Menu boot . To begin first-time configuration of the switch.Boot Options Menu maint . enter the following command to access the Configuration Menu: Main# /cfg BMD00114.Statistics Menu cfg . After connecting.

you must first connect to the switch (see Chapter 1.Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg .Layer 2 Menu l3 . Before you run Setup.System-wide Parameter Menu port .Access Control List Menu pmirr .Display current configuration To help with the initial process of configuring your switch. [Configuration Menu] sys .QOS Menu acl .Port Mirroring Menu l2 . August 2009 . The Setup utility prompts you step-by-step to enter all the necessary information for basic configuration of the switch.Restore current configuration from FTP/TFTP server cur .Backup current configuration to FTP/TFTP server gtcfg .BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference The Configuration Menu is displayed. “Connecting to the Switch”).Server Link Failure Detection Menu setup .Layer 3 Menu rmon . 24 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration BMD00114. This chapter describes how to use the Setup utility and how to change system passwords. the BLADE OS software includes a Setup utility.RMON Menu sfd .Port Menu qos .Step by step configuration set up dump .

subnet mask. and negotiation mode (as appropriate) Whether to use VLAN tagging or not (as appropriate) Optional configuration for each VLAN Name of VLAN Whether the VLAN uses Jumbo Frames or not Which ports are included in the VLAN Optional configuration of IP parameters IP address. the login prompt will appear as shown below. Connect to the switch. Enter Password: BMD00114.1 Command Reference Using the Setup Utility Whenever you log in as the system administrator under the factory default configuration. duplex. flow control. Information Needed for Setup Setup requests the following information: Basic system information Date & time Whether to use Spanning Tree Protocol or not Optional configuration for each port Speed. After connecting. 1.BLADE OS 5. Setup can also be activated manually from the command line interface any time after login. August 2009 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 25 . and VLAN for each IP interface IP addresses for default gateway Whether IP forwarding is enabled or not Starting Setup When You Log In The Setup prompt appears automatically whenever you login as the system administrator under the factory default settings. you are asked whether you wish to run the Setup utility.

or if the administrator Main Menu appears instead. the system prompts: HP GbE2c L2/L3 Ethernet Blade Switch 18:44:05 Wed Jan 3. or y to restart the Setup program at the beginning. a "Set Up" facility which will prompt you with those configuration items that are essential to the operation of the switch is provided. press <Ctrl-C> during any Setup question.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 . Restarting Setup You can restart the Setup utility manually at any time by entering the following command at the administrator prompt: # /cfg/setup 26 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration BMD00114. When you abort Setup. 3. the system configuration has probably been changed from the factory default settings. If you are certain that you need to return the switch to its factory default settings. 2009 The switch is booted with factory default configuration. the system will prompt: Would you like to run from top again? [y/n] Enter n to abort Setup. Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually Stopping Setup To abort the Setup utility. If the factory default configuration is detected.1 Command Reference 2. Would you like to run "Set Up" to configure the switch? [y/n]: Note – If the default admin login is unsuccessful. Enter y to begin the initial configuration of the switch. see “Selecting a Configuration Block” on page 390. or n to bypass the Setup facility. Enter admin as the default administrator password. To ease the configuration of the switch.

BLADE OS 5. If you decide not to configure VLANs during this session. the Setup utility prompts you to input basic system information. see the BLADE OS Application Guide. Enter y if you will be configuring VLANs. [type Ctrl-C to abort "Set Up"] 1. 2. Port Speed/Mode. August 2009 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 27 . BMD00114. press <Enter>. 2009. Enter the hour of the current system time at the prompt: System Time: Enter hour in 24-hour format [18]: Enter the hour as a number from 00 to 23. Spanning Tree. Enter the day of the current date at the prompt: Enter day [3]: Enter the date as a number from 1 to 31. and IP interfaces. Next. 4.1 Command Reference Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration When Setup is started. press <Enter>. Enter the month of the current system date at the prompt: System Date: Enter month [1]: Enter the month as a number from 1 to 12. To keep the current year. The system displays the date and time settings: System clock set to 18:55:36 Wed Jan 28. 3. To keep the current month. To keep the current day. 5. Enter the year of the current date at the prompt: System Date: Enter year [2009]: Enter the four-digits that represent the year. VLANs. press <Enter>. or by restarting the Setup facility. For more information on configuring VLANs. Otherwise enter n. you can configure them later using the configuration menus. press <Enter>. the system prompts: "Set Up" will walk you through the configuration of System Date and Time. To keep the current hour.

Before you configure ports. 9. some prompts and options may be different. The system then displays the date and time settings: System clock set to 8:55:36 Wed Jan 28. Enable or disable BOOTP at the prompt: BootP Option: Current BOOTP: enabled Enter new BOOTP [d/e]: Enter d to disable BOOTP. August 2009 .BLADE OS 5. Setup Part 2: Port Configuration When configuring port options for your switch. To keep the current second.1 Command Reference 6. or enter e to enable BOOTP. press <Enter>. press <Enter>. you must decide whether you will configure VLANs and VLAN tagging: Port Config: Will you configure VLANs and VLAN tagging for ports? [y/n] If you decide not to configure VLANs during this session. or enter n to leave Spanning Tree on. Turn Spanning Tree Protocol on or off at the prompt: Spanning Tree: Current Spanning Tree Group 1 setting: ON Turn Spanning Tree Group 1 OFF? [y/n] Enter y to turn off Spanning Tree. or by restarting the Setup facility. see your Application Guide. To keep the current minute. you can configure them later using the configuration menus. Enter the seconds of the current time at the prompt: Enter seconds [37]: Enter the seconds as a number from 00 to 59. 28 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration BMD00114. For more information about configuring VLANs. 8. 2009. 7. Enter the minute of the current time at the prompt: Enter minutes [55]: Enter the minute as a number from 00 to 59.

both to enable both. the system prompts: Gig Link Configuration: Port Flow Control: Current Port 21 flow control setting: both Enter new value ["rx"/"tx"/"both"/"none"]: Enter rx to enable receive flow control.1 Command Reference 1. 4. or none to turn flow control off for the port. If configuring VLANs. Otherwise enter n. 2. To keep the current setting. Configure Gigabit Ethernet port flow parameters. To keep the current setting. 3. If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector. If you have selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1. or press <Enter> to keep the current setting.BLADE OS 5. the system prompts: Port VLAN tagging config (tagged port can be a member of multiple VLANs) Current VLAN tag support: disabled Enter new VLAN tag support [d/e]: Enter d to disable VLAN tagging for the port or enter e to enable VLAN tagging for the port. If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector. 5. August 2009 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 29 . the system prompts: Port Auto Negotiation: Current Port 21 autonegotiation: Enter new value ["on"/"off"]: on Enter on to enable port autonegotiation. press <Enter>. off to disable it. enter the number of the port you wish to configure. enable or disable VLAN tagging for the port. BMD00114. Enter y if you will be configuring VLANs. Select the port to configure. or skip port configuration at the prompt: Port Config: Enter port (1-24): If you wish to change settings for individual ports. To skip port configuration. press <Enter>. Configure Gigabit Ethernet port autonegotiation mode. press <Enter> without specifying any port and go to “Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 30. tx for transmit flow control.

August 2009 . NULL at end: Enter each port. Enter the VLAN port numbers: Define Ports in VLAN: Current VLAN 2: empty Enter ports one per line. enter the number of the VLAN you wish to configure. The system prompts you to configure the next port: Enter port (1-24): When you are through configuring ports. press <Enter> without specifying any port. skip to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 31. Select the VLAN to configure. Configure Spanning Tree Group membership for the VLAN: Spanning Tree Group membership: Enter new STG index [1-128](802.1d)/[1](RSTP)/[0-32](MSTP): 30 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration BMD00114. 3. Otherwise. To use the pending new VLAN name. NULL at end: If you wish to change settings for individual VLANs. and confirm placement of the port into this VLAN. Enter the new VLAN name at the prompt: Current VLAN name: VLAN 2 Enter new VLAN name: Entering a new VLAN name is optional.BLADE OS 5. repeat the steps in this section. press <Enter> without specifying any port. To skip VLAN configuration. 2. or skip VLAN configuration at the prompt: VLAN Config: Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4094. press <Enter>. by port number. press <Enter> without typing a VLAN number and go to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 31. 1. When you are finished adding ports to this VLAN.1 Command Reference 6. 4. Setup Part 3: VLANs If you chose to skip VLANs configuration back in Part 2.

For the specified IP interface. 2. No two IP interfaces can be on the same IP subnet. Up to 256 IP interfaces can be configured on the GbE2c. Note – Because interface 256 is reserved for switch management.BLADE OS 5. When all VLANs have been configured. IP Interfaces IP interfaces are used for defining subnets to which the switch belongs. BMD00114. Select the IP interface to configure. The interfaces can be used for connecting to the switch for remote configuration. Setup Part 4: IP Configuration The system prompts for IP parameters. enter the number of the IP interface you wish to configure. press <Enter> without typing an interface number and go to “Default Gateways” on page 32. or skip interface configuration at the prompt: IP Config: IP interfaces: Enter interface number: (1-256) If you wish to configure individual IP interfaces.1 Command Reference 5. and for routing between subnets and VLANs (if used). NULL at end: Repeat the steps in this section until all VLANs have been configured. August 2009 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 31 .0.0. enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation: Current IP address: Enter new IP address: 0. To skip IP interface configuration. The system prompts you to configure the next VLAN: VLAN Config: Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4094. The IP address assigned to each IP interface provide the switch with an IP presence on your network. press <Enter> without specifying any VLAN. if you change the IP address of IF 256. you can lose the connection to the Onboard Administrator. 1.0 To keep the current setting. press <Enter>.

August 2009 .1 Command Reference 3. press <Enter>. This prompt appears if you selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1: Current VLAN: 1 Enter new VLAN [1-4094]: Enter the number for the VLAN to which the interface belongs.0.0 To keep the current setting. enter the IP address for the selected default gateway: Current IP address: Enter new IP address: 0. At the prompt. When all interfaces have been configured. At the prompt. or press <Enter> without specifying a VLAN number to accept the current setting.0. press <Enter> without specifying any interface number.0 Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation. or skip default gateway configuration: IP default gateways: Enter default gateway number: (1-4) Enter the number for the default gateway to be configured. or press <Enter> without specifying an address to accept the current setting. enter y to enable the IP interface. select a default gateway for configuration.BLADE OS 5. If configuring VLANs. 32 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration BMD00114. 5. specify a VLAN for the interface. 2. At the prompt. or n to leave it disabled: Enable IP interface? [y/n] 6. enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation: Current subnet mask: Enter new subnet mask: 0. The system prompts you to configure another interface: Enter interface number: (1-256) Repeat the steps in this section until all IP interfaces have been configured. press <Enter> without typing a gateway number and go to “IP Routing” on page 33. Default Gateways 1. 4.0.0. To skip default gateway configuration. At the prompt.

When prompted. enable or disable forwarding for IP Routing: Enable IP forwarding? [y/n] Enter y to enable IP forwarding. This eliminates the need to send inter-subnet communication to an external router device. or n to leave it disabled: Enable default gateway? [y/n] 4. can be accomplished through configuring static routes or by letting the switch learn routes dynamically. press <Enter>.BLADE OS 5. When prompted. decide whether to restart Setup or continue: Would you like to run from top again? [y/n] Enter y to restart the Setup utility from the beginning. enter y to enable the default gateway. IP routing between them can be performed entirely within the switch. At the prompt. At the prompt. We recommend that you review the changes. enter n. To disable IP forwarding. This part of the Setup program prompts you to configure the various routing parameters. Routing on more complex networks. August 2009 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 33 . press <Enter> without specifying any number. The system prompts you to configure another default gateway: Enter default gateway number: (1-4) Repeat the steps in this section until all default gateways have been configured. decide whether you wish to review the configuration changes: Review the changes made? [y/n] Enter y to review the changes made during this session of the Setup utility. When all default gateways have been configured. To keep the current setting. Enter n to continue without reviewing the changes. 2. Setup Part 5: Final Steps 1. 1. or n to continue.1 Command Reference 3. where subnets may not have a direct presence on the switch. BMD00114. IP Routing When IP interfaces are configured for the various subnets attached to your switch.

>> System# apply >> System# save 34 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration BMD00114. Apply and save the configuration(s).BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference 3. Next. Changes are normally saved at this point. Changes are normally applied. Note – After initial configuration is complete. Optional Setup for Telnet Support Note – This step is optional. Enter n to return to the “Apply the changes?” prompt. August 2009 . 5. 4. use the following command: >> # /cfg/sys/access/tnet 2. At the prompt. To change the setting. Telnet is enabled by default. decide whether to apply the changes at the prompt: Apply the changes? [y/n] Enter y to apply the changes. Enter n to continue without saving the changes. it is recommended that you change the default passwords as shown in “Setting Passwords” on page 35. Perform this procedure only if you are planning on connecting to the switch through a remote Telnet connection. or n to continue without applying. 1. decide whether to make the changes permanent: Save changes to flash? [y/n] Enter y to save the changes to flash. the system prompts whether to abort them: Abort all changes? [y/n] Enter y to discard the changes. If you do not apply or save the changes.

Apply and save configuration if you are not configuring the switch with Telnet support. August 2009 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 35 . 4. Passwords cannot be modified from the user or operator command mode. they are public and private respectively: >> # /cfg/sys/ssnmp/rcomm|wcomm 3. To change the user. enter the proper community string. operator. Note – If you forget your administrator password. call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode.1 Command Reference Configuring SNMP Support Note – SNMP support is enabled by default. or administrator password. By default. When prompted. Set SNMP read or write community string.BLADE OS 5. >> System# apply >> System# save Setting Passwords It is recommended that you change the user and administrator passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies. 1. Use the following command to enable Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) support: >> # /cfg/sys/access/snmp disable|read only|read/write 2. Otherwise apply and save after the performing the “Optional Setup for Telnet Support” steps. BMD00114. you must log in using the administrator password.

Access Control List Menu pmirr .Step by step configuration set up dump . From the Main Menu.Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg . including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. information. and configuration commands. use the following procedure: 1. use the following command to access the Configuration Menu: Main# /cfg The Configuration Menu is displayed. The default password for the administrator account is admin.Layer 3 Menu rmon .Layer 2 Menu l3 . select the System Menu: >> Configuration# sys 36 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration BMD00114. 2.Backup current configuration to FTP/TFTP server gtcfg . [Configuration Menu] sys .QOS Menu acl . Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password.Port Mirroring Menu l2 . August 2009 .Display current configuration 3.Server Link Failure Detection Menu setup . From the Configuration Menu.Restore current configuration from FTP/TFTP server cur . To change the default password.RMON Menu sfd .1 Command Reference Changing the Default Administrator Password The administrator has complete access to all menus.System-wide Parameter Menu port .BLADE OS 5.Port Menu qos .

Set login banner . [System Access Menu] mgmt .1 Command Reference The System Menu is displayed.HTTPS Web Access Menu snmp .TACACS+ Authentication Menu . From the System Menu.Set Telnet server port number tport . Select the administrator password.Enable/disable user configuration from BBI cur .User Access Control Menu (passwords) https .NTP Server Menu .Management Network Definition Menu user .Set SNMP access control tnport .Enable/disable Telnet/SSH configuration from BBI userbbi . August 2009 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 37 .SSH Server Menu .Set timeout for idle CLI sessions .Set the TFTP Port for the system wport .Enable/disable HTTP (Web) access tnet . [System Menu] syslog sshd radius tacacs+ ldap ntp ssnmp access sflow date time timezone olddst dlight idle notice bannr hprompt reminder rstctrl cur .Enable/disable Telnet access tsbbi .Set login notice .Set system timezone (daylight savings) .Enable/disable Reminders .Display current system-wide parameters 4.BLADE OS 5.sFlow Menu .Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt .System SNMP Menu .Set system date . select the System Access Menu: >> System# access The System Access Menu is displayed.LDAP Authentication Menu .Display current system access configuration 5.RADIUS Authentication Menu .System Access Menu .Enable/disable System reset on panic .Set system DST for US prior to 2007 .Set system time .Syslog Menu .Set system daylight savings .Set HTTP (Web) server port number http . System Access# user/admpw BMD00114.

Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password. select the System Access Menu: >> System# access 38 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration BMD00114.1 Command Reference 6. From the Configuration Menu. call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode.. From the System Menu. validation required. 7.. but you can’t make configuration changes. you can view switch information and statistics. select the System Menu: >> Configuration# sys 4. at the prompt: Re-enter new administrator password: 9. August 2009 . use the following command to access the Configuration Menu: Main# cfg 3. This password can be changed from the user account. 2. Enter current administrator password: Note – If you forget your administrator password. Apply and save your change by entering the following commands: System# apply System# save Changing the Default User Password The user login has limited control of the switch. 1. Enter the new administrator password. From the Main Menu. The default password for the user account is user. Only the administrator can change all passwords. again. Enter the current administrator password at the prompt: Changing ADMINISTRATOR password. as shown in the following procedure. Enter the new administrator password at the prompt: Enter new administrator password: 8.BLADE OS 5. Through a user account.

Operators have access to the switch management features used for daily switch operations. These changes will be lost when the switch is rebooted/reset.. Apply and save your changes: System# apply System# save Changing the Default Operator Password The operator manages all functions of the switch. validation required. Changing USER password. operators cannot severely impact switch operation. 1. use the following command to access the Configuration Menu: Main# cfg BMD00114. Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password. again. Entering the administrator password confirms your authority. Operators can only effect temporary changes on the switch. Enter the new user password at the prompt: Enter new user password: 8. This password cannot be changed from the operator account.1 Command Reference 5.. Select the user password. the operator account is disabled and has no password. Because any changes an operator makes are undone by a reset of the switch. By default. System# user/usrpw 6. Enter current administrator password: 7. From the Main Menu. as shown in the following procedure. August 2009 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 39 . Enter the current administrator password at the prompt. 2. at the prompt: Re-enter new user password: 9. Enter the new user password. Only the administrator has the ability to change passwords. Only the administrator can change the user password. The operator can reset ports or the entire switch.BLADE OS 5.

again.. Enter current administrator password: 7. Enter the new operator password. Only the administrator can change the operator password. Enter the current administrator password at the prompt. Enter the new operator password at the prompt: Enter new operator password: 8.BLADE OS 5.. August 2009 . Changing OPERATOR password. From the System Menu.1 Command Reference 3. select the System Access Menu: >> System# access 5. Entering the administrator password confirms your authority. select the System Menu: >> Configuration# sys 4. From the Configuration Menu. Apply and save your changes: System# apply System# save 40 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration BMD00114. at the prompt: Re-enter new operator password: 9. validation required. System# user/opw 6. Select the user password.

always available] BMD00114. the administrator can use the CLI for performing all levels of switch configuration. The following table shows the Main Menu for the administrator login. To make the CLI easy to use. This chapter describes the Main Menu commands. Each menu displays a list of commands and/or sub-menus that are available. Some features are not available under the user login. [Main Menu] info stats cfg oper boot maint diff apply save revert exit - Information Menu Statistics Menu Configuration Menu Operations Command Menu Boot Options Menu Maintenance Menu Show pending config changes [global command] Apply pending config changes [global command] Save updated config to FLASH [global command] Revert pending or applied changes [global command] Exit [global command. along with a summary of what each command will do.CHAPTER 3 Menu Basics The BLADE OS Command Line Interface (CLI) is used for viewing switch information and statistics. and provides a list of commands and shortcuts that are commonly available from all the menus within the CLI. Below each menu is a prompt where you can enter any command appropriate to the current menu. the various commands have been logically grouped into a series of menus and sub-menus. In addition. August 2009 41 . The Main Menu The Main Menu appears after a successful connection and login.

DNS. and VRRP statistics. Statistics Menu Provides sub-menus for displaying switch performance statistics. enabling you to generate a dump of the critical state information in the switch. or sending NTP requests. This menu is used for bringing ports temporarily in and out of service.BLADE OS 5. Boot Options Menu This menu is used for upgrading switch software.1 Command Reference Menu Summary Information Menu Provides sub-menus for displaying information about the current status of the switch: from basic system settings to VLANs. Operations Menu Operations-level commands are used for making immediate and temporary changes to switch configuration. Maintenance Menu This menu is used for debugging purposes. August 2009 . Configuration Menu This menu is available only from an administrator login. UDP. TCP. Included are port. SNMP. and more. and for resetting the switch when necessary. IP. Changes can be saved to non-volatile memory. ARP. 42 Chapter 3: Menu Basics BMD00114. IF. enabling or disabling FDB learning on a port. ICMP. selecting configuration blocks. It is also used for activating or deactivating optional software packages. Changes to configuration are not active until explicitly applied. and to clear entries in the forwarding database and the ARP and routing tables. routing. It includes sub-menus for configuring every aspect of the switch.

Show any pending configuration changes. navigating through menus. Print current menu . August 2009 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 43 . When used without a value. You will see the following screen: Global Commands: [can be issued from any menu] help up print lines verbose exit diff apply save revert apply ping traceroute telnet pushd popd who chpass_s pwd quit revert history chpass_p The following are used to navigate the menu structure: . go to the Main Menu.. this is used to separate multiple commands placed on the same line. Use this command to restore configuration parameters set since last apply.1 Command Reference Global Commands Some basic commands are recognized throughout the menu hierarchy. Display the current menu. type help. Set the number of lines (n) that display on the screen at one time. or up / Action Provides more information about a specific command on the current menu. When used without the command parameter. If placed at the beginning of a command. or command separator ! Execute command from history Table 4 Description of Global Commands Command ? command or help ..BLADE OS 5. lines diff apply save revert BMD00114. Go up one level in the menu structure. the current setting is displayed. For help on a specific command. Otherwise. or print . These commands are useful for obtaining online help. Write configuration changes to non-volatile flash memory. a summary of the global commands is displayed. The default is 24 lines. Apply pending configuration changes. Move up one menu level / Top menu if first. and for applying and saving configuration changes. Set lines to a value of 0 (zero) to disable pagination. Remove pending configuration changes between “apply” commands.

max-hops (optional) is the maximum distance to trace (1-32 devices). the current setting is displayed. Sets the level of information displayed on the screen: 0 =Quiet: Nothing appears except errors—not even prompts. and delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds for wait for the response. exit or quit ping traceroute pwd verbose n telnet history pushd popd chpass_p chpass_s 44 Chapter 3: Menu Basics BMD00114. Exit from the command line interface and log out. but no menus. 2 =Verbose: Everything is shown. msec delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds between attempts. The format is as follows: telnet <hostname>|<IP address> [port] Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device. Go to the menu path and position previously saved by using pushd. the DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. Use this command to remove any configuration changes made since last save. The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. Display the command path used to reach the current menu. Save the current menu path. Configures the password for the primary TACACS+ server.BLADE OS 5. Use this command to verify station-to-station connectivity across the network. When used without a value. Use this command to identify the route used for station-to-station connectivity across the network. Configures the password for the secondary TACACS+ server. This command is used to telnet out of the switch. As with ping. 1 =Normal: Prompts and requested output are shown. This command displays the most recent commands. The format is as follows: traceroute <host name>| <IP address> [<max-hops (1-32)> [msec delay]] Where IP address is the hostname or IPv4 address of the target station. The format is as follows: ping <host name>|<IP address> [tries (1-32)> [msec delay]] Where IP address is the hostname or IPv4 address of the device. tries (optional) is the number of attempts (1-32). so you can jump back to it using popd.1 Command Reference Table 4 Description of Global Commands Command revert apply Action Remove pending or applied configuration changes between “save” commands. August 2009 .

(Also the Delete key. Move cursor to the end of the command line. August 2009 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 45 . Move the cursor to the beginning of command line.1 Command Reference Command Line History and Editing Using the command line interface. (Also the up arrow key. Repeat the last entered command. <Ctrl-a> <Ctrl-e> <Ctrl-b> or Left arrow key <Ctrl-f> or Right arrow key <Backspace> or Delete key <Ctrl-d> <Ctrl-k> <Ctrl-l> <Ctrl-u> Other keys . or edited using the options below. (Also the left arrow key. Kill (erase) all characters from the cursor position to the end of the command line.) Recall the previous command from the history list. (Also the right arrow key. Repeat the nth command shown on the history list. The recalled command can be entered as is. you can retrieve and modify previously entered commands with just a few keystrokes. The following options are available globally at the command line: Table 5 Command Line History and Editing Options Option Description history !! !n <Ctrl-p> or Up arrow key Display a numbered list of the last 64 previously entered commands. Delete one character at the cursor position.BLADE OS 5.) Move the cursor back one position to the left. or edited using the options below. <Ctrl-n> (Also the down arrow key. Redraw the screen. BMD00114.) Recall the next command from the history list.) Erase one character to the left of the cursor position. or Down arrow key This can be used multiple times to work forward through the last 64 commands. Print the current level menu list. The recalled command can be entered as is. This can be used multiple times to work backward through the last 64 commands.) Move the cursor forward one position to the right. Insert new characters at the cursor position. Clear the entire line.

3. For example.1 Command Reference Command Line Interface Shortcuts The following shortcuts allow you to enter commands quickly and easily. to enable multiple ports with one command: # /cfg/port 1-4/ena (Enable ports 1 though 4) Command Stacking As a shortcut. the keyboard shortcut to access the Spanning Tree Port Configuration Menu from the Main# prompt is as follows: Main# cfg/l2/stg 1/port 46 Chapter 3: Menu Basics BMD00114. separated by forward slashes (/).90-99.20.<range or item 2> Do not use spaces within list and range specifications.4090-4095 (show all VLANs) (show only VLAN 1) (show listed VLANs) (show range 1 through 20) (show multiple ranges) (show a mix of lists and ranges) The numbers in a range must be separated by a dash: <start of range>-<end of range> Multiple ranges or list items are permitted using a comma: <range or item 1>. You can connect as many commands as required to access the menu option that you want. For example.4090-4095 1-5. For example. lists and ranges of items can now be specified. Ranges can also be used to apply the same command option to multiple items.19. August 2009 .4095 1-20 1-5. CLI List and Range Inputs For CLI commands that allow an individual item to be selected from within a numeric range.BLADE OS 5. you can type multiple commands on a single line. the /info/vlan command permits the following options: # # # # # # /info/vlan /info/vlan /info/vlan /info/vlan /info/vlan /info/vlan 1 1.

waiting to be entered. the CLI will display all commands or options in that menu that begin with that letter.1 Command Reference Command Abbreviation Most commands can be abbreviated by entering the first characters which distinguish the command from the others in the same menu or sub-menu. If only one command fits the input text when Tab is pressed. Entering additional letters will further refine the list of commands or options displayed. the command shown above could also be entered as follows: Main# c/l2/stg 1/po Tab Completion By entering the first letter of a command at any menu prompt and pressing the Tab key. For example. BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. the currently active menu will be displayed. If the Tab key is pressed without any input on the command line. August 2009 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 47 . that command will be supplied on the command line.

BLADE OS 5. August 2009 .1 Command Reference 48 Chapter 3: Menu Basics BMD00114.

Layer 2 Information Menu l3 .Dump all information The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 6. For details. August 2009 49 . For details. with pointers to detailed information.Show RMON information link .Show link status port .Show system port and gea port mapping transcvr .Show ACL information rmon . This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch information.System Information Menu l2 .Show Port Transceiver status sfd . BMD00114.Show port information geaport . /info Information Menu [Information Menu] sys .Show Server Link Failure Detection information dump . see page 68. see page 52. Table 6 Information Menu Options (/info) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays the System Information Menu.QoS Menu acl .Layer 3 Information Menu qos .CHAPTER 4 The Information Menu You can view configuration information for the switch in both the user and administrator command modes. l2 Displays the Layer 2 Information Menu.

used by Technical Support personnel. full. down. or both) Link status (up. acl Displays the current configuration profile for each Access Control List (ACL) and ACL Group. qos Displays the Quality of Service (QoS) Information Menu. including: Port name and number Port speed Duplex mode (half. For details.1 Command Reference Table 6 Information Menu Options (/info) Command Syntax and Usage l3 Displays the Layer 3 Information Menu. including: Port name and number Whether the port uses VLAN Tagging or not Port VLAN ID (PVID) Port name VLAN membership Fast Fowarding status FDB Learning status Flood Blocking status For details. link Displays configuration information about each port. 50 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. see page 92. see page 119. For details. yes. port Displays port status information. August 2009 .BLADE OS 5. see page 123. geaport Displays GEA port mapping information. see page 122. see page 128. or auto) Flow control for transmit and receive (no. rmon Displays the Remote Monitoring (RMON) Information Menu. or disabled) For details. For details. see page 131. For details.

dump Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more.1 Command Reference Table 6 Information Menu Options (/info) Command Syntax and Usage transcvr Displays the status of the port transceiver module on each uplink port. For details. If you want to capture dump data to a file.BLADE OS 5. sfd Displays Server Link Failure Detection information. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 51 . BMD00114. see page 133. see page 134. depending on your configuration). For details.

if one is configured For details.BLADE OS 5. see page 54. log Displays most recent syslog messages.1 Command Reference /info/sys System Information Menu [System Menu] snmpv3 general log user dump SNMPv3 Information Menu Show general system information Show last 100 syslog messages Show current user status Dump all system information The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 7. August 2009 . 52 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. Table 7 System Menu Options (/info/sys) Command Syntax and Usage snmpv3 Displays SNMPv3 Information Menu. with pointers to where detailed information can be found. see page 66. To view the menu options. general Displays system information. see page 64. including: System date and time Switch model name and number Switch name and location Time of last boot MAC address of the switch management processor IP address of management interface Hardware version and part number Software image file and version number Configuration name Log-in banner. For details.

depending on your configuration).BLADE OS 5. BMD00114. dump Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 53 .1 Command Reference Table 7 System Menu Options (/info/sys) Command Syntax and Usage user Displays configured user names and their status. see page 67. For details.

the security model.Show notify table information dump . user name.BLADE OS 5.Show vacmViewTreeFamily table information access .Show usmUser table information view .Show vacmSecurityToGroup table information comm . To view a sample.Show all SNMPv3 information Table 8 SNMPv3 information Menu Options (/info/sys/snmpv3) Command Syntax and Usage usm Displays User Security Model (USM) table information. To view a sample. sub-trees.Show vacmAccess table information group . see page 59. [SNMPv3 Information Menu] usm . To view the table.Show targetParams table information notify . mask and type of view. To view a sample. see page 57. To view a sample. and group name.1 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3 SNMPv3 System Information Menu SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2 Framework by supporting the following: a new SNMP message format security for messages access control remote configuration of SNMP parameters For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276. see page 59. view Displays information about view. see page 58.Show community table information taddr . group Displays information about the group that includes. August 2009 . access Displays View-based Access Control information. comm Displays information about the community table information. 54 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.Show targetAddr table information tparam . see page 56.

see page 61. BMD00114. To view a sample. see page 62. see page 60.1 Command Reference Table 8 SNMPv3 information Menu Options (/info/sys/snmpv3) Command Syntax and Usage taddr Displays the Target Address table information. tparam Displays the Target parameters table information. see page 63. To view a sample. To view a sample. dump Displays all the SNMPv3 information. To view a sample. notify Displays the Notify table information.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 55 .

1 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/usm SNMPv3 USM User Table Information The User-based Security Model (USM) in SNMPv3 provides security services such as authentication and privacy of messages. 56 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. This indicates whether messages sent on behalf of this user are protected from disclosure using a privacy protocol. The USM user table contains the following information: the user name a security name in the form of a string whose format is independent of the Security Model an authentication protocol. BLADE OS supports DES algorithm for privacy. This security model makes use of a defined set of user identities displayed in the USM user table. DES PRIVACY NO AUTH. NO PRIVACY Table 9 USM User Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/usm) Field Description User Name Protocol This is a string that represents the name of the user that you can use to access the switch. which is an indication that the messages sent on behalf of the user can be authenticated the privacy protocol usmUser Table: User Name -------------------------------adminmd5 adminsha v1v2only Protocol -------------------------------HMAC_MD5.BLADE OS 5. The software also supports two authentication algorithms: MD5 and HMAC-SHA. DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA. August 2009 .

18 Mask -------------Type -------included included excluded excluded excluded Table 10 SNMPv3 View Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/view) Field Description View Name Subtree Displays the name of the view.3.3. Displays the bit mask. Displays whether a family of view subtrees is included or excluded from the MIB view.6.3.1.6.1.6.6.3 1.16 1.3. Displays the MIB subtree as an OID string.1 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/view SNMPv3 View Table Information The user can control and restrict the access allowed to a group to only a subset of the management information in the management domain that the group can access within each context by specifying the group’s rights in terms of a particular MIB view for security reasons.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 57 .3.1. View Name ----------------iso v1v2only v1v2only v1v2only v1v2only Subtree -----------------1.3 1.3. A view subtree is the set of all MIB object instances which have a common Object Identifier prefix to their names.15 1. Mask Type BMD00114.6.6.

which could be the read or write type of operation or notification into a MIB view. The vacmAccessTable maps a group name. Group Name ---------v1v2grp admingrp Model ------snmpv1 usm Level -----------noAuthNoPriv authPriv ReadV ---------iso iso WriteV ---------iso iso NotifyV ---------v1v2only iso Table 11 SNMPv3 Access Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/access) Field Description Group Name Model Level ReadV WriteV NotifyV Displays the name of group. a context. Displays the minimum level of security required to gain rights of access. and a message type.1 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/access SNMPv3 Access Table Information The access control sub system provides authorization services. Displays the Notify view to which this entry authorizes the notify access. Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the read access. SNMPv1.BLADE OS 5. The read-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group while reading the objects. The View-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of a group. authNoPriv. noAuthNoPriv. security information. for example. August 2009 . The write-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group when writing objects. 58 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. This group's access rights are determined by a read-view. or SNMPv2 or USM. a write-view and a notify-view. Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the write access. Displays the security model used. or authPriv. The notify-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group when sending a notification. For example.

SNMPv2. Displays the access name of the group. SNMPv1. Index Name User Name Tag ---------.---------trap1 public v1v2only v1v2trap Table 13 SNMPv3 Community Table Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/comm) Field Description Index Name User Name Tag Displays the unique index value of a row in this table Displays the community string. This tag specifies a set of transport endpoints from which a command responder application accepts management requests and to which a command responder application sends an SNMP trap. and SNMPv3.1 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/group SNMPv3 Group Table Information A group is a combination of security model and security name that defines the access rights assigned to all the security names belonging to that group. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 59 . The group is identified by a group name. BMD00114. which represents the configuration. Sec Model ---------snmpv1 usm usm User Name ------------------------------v1v2only adminmd5 adminsha Group Name -------------------v1v2grp admingrp admingrp Table 12 SNMPv3 Group Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/group) Field Description Sec Model User Name Group Name Displays the security model used.-------------------. Displays the name for the group. Displays the User Security Model (USM) user name. which is any one of: USM. Displays the community tag. /info/sys/snmpv3/comm SNMPv3 Community Table Information This command displays the community table information stored in the SNMP engine.BLADE OS 5.---------.

Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params ---------. The identified entry contains SNMP parameters to be used when generating messages to be sent to this transport address.25. which is stored in the SNMP engine.--------------. but unique identifier associated with this snmpTargetAddrEntry.1 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/taddr SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information This command displays the SNMPv3 target address table information.81. Displays the transport addresses.66 162 v1v2trap v1v2param Table 14 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/taddr) Field Description Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params Displays the locally arbitrary. The value of this object identifies an entry in the snmpTargetParamsTable. Displays the SNMP UDP port number. August 2009 .--------------trap1 47. 60 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. This column contains a list of tag values which are used to select target addresses for a particular SNMP message.---.---------.

Displays the level of security used when generating SNMP messages using this entry. Displays the Message Processing Model used when generating SNMP messages using this entry. Displays the securityName. which identifies the entry on whose behalf SNMP messages will be generated using this entry.BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/tparam SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information Name MP Model --------------. Sec Level BMD00114. Displays the security model used when generating SNMP messages using this entry. but unique identifier associated with this snmpTargeParamsEntry.-------v1v2param snmpv2c User Name -------------v1v2only Sec Model --------snmpv1 Sec Level --------noAuthNoPriv Table 15 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/tparam) Field Description Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Displays the locally arbitrary. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 61 . The system may choose to return an inconsistentValue error if an attempt is made to set this variable to a value for a security model which the system does not support.

no entries are selected.-------------------v1v2trap v1v2trap Table 16 SNMPv3 Notify Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/notify) Field Description Name Tag The locally arbitrary. 62 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. This represents a single tag value which is used to select entries in the snmpTargetAddrTable. but unique identifier associated with this snmpNotifyEntry.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 . Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable that contains a tag value equal to the value of this entry. If this entry contains a value of zero length. is selected.1 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/notify SNMPv3 Notify Table Information Name Tag -------------------.

--------------.BLADE OS 5.6.---.3.--------.--------------snmpTargetParams Table: Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Sec Level -------------------.---------snmpNotify Table: Name Tag -------------------.6.1.16 v1v2only 1.---------.3. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 63 .3.---------.-----------------.3 v1v2only 1.1.15 v1v2only 1. DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA.3 v1v2only 1.-------------------snmpTargetAddr Table: Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params ---------.3.1 Command Reference /info/sys/snmpv3/dump SNMPv3 Dump Information usmUser Table: User Name -------------------------------adminmd5 adminsha v1v2only vacmAccess Group Name ---------v1v2grp admingrp Table: Model ------snmpv1 usm Protocol -------------------------------HMAC_MD5. DES PRIVACY NO AUTH.-------------------.3.------------------------------snmpv1 v1v2only usm adminmd5 usm adminsha Group Name ----------------------v1v2grp admingrp admingrp snmpCommunity Table: Index Name User Name Tag ---------.-------.------- BMD00114.--------------iso 1.6.6.6.18 Mask ------------ Type -------------included included excluded excluded excluded vacmSecurityToGroup Table: Sec Model User Name ---------.3. NO PRIVACY Level -----------noAuthNoPriv authPriv ReadV ---------iso iso WriteV ---------iso iso NotifyV ---------v1v2only iso vacmViewTreeFamily Table: View Name Subtree -------------------.6.1.

active configuration.200. August 2009 . 2009 Time zone: America/US/Pacific Daylight Savings Time Status: Disabled GbE2c Ethernet Blade Switch for HP c-Class BladeSystem sysName: sysLocation: RackId: Default RUID RackName: MyRack EnclosureSerialNumber: USE843HAJH EnclosureName: Top-Chassis BayNumber: 4 Switch has been up for 2 days. backup. 14 minutes and 52 seconds.1 Command Reference /info/sys/general General System Information System Information at 13:14:11 Tue Jan 3.22.BLADE OS 5.2 Revision: 0A Switch Serial No: MY36012345 Hardware Part No: 410917-B21 Spare Part No: 414037-001 Software Version 5. or factory default) Login banner.0 (FLASH image1). if one is configured 64 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. Last boot reason: reset from console MAC address: 00:17:65:fa:e0:00 IP (If 1) address: 20.1. System information includes: System date and time Switch model name and number HP c-Class Rack name and location Time of last boot MAC address of the switch management processor IP address of the switch Management MAC address and IP address Software image file and version number Current configuration block (active. 6 hours.

depending on the condition as shown below.BLADE OS 5. included in text form as a prefix to the log message.1 Command Reference /info/sys/log Show Recent Syslog Messages Date Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Time 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:41 17:25:42 17:25:42 17:25:42 17:25:42 17:25:42 17:25:42 17:25:42 Criticality level NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: NOTICE system: Message link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up link up on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on port port port port port port port port port port port port port port port port port port port port port 1 8 7 12 11 14 13 16 15 17 20 23 22 23 21 4 3 6 5 10 9 Each syslog message has a criticality level associated with it. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 65 . One of eight different prefixes is used. EMERG: indicates the system is unusable ALERT: Indicates action should be taken immediately CRIT: Indicates critical conditions ERR: indicates error conditions or errored operations WARNING: indicates warning conditions NOTICE: indicates a normal but significant condition INFO: indicates an information message DEBUG: indicates a debug-level message BMD00114.

BLADE OS 5.offline admin .online 1 session Current User ID table: 1: name paul .Always Enabled .offline oper . password valid. cos user . dis.enabled . offline Current strong password settings: strong password status: disabled This command displays the status of the configured usernames.1 Command Reference /info/sys/user User Status Information Usernames: user . 66 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. August 2009 .disabled .

with pointers to where detailed information can be found. lacp Displays the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu. see page 78. see page 77. see page 75. hotlink Displays the Hot Links Information menu.1 Command Reference /info/l2 Layer 2 Information Menu [Layer 2 Menu] fdb lacp failovr hotlink lldp udld oam 8021x stp cist trunk vlan dump Forwarding Database Information Menu Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu Show Failover information Show Hot Links information LLDP Information Menu UDLD Information Menu OAM Information Menu Show 802.1X information Show STP information Show CIST information Show Trunk Group information Show VLAN information Dump all layer 2 information The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 17. For details. BMD00114. see page 80. see page 74. failovr Displays the Layer 2 Failover Information menu. see page 72. Table 17 Layer 2 Menu Options (/info/l2) Command Syntax and Usage fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Information Menu. For details. For details. For details. For details. udld Displays the Unidirectional Link Detection (UDLD) Information menu. For details.BLADE OS 5. lldp Displays the LLDP Information menu. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 67 .

you can view the following STP bridge information: Priority Hello interval Maximum age value Forwarding delay Aging time You can also see the following port-specific STP information: Port priority Cost State Port Fast Forwarding state For details. Spanning Tree mode (STP/PVST+. Administration. see page 84. see page 81. see page 82. 8021x Displays the 802. August 2009 . stp Displays Spanning Tree information. or MSTP). and VLAN membership.BLADE OS 5. PVRST.1X Information Menu. 68 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. In addition to seeing if STP is enabled or disabled. For details. and Maintenance (OAM) Information menu. For details.1 Command Reference Table 17 Layer 2 Menu Options (/info/l2) Command Syntax and Usage oam Displays the Operation. RSTP. including the status (on or off).

August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 69 . BMD00114. you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. vlan Displays VLAN configuration information. depending on your configuration). including the MSTP digest and VLAN membership. including: VLAN Number VLAN Name Status Port membership of the VLAN VLAN management status For details.BLADE OS 5. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. trunk When trunk groups are configured. For details. root port) CIST port information includes: Port number and priority Cost State For details. path cost. If you want to capture dump data to a file.1 Command Reference Table 17 Layer 2 Menu Options (/info/l2) Command Syntax and Usage cist Displays Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) information. see page 88. CIST bridge information includes: Priority Hello interval Maximum age value Forwarding delay Root bridge information (priority. dump Dumps all switch information available from the Layer 2 menu (10K or more. MAC address. see page 91. see page 90.

state unknown|forward|trunk Displays all FDB entries of a particular state. Enter the MAC address using the format.Show FDB entries on a single VLAN state .Show a single FDB entry by MAC address port . 70 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. The FDB also shows which other ports have seen frames destined for a particular MAC address. For more information. Note – The master forwarding database supports up to 8K MAC address entries on the MP per switch. Table 18 FDB Information Menu Options (/info/l2/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage find <MAC address> [<VLAN>] Displays a single database entry by its MAC address.1 Command Reference /info/l2/fdb FDB Information Menu [Forwarding Database Menu] find . You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device. For example.Show FDB entries on a single port vlan . 08:00:20:12:34:56 You can also enter the MAC address using the format. vlan <VLAN number> Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN.Show all FDB entries The forwarding database (FDB) contains information that maps the media access control (MAC) address of each known device to the switch port where the device address was learned. For example. see page 73. xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. 080020123456 port <port number> Displays all FDB entries for a particular port. xxxxxxxxxxxx.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 .Show FDB entries by state dump . dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database.

means that it has been learned by the switch. although ports which reference the address as a destination will be listed under “Reference ports. refer to “Forwarding Database Maintenance Menu” on page 396.BLADE OS 5.” Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database To clear the entire FDB. When in the trunking (TRK) state. BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 71 . the port field represents the trunk group number. If the state for the port is listed as unknown (UNK). no outbound port is indicated. but has only been seen as a destination address.1 Command Reference /info/l2/fdb/dump Show All FDB Information MAC address ----------------00:04:38:90:54:18 00:09:6b:9b:01:5f 00:09:6b:ca:26:ef 00:0f:06:ec:3b:00 00:11:43:c4:79:83 VLAN ---1 1 4095 4095 1 Port ---21 21 22 22 21 Trnk ---State ----FWD FWD FWD FWD FWD Permanent --------- P An address that is in the forwarding (FWD) state. When an address is in the unknown state. the MAC address has not yet been learned by the switch.

August 2009 .1 Command Reference /info/l2/lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information Menu [LACP Menu] aggr port dump . port Displays LACP information about the selected port.Show LACP port information . 72 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. see page 75. dump Displays a summary of LACP information. Table 19 LACP Menu Options (/info/l2/lacp) Command Syntax and Usage aggr <port number> Displays detailed information about the LACP aggregator used by the selected port. For details.Show all LACP ports information Use these commands to display Link Aggregation Protocol (LACP) status information about each port on the switch.BLADE OS 5.Show LACP aggregator information for the port .

or off).Show Trigger information Table 20 describes the Layer 2 Failover information options. LACP dump includes the following information for each uplink port: lacp adminkey operkey selected prio aggr trunk status Displays the port’s LACP mode (active. Shows the value of the port priority.. Displays the value of the port’s adminkey. Displays the aggregator associated with each port.. Displays the status of LACP on the port (up or down).1 Command Reference /info/l2/lacp/dump Show All LACP Information port mode adminkey operkey selected prio aggr trunk status ----------------------------------------------------------------------1 off 1 1 yes 32768 ---2 off 2 2 yes 32768 ---3 off 3 3 no 32768 ---4 off 4 4 no 32768 ---5 off 5 5 no 32768 ---.BLADE OS 5. Shows the value of the port’s operational key. passive. /info/l2/failovr Layer 2 Failover Information Menu [Failover Info Menu] trigger . Indicates whether the port has been selected to be part of a Link Aggregation Group. BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 73 . Table 20 Failover Menu Options (/info/l2/failovr) Command Syntax and Usage trigger <trigger number> Displays detailed information about the selected Layer 2 Failover trigger. This value represents the LACP trunk group number.

the port is in the Forwarding state. A control port is considered to be operational if the monitor trigger state is Up... If any of the above conditions are not true. and the LACP status is Not Aggregated. from a teaming perspective the port status is Operational. A control port’s status is displayed as Failed only if the monitor trigger state is Down. A monitor port’s Failover status is Operational only if all the following conditions hold true: Port link is up. 74 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. If the port is a member of an LACP trunk group. If Spanning-Tree is enabled. the port is aggregated. Spanning-Tree status is Blocking. Even if a port’s link status is Down. August 2009 . since the trigger is Up.BLADE OS 5. the monitor port is considered to be failed.1 Command Reference /info/l2/failovr/trigger <trigger number> Show Layer 2 Failover Information Trigger 1 Auto Monitor: Enabled Trigger 1 limit: 0 Monitor State: Up Member Status ------------------trunk 1 21 Operational 22 Operational Control State: Auto Disabled Member Status ------------------1 Operational 2 Operational 3 Operational 4 Operational .

fdelay 1 sec Active state: None Master settings: port 21 Backup settings: port 22 Hot Links trigger information includes the following: Hot Links status (on or off) Status of BPDU flood option Status of FDB send option Status and configuration of each Hot Links trigger BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 75 . /info/l2/hotlink/trigger Hotlinks Trigger Information Hot Links Info: Trigger Current global Hot Links setting: ON bpdu disabled sndfdb disabled Current Trigger 1 setting: enabled name "Trigger 1".BLADE OS 5.Show Trigger information Table 21 Hot Links menu options (/info/l2/hotlink) Command Syntax and Usage trigger Displays status and configuration information for each Hot Links trigger.1 Command Reference /info/l2/hotlink Hot Links Information Menu [Hot Links Info Menu] trigger . see page 77. preempt enabled. To view a sample display.

see page 79. dump Displays all LLDP information. August 2009 .Show LLDP transmit state machine information remodev . To view a sample display.Show LLDP remote devices information dump .Show LLDP receive state machine information tx .1 Command Reference /info/l2/lldp LLDP Information Menu [LLDP Information Menu] port .Show all LLDP information Table 22 LLDP Information menu options (/info/l2/lldp) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) port information. rx Displays information about the LLDP receive state machine. remodev Displays information received from LLDP -capable devices. tx Displays information about the LLDP transmit state machine. 76 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.Show LLDP port information rx .BLADE OS 5.

132 Interface Subtype : ifIndex Interface Number : 1 Object Identifier : BMD00114. LLDP remote device information provides a summary of information about remote devices connected to the switch. flash image: version 5. as shown below.1 Command Reference /info/l2/lldp/remodev LLDP Remote Device Information LLDP Remote Devices Information LocalPort | Index | Remote Chassis ID | Remote Port | Remote System Name ----------|-------|----------------------|-------------|------------------22 | 1 | 00 18 b1 4c 0d 00 | 24 | 1:10Gb Ethernet . follow the remodev command with the index number of the remote device.BLADE OS 5..0.100.120.1. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 77 . To view detailed information about a device. boot image: version 5.0 System Capabilities Supported : bridge System Capabilities Enabled : bridge Remote Management Address: Subtype : IPv4 Address : 10.1.. Local Port Alias: 22 Remote Device Index : 1 Remote Device TTL : 132 Remote Device RxChanges : false Chassis Type : Mac Address Chassis Id : 00-18-b1-4c-0d-00 Port Type : Locally Assigned Port Id : 24 Port Description : ethernet (1000) System Name : 1:10Gb Ethernet Blade Switch System Description : HP 1:10Gb Ethernet Blade Switch.

1 Command Reference /info/l2/udld Unidirectional Link Detection Information Menu [UDLD Information Menu] port .BLADE OS 5. bidirectional. unidirectional. /info/l2/udld/port <port number> UDLD Port Information UDLD information on port 21 Port enable administrative configuration setting: Enabled Port administrative mode: normal Port enable operational state: link up Port operational state: advertisement Port bidirectional status: bidirectional Message interval: 15 Time out interval: 5 Neighbor cache: 1 neighbor detected Entry #1 Expiration time: 31 seconds Device Name: Device ID: 00:da:c0:00:04:00 Port ID: 21 UDLD information includes the following: Status (enabled or disabled) Mode (normal or aggressive) Port state (link up or link down) Bi-directional status (unknown. August 2009 . dump Displays all UDLD information.Show all UDLD information Table 23 UDLD Information menu options (/info/l2/udld) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays UDLD information about the selected port. To view a sample display. neighbor mismatch) 78 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. TX-RX loop.Show UDLD port information dump . see page 80.

August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 79 . dump Displays all OAM information. BMD00114.Show OAM port information dump . /info/l2/oam/port <port number> OAM Port Information OAM information on port 21 State enabled Mode active Link up Satisfied Yes Evaluating No Remote port information: Mode active MAC address 00:da:c0:00:04:00 Stable Yes State valid Yes Evaluating No OAM port display shows information about the selected port and the peer to which the link is connected. see page 81. To view a sample display.Show all OAM information Table 24 OAM Discovery Information menu options (/info/l2/oam) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays OAM information about the selected port.1 Command Reference /info/l2/oam OAM Discovery Information Menu [OAM Information Menu] port .BLADE OS 5.

.---------1 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *2 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *3 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *4 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *5 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *6 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *7 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *8 force-auth authorized initialize initialize 9 force-auth authorized initialize initialize 10 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *11 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *12 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *13 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *14 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *15 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *16 force-auth authorized initialize initialize *17 force-auth unauthorized initialize initialize *18 force-auth unauthorized initialize initialize *19 force-auth unauthorized initialize initialize *20 force-auth unauthorized initialize initialize .BLADE OS 5. August 2009 .-----------.-------------.1X Information System capability System status Protocol version Guest VLAN status Guest VLAN : : : : : Authenticator disabled 1 disabled none Authenticator Backend Port Auth Mode Auth Status PAE State Auth State ----. Displays the Access Control authorization mode for the port.1X parameters. The Authorization mode can be one of the following: force-unauth auto force-auth 80 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114..Port down or disabled The following table describes the IEEE 802.-----------. Table 25 802.1 Command Reference /info/l2/8021x 802.1X Parameter Descriptions (/info/l2/8021x) Parameter Description Port Auth Mode Displays the port number. -----------------------------------------------------------------* .

The Backend Authorization state can be one of the following: initialize request response success fail timeout idle BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 81 . Displays the Authenticator Port Access Entity State. either authorized or unauthorized.1X Parameter Descriptions (/info/l2/8021x) (continued) Parameter Description Auth Status Authenticator PAE State Displays the current authorization status of the port. The PAE state can be one of the following: initialize disconnected connecting authenticating authenticated aborting held forceAuth Backend Auth State Displays the Backend Authorization State.BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference Table 25 802.

Information includes the priority (in hexadecimal format) and MAC address of the root. see “RSTP/MSTP Information” on page 86. Priority (bridge) 82 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.BLADE OS 5.----------------. or Per VLAN Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (PVRST) are turned on. in addition to seeing if STG is enabled or disabled. update 40 Pvst+ compatibility mode enabled -----------------------------------------------------------------Spanning Tree Group 1: On (STP/PVST+) VLANs: 1 Current Root: ffff 00:13:0a:4f:7d:d0 Parameters: Priority 65534 Path-Cost 0 Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel 21 2 20 15 FwdDel 15 Aging 300 Hello 2 MaxAge 20 Port Priority Cost FastFwd State Designated Bridge Des Port ---. ! = Automatic path cost.---. When STP is used..1D Spanning Tree Protocol (STP).-------. you can view the following STG bridge information: Table 26 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Current Root The Current Root shows information about the root bridge for the Spanning Tree.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP). August 2009 .. the IEEE 802.----------.------1 2 3 .1 Command Reference /info/l2/stp Spanning Tree Information -----------------------------------------------------------------upfast disabled. 0 0 0 0 0 0 n n n FORWARDING * FORWARDING * FORWARDING * * = STP turned off for this port. The switch software uses the IEEE 802. The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the STG root bridge. If IEEE 802.-------.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP).

The Forward Delay parameter specifies. The state field can be either BLOCKING. the lower the path cost. The aging time parameter specifies. MaxAge FwdDel Aging Priority (port) Cost FastFwd State Designated Bridge Designated Port BMD00114. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment. in seconds. FORWARDING. in seconds. in seconds. Generally speaking. the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from listening to learning and from learning state to forwarding state. The FastFwd shows whether the port is in Fast Forwarding mode or not. in seconds. The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. A setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link speed has been auto negotiated. if applicable. Information includes the priority (hex) and MAC address of the Designated Bridge. the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigure the STG network.1 Command Reference Table 26 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions (continued) Parameter Description Hello The hello time parameter specifies. The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value. how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). which permits the port that participates in Spanning Tree to bypass the Listening and Learning states and enter directly into the Forwarding state. The Designated Bridge shows information about the bridge connected to each port. the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. The maximum age parameter specifies. LEARNING.BLADE OS 5. LISTENING. or DISABLED. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 83 . The state field shows the current state of the port. the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the Forwarding Database. the faster the port. The identifier of the port on the Designated Bridge to which this port is connected.

-----. Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value. Table 27 RSTP/MSTP Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Current Root The Current Root shows information about the root bridge for the Spanning Tree. Information includes the priority (in hexadecimal format) and MAC address of the root. you can view RSTP/MSTP bridge information for the Spanning Tree Group and port-specific RSTP information.---1 0 0 DSB 2 0 0 DSB 3 0 0 DSB 4 0 0 DSB . The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the STP root bridge.BLADE OS 5. how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). August 2009 . Priority (bridge) Hello 84 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) or the IEEE 802. If RSTP/MSTP is turned on (see page 273)..1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP).---. in seconds.------------------.1 Command Reference /info/l2/stg RSTP/MSTP Information Spanning Tree Group 1: On (RSTP) VLANs: 1 Current Root: ffff 00:13:0a:4f:7d:d0 Parameters: Priority 61440 Path-Cost 0 Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel 21 2 20 15 FwdDel 15 Aging 300 Hello 2 MaxAge 20 Port Prio Cost State Role Designated Bridge Des Port Type ---.---.-------. The switch software can be set to use the IEEE 802.---. * = STP turned off for this port. The hello time parameter specifies. The following table describes the STP parameters in RSTP or MSTP mode..

August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 85 . Learning (LRN). the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigures the STP network. or Disabled (DSB). In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment. Information includes the priority (in hexadecimal format) and MAC address of the Designated Bridge. The Role field shows the current role of this port in the Spanning Tree. Master (MAST). Type of link connected to the port. The port ID of the port on the Designated Bridge to which this port is connected. in seconds. Backup (BKUP). Generally speaking. The port role can be one of the following: Designated (DESG). Disabled (DSB). The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. The State field in RSTP or MSTP mode can be one of the following: Discarding (DISC). FwdDel Aging Prio (port) Cost State Role Designated Bridge Designated Port Type BMD00114. The aging time parameter specifies. Alternate (ALTN). Link type values are AUTO. and whether the port is an edge port. Forwarding (FWD). The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. the faster the port. or SHARED. The Designated Bridge shows information about the bridge connected to each port. the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the Forwarding Database. the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from listening to learning and from learning state to forwarding state. A setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link speed has been auto negotiated. the lower the path cost. P2P. The Forward Delay parameter specifies.1 Command Reference Table 27 RSTP/MSTP Parameter Descriptions (continued) Parameter Description MaxAge The maximum age parameter specifies. if applicable. in seconds. Root (ROOT). the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. in seconds.BLADE OS 5. The State field shows the current state of the port.

. Table 28 CIST Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description CIST Root The CIST Root shows information about the root bridge for the Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST). In addition to seeing if Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) is enabled or disabled. August 2009 . 128 128 128 128 2000 FWD 2000 FWD 2000 DSB 2000 DSB DESG 8000-00:03:42:fa:3b:80 8001 4 DESG 8000-00:03:42:fa:3b:80 8002 P2P.BLADE OS 5. The following table describes the CIST parameters.---1 2 3 4 . how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU).1 Command Reference /info/l2/cist Common Internal Spanning Tree Information Common Internal Spanning Tree: on VLANs MAPPED: 1-4094 VLANs: 1 4095 Current Root: 8000 00:11:58:ae:39:00 Cist Regional Root: 8000 00:11:58:ae:39:00 Parameters: Path-Cost 0 Path-Cost 0 Port MaxAge FwdDel 0 20 15 Priority MaxAge FwdDel Hops 61440 20 15 20 Port Prio Cost State Role Designated Bridge Des Port Hello Type ---. in seconds.---. The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the STP root bridge. CIST Regional Root Priority (bridge) Hello 86 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. Values on this row of information refer to the regional root. The hello time parameter specifies.-------.--------------------.---. Edge * = STP turned off for this port. Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value..----. you can view CIST bridge and port-specific information.---. Values on this row of information refer to the CIST root. The CIST Regional Root shows information about the root bridge for this MSTP region.-----.

the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding state. the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigure the STP network. Generally speaking. Master (MAST). The Designated Bridge shows information about the bridge connected to each port. A setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link speed has been auto negotiated. The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. The port role can be one of the following: Designated (DESG).1 Command Reference Table 28 CIST Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description MaxAge The maximum age parameter specifies. if applicable. Alternate (ALTN). in seconds. FwdDel Priority (port) Cost State Role Designated Bridge Designated Port Type BMD00114. the lower the path cost. the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. or Forwarding (FWD). The state field shows the current state of the port. Link type values are AUTO. in seconds. The state field can be either Discarding (DISC).BLADE OS 5. Information includes the priority (in hexadecimal format) and MAC address of the Designated Bridge. Backup (BKUP). Learning (LRN). The port ID of the port on the Designated Bridge to which this port is connected. Disabled (DSB). and whether the port is an edge port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment. P2P. The forward delay parameter specifies. or SHARED. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 87 . The Role field shows the current role of this port in the Spanning Tree. Type of link connected to the port. the faster the port. or Unknown (UNK). Root (ROOT). The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port.

you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. Note – If Spanning Tree Protocol on any port in the trunk group is set to forwarding.BLADE OS 5. 88 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.1 Command Reference /info/l2/trunk Trunk Group Information Trunk group 1: Enabled Protocol . August 2009 . the remaining ports in the trunk group will also be set to forwarding.Static Port state: 17: STG 1 forwarding 18: STG 1 forwarding When trunk groups are configured.

August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 89 .1 Command Reference /info/l2/vlan VLAN Information VLAN ---1 24 300 4000 4095 Name Status Ports -------------------------------.---------------Default VLAN ena 4 5 redlan ena 24 ixiaTraffic ena 1 12 13 23 bpsports ena 3-6 8-10 Mgmt VLAN ena 18 Protocol -------1 FrameType EtherType -------------------Ether2 0080 Priority -------0 Status -----ena Ports ----------4 PVLAN ----1 PVLAN ----none PVLAN-Tagged Ports --------------------------none Type --------primary Mapped-To ---------empty Status ---------ena Ports ----------------empty Private-VLAN -----------20 This information display includes all configured VLANs and all member ports that have an active link state.BLADE OS 5. Port membership is represented in slot/port format. VLAN information includes: VLAN Number VLAN Name Status Port membership of the VLAN Protocol-based VLAN information Private VLAN configuration BMD00114.-----.

see page 100. ospf Displays OSPF routing Information Menu. see page 97. August 2009 . For details.1 Command Reference /info/l3 Layer 3 Information Menu [Layer 3 Menu] route arp ospf rip ip igmp vrrp sm dump IP Routing Information Menu ARP Information Menu OSPF Routing Information Menu RIP Routing Information Menu Show IP information Show IGMP Snooping Multicast Group information Show Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol information Server Mobility Information Menu Dump all layer 3 information The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 29. with pointers to detailed information. arp Displays the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Information Menu. subnet mask.BLADE OS 5. or 16 for infinite hops) The IP interface that the route uses For details. For details. rip Displays Routing Information Protocol Menu. specifying the number of hops to the destination (1-15 hops. Table 29 Layer 3 Menu Options (/info/l3) Command Syntax and Usage route Displays the IP Routing Menu. Using the options of this menu. For details. see page 106. and gateway address Type of route Tag indicating origin of route Metric for RIP tagged routes. the system displays the following for each configured or learned route: Route destination IP address. see page 94. 90 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.

BMD00114. gateway number. If you want to capture dump data to a file. includes: IP interface information: Interface number. IP address. dump Dumps all switch information available from the Layer 3 Menu (10K or more.BLADE OS 5. For details. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 91 . For details. and health status IP forwarding settings. depending on your configuration). IP address. For details. see page 117. sm Displays the Server Mobility Information Menu. vrrp Displays the VRRP Information Menu. For details. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.1 Command Reference Table 29 Layer 3 Menu Options (/info/l3) Command Syntax and Usage ip Displays IP Information. Default gateway information: Metric for selecting which configured gateway to use. and operational status. route map settings igmp Displays IGMP Information Menu. IP information. network filter settings. see page 118. see page 110. subnet mask. see page 114. VLAN number.

tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|broadcast|martian|multicast Displays routes of a single tag.101)> Displays a single route by destination IP address. Table 30 Route Information Menu Options (/info/l3/route) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as 192.1 Command Reference /info/l3/route IP Routing Information Menu [IP Routing Menu] find .Show if . see Table 32 on page 96.Show gw . 92 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. August 2009 .Show tag .Show dump .Show a single route by destination IP address routes to a single gateway routes of a single type routes of a single tag routes on a single interface all routes Using the commands listed below. gw <default gateway address (such as 192.44)> Displays routes to a single gateway.17. if <interface number> Displays routes on a single interface. For a description of IP routing types. see page 95. For more information.Show type . see Table 31 on page 95.4.4. you can display all or a portion of the IP routes currently held in the switch. For a description of IP routing types.BLADE OS 5. dump Displays all routes configured in the switch. type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast Displays routes of a single type.17.

20.20.255.0.255.1 indirect static 256 * 127.38 local addr 256 * 12.0.255 255.0 240.0 224.0.BLADE OS 5.0.20.255.0. BMD00114.0. Indicates a broadcast route.0.0.0.255.255 172.255.---. Packets to this destination are discarded.255 255.38 255.--------------.0 martian martian * 12.0.0 0.0 172. The destination belongs to a host or subnet which is filtered out.0.20.0 0.255.20.--* 0. Indicates a route to one of the switch’s IP interfaces.255 172.20.0.0 martian martian * 224.--------------.255.0.0.1 Command Reference /info/l3/route/dump Show All IP Route Information Status code: * .0.0 0.0 multicast addr * 255.0.255.255.255 broadcast broadcast 256 * 224.255 broadcast broadcast The following table describes the Type parameters.255 255. Packets will be delivered to a destination host or subnet attached to the switch.best Destination Mask Gateway Type Tag Metr If --------------.0.0 172.0.60.255.255.255. Table 31 IP Routing Type Parameters Parameter Description indirect direct local broadcast martian multicast The next hop to the host or subnet destination will be forwarded through a router at the Gateway address.0. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 93 .--------.0 255.255.60.38 direct fixed 256 * 12.60.0.0 0.0 255.60.0.20.0.--------. Indicates a multicast route.0.0.

August 2009 . Indicates a broadcast address. The address was learned by Open Shortest Path First (OSPF).1 Command Reference The following table describes the Tag parameters. 94 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. The address belongs to a filtered group. The address belongs to one of the switch’s IP interfaces.BLADE OS 5. The address is a static route which has been configured on the switch. Table 32 IP Routing Tag Parameters Parameter Description fixed static addr rip ospf broadcast martian multicast The address belongs to a host or subnet attached to the switch. The address was learned by the Routing Information Protocol (RIP). Indicates a multicast address.

BLADE OS 5. and VLAN flags. MAC address. VLAN and port for the address. addr Displays the ARP address list: IP address.Show all ARP entries The ARP information includes IP address and MAC address of each entry.Show ARP address list dump .Show ARP entries on a single port vlan . dump Displays all ARP entries.1 Command Reference /info/l3/arp ARP Information Menu [Address Resolution Protocol Menu] find . and port referencing information. vlan <VLAN number> Displays the ARP entries on a single VLAN.101> Displays a single ARP entry by IP address.4. 192. BMD00114. Table 33 ARP Information Menu Options (/info/l3/arp) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as.17. including: IP address and MAC address of each entry Address status flag (see below) The VLAN and port to which the address belongs The ports which have referenced the address (empty if no port has routed traffic to the IP address shown) For more information. address status flags (see Table 33 on page 97). IP mask. see page 98. port <port number> Displays the ARP entries on a single port.Show a single ARP entry by IP address port .Show ARP entries on a single VLAN addr . August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 95 .

----4095 1 96 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.---.66 255.255. the designated port will be the normal ingress port.255 00:22:00:b8:c0:01 205. The MAC address has not been learned.--------------.255. August 2009 .111 00:1f:29:95:f7:e5 4095 19 12.20.255.178.20.23. The Flag field is interpreted as follows: Table 34 ARP Dump Flag Parameters Flag Description P R U Permanent entry created for switch IP interface.1 255. Unresolved ARP entry.38 P 00:22:00:b8:c0:01 4095 Note – If you have VMA turned on. If you have VMA turned off.BLADE OS 5.1 00:15:40:07:20:42 4095 19 12.----------------205.20. the referenced port will be the designated port.60.178.60.---12.1.50.1 00:1a:4b:cd:77:36 4095 19 12.20. /info/l3/arp/addr ARP Address List Information IP address IP mask MAC address --------------. Indirect route entry.255.255 00:70:cf:03:20:06 VLAN Pass-Up ---.18.----------------.1 Command Reference /info/l3/arp/dump Show All ARP Entry Information IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port --------------.----.

BLADE OS 5. dbase Displays OSPF database menu.Show summary address list nsumadd . see page 103. If no parameter is supplied. See page 102 for a sample output. aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays area information for a particular area index. To view menu options.Show OSPF information Table 35 OSPF Information Menu options (/info/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage general Displays general OSPF information.C.Show interface(s) information virtual . August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 97 . If no parameter is supplied.Database Menu sumaddr .Show details of virtual links nbr .Show area(s) information if . If no router ID is supplied. sumaddr <area index (0-2)> Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to non-NSSA areas. it displays area information for all the areas.Show neighbor(s) information dbase .Show NSSA summary address list routes .Show OSPF routes dump .B. See page 102 for a sample output.Show general information aindex . BMD00114. it displays the information about all the current neighbors. virtual Displays information about all the configured virtual links. if <interface number> Displays interface information for a particular interface. nbr <nbr router-id (A.D)> Displays the status of a neighbor with a particular router ID. it displays information for all the interfaces.1 Command Reference /info/l3/ospf OSPF Information Menu [OSPF Information Menu] general .

August 2009 . 98 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. dump Displays the OSPF information.1 Command Reference Table 35 OSPF Information Menu options (/info/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage nsumadd <area index (0-2)> Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to NSSA areas. See page 105 for a sample output. routes Displays OSPF routing table.BLADE OS 5.

1. Area 0.BLADE OS 5.10. Dead 40.0 Authentication : none Import ASExtern : yes Number of times SPF ran : 8 Area Border Router count : 2 AS Boundary Router count : 0 LSA count : 5 LSA Checksum sum : 0x2237B Summary : noSummary /info/l3/ospf/if <interface number> OSPF Interface Information Ip Address 10. Authentication type none BMD00114. Wait 1663.12. of which 2 are >=INIT state. 2 are =FULL state Number of areas is 2.0.10.12. Poll interval 0. Hello 10. Retransmit 5.10. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 99 .10.2 Timer intervals. Ip Address 10.12.0.0.1.1 Started at 1663 and the process uptime is 4626 Area Border Router: yes.1 Command Reference /info/l3/ospf/general OSPF General Information OSPF Version 2 Router ID: 10. Ip Address 10.0. Admin Status UP Router ID 10.1.10.10.1. Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10.14.1 Backup Designated Router (ID) 10.10.10. of which 3-transit 0-nssa Area Id : 0. State DR. 2 are >=EXCH state.10. Transit delay 1 Neighbor count is 1 If Events 4.10.1. AS Boundary Router: no LS types supported are 6 External LSA count 0 External LSA checksum sum 0x0 Number of interfaces in this router is 2 Number of virtual links in this router is 1 16 new lsa received and 34 lsa originated from this router Total number of entries in the LSDB 10 Database checksum sum 0x0 Total neighbors are 1.

C.1.1 Command Reference /info/l3/ospf/dbase OSPF Database Information Menu [OSPF Database Menu] advrtr .1.Router LS Database info self .B.1.1 Displays ASBR summary LSAs having the link state ID 10.1.1.LS Database summary ext .LS Database info for an Advertising Router asbrsum . dbsumm Displays the following information about the LS database in a table format: Number of LSAs of each type in each area. asbrsum <adv-rtr (A.C.Network LS Database info nssa .1 Displays ASBR summary LSAs having the advertising router 20.1.All Table 36 OSPF Database Information Menu Options (/info/l3/ospf/dbase) Command Syntax and Usage advrtr <router-id (A. for example: 20. Total number of LSAs for each area. asbrsum link-state-id 10. No parameters are required.Self Originated LS Database info summ . asbrsum self Displays the self advertised ASBR summary LSAs. Total number of LSAs for all LSA types for all areas combined.B.NSSA External LS Database info rtr .1. The usage of this command is as follows: asbrsum adv-rtr 20.1. August 2009 .Network-Summary LS Database info all .1.1.ASBR Summary LS Database info dbsumm . asbrsum with no parameters displays all the ASBR summary LSAs.1. 100 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.D> | <self> Displays ASBR summary LSAs. Total number of LSAs for each LSA type for all areas combined.B.C. Displays all the Link State Advertisements (LSAs) in the LS database that have the advertising router with the specified router ID.BLADE OS 5.1.D)> Takes advertising router as a parameter.1.D)> | <link_state_id (A.External LS Database info nw .

BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 101 . The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum. rtr <adv-rtr (A.D)>|<link_state_id (A.C.C. No parameters are required.B.D)>|<link_state_id (A.D>|<self> Displays the router (type 1) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.BLADE OS 5. summ <adv-rtr (A.C.network LS database.B.C.B.D>|<self> Displays the network (type 2) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSA. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum. self Displays all the self-advertised LSAs.B.C. nssa <adv-rtr (A. nw <adv-rtr (A.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.B.C.C.C.1 Command Reference Table 36 OSPF Database Information Menu Options (/info/l3/ospf/dbase) Command Syntax and Usage ext <adv-rtr (A.D>|<self> Displays the NSSA (type 7) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.D>|<self> Displays the network summary (type 3) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.B. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.C.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A. all Displays all the LSAs.D)>|<link_state_id (A.D>|<self> Displays the AS-external (type 5) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.B.B. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.B.

1/32 via 30.0.1 Command Reference /info/l3/ospf/routes OSPF Route Codes Information Codes: IA N1 E1 * OSPF inter area.0.1.0.0/30 via 1.0.0.1.BLADE OS 5.1 2.1 13. August 2009 .0.1. E2 .0.OSPF NSSA external type 2 OSPF external type 1.1.2 172.1.0/30 directly connected 0.0.2/32 via 30.0.0.0.0/30 via 1.2 102 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.1.18. OSPF NSSA external type 1.0. N2 .0/0 via 1.1 172.18.0.OSPF external type 2 best IA *IA *IA E2 E2 1.0.

2 metric 2 This table contains all dynamic routes learnt through RIP.0/8 via 30. For more information.1.BLADE OS 5. see page 106.0/16 via 30.1.0.1.0.1.1. see page 106. For more information. /info/l3/rip/dump <interface number> Show RIP Interface Information RIP USER CONFIGURATION : RIP on update 30 RIP Interface 1 : 10. Table 37 RIP Information Menu Options (/info/l3/rip) Command Syntax and Usage routes Displays RIP routes.Show RIP user's configuration Use this menu to view information about the Routing Information Protocol (RIP) configuration and statistics.11 metric 4 4.0/24 directly connected 3.1.1.11 metric 16 10.0/8 via 30.1.2.0/8 via 30. supply enabled. including the routes that are undergoing garbage collection with metric = 16. trigg enabled. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 103 .1.0.Show RIP routes dump . mcast enabled.4.key none BMD00114. split horizon enabled.0.1 Command Reference /info/l3/rip Routing Information Protocol Information Menu [RIP Information Menu] routes . enabled version 2.0. listen enabled. This table does not contain locally configured static routes.0. /info/l3/rip/routes RIP Routes Information >> IP Routing# /info/l3/rip/routes 30. metric 1 auth none. dump <interface number or zero for all IFs)> Displays RIP user’s configuration.0.1. default none poison disabled.2 metric 3 20.0.4.

and operational status. IP address. and health status Server Mobility settings IP forwarding settings.144. including the forwarding status of directed broadcasts.200. up active Current ServerMobility settings: OFF ServerMobility Encoding Scheme: switch ServerMobility ports: empty DHCP request filtering enabled ports: empty Relay on non-ServerMobility ports: Ena Active-Backup ports: Auto-Recovery: Disabled Auto-Recovery Time: 5 seconds Current IP forwarding settings: OFF. dirbr disabled.27.100.100. if applicable Default gateway information: Metric for selecting which configured gateway to use.200.0 200. gateway number.1.255.255. noicmprd disabled Current network filter settings: none Current route map settings: IP information includes: IP interface information: Interface number.27. up Loopback interface information: Default gateway information: metric strict 1: 20. vlan 1.BLADE OS 5. vlan 4095. vlan 4095.255.100.200.11 255.1 Command Reference /info/l3/ip IP Information IP information: Interface information: 1: 20.1. FAILED 4: 10.255.27. August 2009 . DOWN Reminder: Please make sure that ports are in VLAN 1 and have link. Loopback interface information. vlan any. VLAN number. 256: 10.2 255.255. and the status of ICMP re-directs Network filter settings Route map settings 104 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.0 10.144. broadcast address. subnet mask.255. IP address.144.

1 Command Reference /info/l3/igmp IGMP Multicast Group Information Menu [IGMP Multicast mrouter find vlan port trunk detail dump Menu] Show IGMP Snooping Multicast Router Port information Show a single group by IP group address Show groups on a single vlan Show groups on a single port Show groups on a single trunk Show detail of a single group by IP group address Show all groups Table 40 describes the commands used to display information about IGMP groups learned by the switch. port <port number> Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single port. detail <IP address> Displays details about IGMP multicast groups. Table 38 IGMP Multicast Group Information Menu Options (/info/l3/igmp) Command Syntax and Usage mrouter Displays the IGMP Multicast Router menu. For details. see page 115. see page 115 BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. trunk <trunk number> Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single trunk group. vlan <VLAN number> Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single VLAN. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 105 . including source and timer information. To view menu options. find <IP address> Displays a single IGMP multicast group by its IP address. dump Displays information for all multicast groups.

1.1 2 21 10.------.1 Command Reference /info/l3/igmp/mrouter IGMP Multicast Router Port Information Menu [IGMP Multicast Router Menu] vlan .43 9 24 --------.Show all multicast router ports on a single vlan dump .Show all learned multicast router ports Table 41 describes the commands used to display information about multicast routers (Mrouters) learned through IGMP Snooping.1. August 2009 . Table 39 IGMP Mrouter Information Menu Options (/info/igmp/mrouter) Command Syntax and Usage vlan <VLAN number> Displays the multicast router ports configured or learned on the selected VLAN.BLADE OS 5.5 2 23 10.1. dump Displays information for all multicast groups learned by the switch. info/l3/igmp/mrouter/dump IGMP Multicast Router Dump Information SrcIP VLAN Port Version Expires MRT ------128 125 unknown QRV ---2 QQIC ---125 -------------------.-------V3 4:09 V2 4:09 V2 static IGMP Mrouter information includes: Source IP address VLAN and port where the Mrouter is connected IGMP version Mrouter expiration Maximum query response time Querier’s Robustness Variable (QRV) Querier’s Query Interval Code (QQIC) 106 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.10.1.------10.10.

5 232.1.0.------.0.1.--------------.1.1 2 24 V3 INC 4:16 Yes * 232.10.BLADE OS 5.0.-----.1.1.1 9 21 V3 EXC Yes IGMP Group information includes: IGMP source address IGMP Group address VLAN and port IGMP version IGMPv3 filter mode Expiration timer value IGMP multicast forwarding state BMD00114.x) are not snooped/relayed and will not appear.0.1.1 232.1.10.1.----.1 Command Reference info/l3/igmp/dump IGMP Group Information Note: Local groups (224.1 9 21 V3 INC 2:26 Yes * 236.------.1. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 107 .43 235.0.--10. Source Group VLAN Port Version Mode Expires Fwd -------------.1 2 24 V3 INC 4:16 Yes 10.-------.1.1 2 24 V3 INC No 10.0.

prio 100. If the master fails. Server status. August 2009 . server 1. Proxy status.202. one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. renter. prio 100. where the virtual router shares the same IP address as a proxy IP address. minimizing the number of unique IP addresses that must be configured.18. and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address.210. if vrid 1. prio 100.178. master. master.178. Priority value. 205. or transitions to backup if it is not the IP address owner. The use of virtual proxy routers enables redundant switches to share the same IP address. The server state identifies virtual routers. 205. renter. For example. proxy When virtual routers are configured. backup identifies that the virtual router is in backup mode. it transitions to master if its priority is 255.1 Command Reference /info/l3/vrrp VRRP Information Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on the GbE2c provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. based on a number of priority criteria. you can view the status of each virtual router using this command.178. During the election process. backup 1. once it receives a startup event. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. The proxy state identifies virtual proxy routers. (the IP address owner). init identifies that the virtual router is waiting for a startup event. VRRP information includes: Virtual router number Virtual router ID and IP address Interface number Ownership status owner identifies the preferred master virtual router. A virtual router is the owner when the IP address of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same. the virtual router with the highest priority becomes master.BLADE OS 5.204. renter identifies virtual routers which are not owned by this device. 108 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master. Activity status master identifies the elected master virtual router. if vrid 3. 205. if 1. VRRP 1: 2: 3: information: vrid 2.18. renter.18.

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference /info/l3/sm/port ServerMobility™ Port Information -----------------------------------------------------Server Mobility Port 2 Information: client-id = 01:00:22:00:7b:82:42 agent.remote-id = Server Mobility : enabled Filtering : enabled Failover : no backup port This display includes the following information for each port that has ServerMobility configured: Agent Circuit ID—hexadecimal value of the DHCP option 82 Agent Circuit ID Agent Remote ID—hexadecimal value of the DHCP option 82 Agent Remote ID ServerMobility status (enabled or disabled) Status of ServerMobility filtering Backup port BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 109 .circuit-id = 00:22:00:7b:82:42 agent.

1p Information Current priority to COS queue information: Priority COSq Weight -------. For details.-----0 0 1 1 0 1 2 0 1 3 0 1 4 1 2 5 1 2 6 1 2 7 1 2 Current port priority information: Port Priority COSq Weight ----...1 Command Reference /info/qos Quality of Service Information Menu [QoS Menu] 8021p .1p information Table 40 QoS Menu Options (/info/qos) Command Syntax and Usage 8021p Displays the 802. 110 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114.---.-------. August 2009 .Show QOS 802. /info/qos/8021p 802.-----1 0 0 1 2 0 0 1 3 0 0 1 4 0 0 1 5 0 0 1 6 0 0 1 .---.1p Information Menu. see page 119.BLADE OS 5.

Displays the 802.1p Port Priority Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Port Priority COSq Weight Displays the port number.1p priority to COS queue information.1 Command Reference The following table describes the IEEE 802. Displays the Class of Service queue. Displays the scheduling weight.1p Priority-to-COS Queue Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Priority COSq Weight Displays the 802. Table 42 802. Displays the Class of Service queue.1p priority level.1p port priority information. Displays the scheduling weight of the COS queue.1p priority level. BMD00114. The following table describes the IEEE 802. Table 41 802. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 111 .BLADE OS 5.

112 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. see page 122. For details.Show ACL group Table 43 ACL Information Menu Options (/info/acl) Command Syntax and Usage acl-list Displays ACL list information. acl-grp Displays ACL group information.1 Command Reference /info/acl Access Control List Information Menu [ACL Information Menu] acl-list .BLADE OS 5. August 2009 .Show ACL list acl-grp .

Set use of TOS precedence to disabled Egress Port : 24 Actions : Permit Filter 100 profile: Ethernet .SMAC : 00:21:00:00:00:00/ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff Meter .Set committed rate : 64 . Displays the configured action for the ACL. Displays the egress port configured for the ACL. Table 44 ACL List Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Filter x profile Meter Re-Mark Egress Port Actions Indicates the ACL number. Access Control List (ACL) information includes configuration settings for each ACL list. August 2009 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 113 .1 Command Reference /info/acl/acl-list Access Control List Information Current ACL List information: -----------------------Filter 4 profile: Meter .Set use of TOS precedence to disabled Actions : No ACL groups configured.Set committed rate : 64 . if applicable.Set to disabled .Set max burst size : 32 Re-Mark .Set to disabled .BLADE OS 5.Set max burst size : 32 Re-Mark . Displays the ACL meter parameters. Displays the ACL re-mark parameters. BMD00114.

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/info/rmon

RMON Information Menu
[RMON Information Menu] hist - Show RMON History group information alarm - Show RMON Alarm group information event - Show RMON Event group information dump - Show all RMON information

The following table describes the Remote Monitoring (RMON) Information menu options. Table 45 RMON Information Menu Options (/info/rmon)
Command Syntax and Usage

hist Displays RMON History information. For details, see page 124. alarm Displays RMON Alarm information. For details, see page 125. event Displays RMON Event information. For details, see page 127. dump Displays all RMON information.

114

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/info/rmon/hist

RMON History Information
RMON History group configuration: Index ----1 2 3 4 5 IFOID Interval Rbnum Gbnum ------------------------------ -------- ----- ----1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.24 30 5 5 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.22 30 5 5 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.20 30 5 5 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.19 30 5 5 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.24 1800 5 5

The following table describes the RMON History Information parameters. Table 46 RMON History Parameter Descriptions
Parameter Description

Index IFOID Interval Rbnum Gbnum

Displays the index number that identifies each history instance. Displays the MIB Object Identifier. Displays the time interval for each sampling bucket. Displays the number of requested buckets, which is the number of data slots into which data is to be saved. Displays the number of granted buckets that may hold sampled data.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

115

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/info/rmon/alarm

RMON Alarm Information
RMON Alarm group configuration: Index Interval Type rLimit fLimit rEvtIdx fEvtIdx last value ----- -------- ---- -------- -------- ------- ------- ---------1 30 abs 10 0 1 0 0 2 900 abs 0 10 0 2 0 3 300 abs 10 20 0 0 0 4 1800 abs 10 0 1 0 0 5 1800 abs 10 0 1 0 0 8 1800 abs 10 0 1 0 56344540 10 1800 abs 10 0 1 0 0 11 1800 abs 10 0 1 0 0 15 1800 abs 10 0 1 0 0 18 1800 abs 10 0 1 0 0 100 1800 abs 10 0 1 0 0 Index OID ----- -----------------------------1 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.257 2 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.11.258 3 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.12.259 4 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.13.260 5 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.14.261 8 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.280 10 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.15.262 11 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.16.263 15 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.19.266 18 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.279 100 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.17.264

The following table describes the RMON Alarm Information parameters. Table 47 RMON Alarm Parameter Descriptions
Parameter Description

Index Interval

Displays the index number that identifies each alarm instance. Displays the time interval over which data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds.

116

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

Table 47 RMON Alarm Parameter Descriptions (continued)
Parameter Description

Type

Displays the method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds, as follows: abs—absolute value, the value of the selected variable is compared directly with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval. delta—delta value, the value of the selected variable at the last sample is subtracted from the current value, and the difference compared with the thresholds.

rLimit fLimit rEvtIdx fEvtIdx Last value OID

Displays the rising threshold for the sampled statistic. Displays the falling threshold for the sampled statistic. Displays the rising alarm event index that is triggered when a rising threshold is crossed. Displays the falling alarm event index that is triggered when a falling threshold is crossed. Displays the last sampled value. Displays the MIB Object Identifier for each alarm index.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

117

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/info/rmon/event

RMON Event Information
RMON Event group configuration: Index ----1 2 3 4 5 10 11 15 100 Type Last Sent Description ---- ---------------- --------------------------------both 0D: 0H: 1M:20S Event_1 none 0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Event_2 log 0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Event_3 trap 0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Event_4 both 0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Log and trap event for Link Down both 0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Log and trap event for Link Up both 0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Send log and trap for icmpInMsg both 0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Send log and trap for icmpInEchos both 0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Event_100

The following table describes the RMON Event Information parameters. Table 48 RMON Event Parameter Descriptions
Parameter Description

Index Type Last sent Description

Displays the index number that identifies each event instance. Displays the type of notification provided for this event, as follows: none, log, trap, both. Displays the time that passed since the last switch reboot, when the most recent event was triggered. This value is cleared when the switch reboots. Displays a text description of the event.

118

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/info/link

Link Status Information
Port ---1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Phy-Type -------GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE Speed ----1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 any any 100 any any any any any Duplex -------full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full any any any any any Flow Ctrl --TX-----RX-yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Link -----disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled up disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled

Use this command to display link status information about each port on a switch slot, including: Port number Port speed Duplex mode (half, full, any) Flow control for transmit and receive (no, yes, or both) Link status (up, down, or disabled)

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

119

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/info/port

Port Information
Port Tag MediaRMON Lrn Fld PVID NAME VLAN(s) ---- --- ---- --- --- ----- -------------- ------------------------------1 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink1 1 2 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink2 1 3 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink3 1 4 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink4 1 5 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink5 1 6 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink6 1 7 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink7 1 8 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink8 1 9 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink9 1 10 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink10 1 11 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink11 1 12 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink12 1 13 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink13 1 14 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink14 1 15 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink15 1 16 n Auto d e e 1* Downlink16 1 17 n Auto d e e 1* Xconnect1 1 18 n Auto d e e 1* Xconnect2 1 19 n Auto d e e 4095 Mgmt 4095 20 n Auto d e e 1* Uplink1 1 21 n Auto d e e 1* Uplink2 1 22 n Auto d e e 1* Uplink3 1 23 n Auto d e e 1* Uplink4 1 24 n Auto d e e 1* Uplink5 1 * = PVID is tagged.

Port information includes: Port number Whether the port uses VLAN tagging or not (y or n) Whether the port is configured for Port Fast Fowarding (Fast) Whether the port has FDB learning enabled (Lrn) Whether the port has Port Flood Blocking enabled (Fld) Port VLAN ID (PVID) Port name VLAN membership

120

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/info/transcvr

Port Transceiver Status
Port ----------21 - SFP21 22 - SFP22 23 - SFP23 24 - SFP24 Device TX-Ena RX-Sig TX-Flt Vendor Serial ------- -------- ------ ------ ---------------- ---------------NO Device NO Device SR SFP DISABLED Link none AVAGO AVAGCNA00002D NO Device

This command displays the status of the transceiver module on each external uplink port.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 4: The Information Menu

121

This data is useful for tuning and debugging switch performance.----------port 17 up port 18 up Server Link Failure Detection (SFD) information includes: SFD status.1 Command Reference info/sfd Server Link Failure Detection Information LtM status: Down Member STG STG State Link Status --------. August 2009 . LtE status: Auto Enabled Member Link Status --------.BLADE OS 5. either enabled or disabled LtM status and member ports Spanning Tree status for LtM ports LtE status and member ports /info/dump Information Dump Use the dump command to dump all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.----------port 2 disabled 1 DISABLED * port 4 disabled 1 DISABLED * * = STP turned off for this port. 122 Chapter 4: The Information Menu BMD00114. depending on your configuration).-----------. If you want to capture dump data to a file.---.

/stats Statistics Menu [Statistics Menu] port . To view menu options.Dump all stats The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 51. Traffic statistics are included in SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) objects. l2 Displays the Layer 2 Stats Menu.Show Server Link Failure Detection stats clrmp .Layer 3 Stats Menu mp . This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch statistics. see page 137.Layer 2 Stats Menu l3 .Show SNMP stats ntp . with pointers to detailed information. see page 153.CHAPTER 5 The Statistics Menu You can view switch performance statistics in both the user and administrator command modes.Show NTP stats sfd .Clear stats for all ports dump .Clear all MP related stats clrports .MP-specific Stats Menu acl . Use this command to display traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis.ACL Stats Menu snmp . August 2009 135 . BMD00114.Port Stats Menu l2 . Table 51 Statistics Menu Options (/stats) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the Port Statistics Menu for the specified port. To view menu options.

To view menu options. acl Displays ACL Statistics menu. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. see page 159. See page 186 for sample output. Use this command to view information on how switch management processes and resources are currently being allocated. ntp [clear] Displays Network Time Protocol (NTP) Statistics. If you want to capture dump data to a file. To view menu options. mp Displays the Management Processor Statistics Menu. see page 185. August 2009 .1 Command Reference Table 51 Statistics Menu Options (/stats) Command Syntax and Usage l3 Displays the Layer 3 Stats Menu. To view menu options. snmp Displays SNMP statistics. see page 180. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. see page 192. For details. 136 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. You can use the clear option to delete all NTP statistics.BLADE OS 5. See page 190 for a sample output and a description of NTP Statistics. clrmp Clears all management processor statistics. sfd Displays Server Link Failure Detection (SFD) Statistics. See page 192 for a sample output and a description of SFD Statistics. clrports Clears statistics counters for all ports. dump Dumps all switch statistics.

Show RMON stats dump .Show 802.Show bridging ("dot1") stats ether . link Displays link statistics for the port.Show Internet Protocol ("IP") stats link . Traffic statistics include SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) objects. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 137 .Show interface ("if") stats ip . See page 149 for sample output. See page 144 for sample output. See page 149 for sample output. rmon Displays Remote Monitoring (RMON) statistics for the port.Show all port stats clear . See page 143 for sample output. See page 150 for sample output. ether Displays Ethernet (“dot3”) statistics for the port. See page 140 for sample output.1x stats brg . See page 147 for sample output.Show Ethernet ("dot3") stats if . [Port Statistics Menu] 8021x . ip Displays IP statistics for the port. brg Displays bridging (“dot1”) statistics for the port. if Displays interface statistics for the port. BMD00114.Clear all port stats Table 52 Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/port) Command Syntax and Usage 8021x Displays IEEE 802.Show link stats rmon .1 Command Reference /stats/port <port number> Port Statistics Menu This menu displays traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis.BLADE OS 5.1x statistics for the port.

BLADE OS 5. August 2009 .1 Command Reference Table 52 Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/port) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage dump This command dumps all statistics for the selected port. clear This command clears all the statistics on the selected port. 138 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114.

1 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/8021x 802. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 139 . BMD00114.1x Authenticator Statistics This menu option enables you to display the 802.1x authenticator statistics of the selected port.1x Authenticator Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/8021x) Statistics Description eapolFramesRx eapolFramesTx eapolStartFramesRx eapolLogoffFramesRx eapolRespIdFramesRx eapolRespFramesRx eapolReqIdFramesTx eapolReqFramesTx invalidEapolFramesRx eapLengthErrorFramesRx lastEapolFrameVersion lastEapolFrameSource Total number of EAPOL frames received Total number of EAPOL frames transmitted Total number of EAPOL Start frames received Total number of EAPOL Logoff frames received Total number of EAPOL Response Identity frames received Total number of Response frames received Total number of Request Identity frames transmitted Total number of Request frames transmitted Total number of invalid EAPOL frames received Total number of EAP length error frames received The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame. Authenticator Statistics: eapolFramesRx = eapolFramesTx = eapolStartFramesRx = eapolLogoffFramesRx = eapolRespIdFramesRx = eapolRespFramesRx = eapolReqIdFramesTx = eapolReqFramesTx = invalidEapolFramesRx = eapLengthErrorFramesRx = lastEapolFrameVersion = lastEapolFrameSource = 925 3201 2 0 463 460 1820 1381 0 0 1 00:01:02:45:ac:51 Table 53 802.BLADE OS 5. The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame.

1x Authenticator Diagnostics of a Port (/stats/port/8021x) Statistics Description authEntersConnecting authEapLogoffsWhile Connecting authEnters Authenticating authSuccessesWhile Authenticating Total number of times that the state machine transitions to the CONNECTING state from any other state. authTimeoutsWhile Authenticating 140 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING. Total number of times that the state machine transitions from CONNECTING to DISCONNECTED as a result of receiving an EAPOL-Logoff message.1x Authenticator Diagnostics This menu option enables you to display the 802. as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating authentication timeout.BLADE OS 5. Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to AUTHENTICATED. August 2009 .1 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/8021x 802. as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating successful authentication of the Supplicant.1x authenticator diagnostics of the selected port. as a result of an EAP-Response/Identity message being received from the Supplicant. Authenticator Diagnostics: authEntersConnecting authEapLogoffsWhileConnecting authEntersAuthenticating authSuccessesWhileAuthenticating authTimeoutsWhileAuthenticating authFailWhileAuthenticating authReauthsWhileAuthenticating authEapStartsWhileAuthenticating authEapLogoffWhileAuthenticating authReauthsWhileAuthenticated authEapStartsWhileAuthenticated authEapLogoffWhileAuthenticated backendResponses backendAccessChallenges backendOtherRequestsToSupplicant backendNonNakResponsesFromSupplicant backendAuthSuccesses backendAuthFails = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 1820 0 463 5 0 458 0 0 0 3 0 0 923 460 460 460 5 458 Table 54 802. Total number of times that the state machine transitions from CONNECTING to AUTHENTICATING.

Indicates that the Authenticator chose an EAP-method. Total number of times that the state machine receives an initial Access-Challenge packet from the Authentication server. as a result of a re-authentication request. Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to CONNECTING.1 Command Reference Table 54 802. or Success message) to the Supplicant. Indicates that the Authenticator attempted communication with the Authentication Server. Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to CONNECTING. Total number of times that the state machine sends an initial Access-Request packet to the Authentication server. as a result of an EAPOL-Logoff message being received from the Supplicant. Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING. backendAccess Challenges backendOtherRequests ToSupplicant BMD00114. Failure. Total number of times that the state machine sends an EAP-Request packet (other than an Identity. as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating authentication failure. Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING. Indicates that the Authentication Server has communication with the Authenticator. Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to DISCONNECTED.BLADE OS 5.1x Authenticator Diagnostics of a Port (/stats/port/8021x) Statistics Description authFailWhile Authenticating authReauthsWhile Authenticating authEapStartsWhile Authenticating authEapLogoffWhile Authenticating authReauthsWhile Authenticated authEapStartsWhile Authenticated authEapLogoffWhile Authenticated backendResponses Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to HELD. as a result of an EAPOL-Start message being received from the Supplicant. as a result of a re-authentication request Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING. as a result of an EAPOL-Logoff message being received from the Supplicant. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 141 . as a result of an EAPOL-Start message being received from the Supplicant. Notification.

BLADE OS 5. Total number of times that the state machine receives a Reject message from the Authentication Server. Total number of times that the state machine receives an Accept message from the Authentication Server. Indicates that the Supplicant can respond to the Authenticator. backendAuthFails 142 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114.1 Command Reference Table 54 802.s chosen EAP-method. August 2009 .1x Authenticator Diagnostics of a Port (/stats/port/8021x) Statistics Description backendNonNak ResponsesFrom Supplicant backendAuthSuccesses Total number of times that the state machine receives a response from the Supplicant to an initial EAP-Request. and the response is something other than EAP-NAK. Indicates that the Supplicant has successfully authenticated to the Authentication Server. Indicates that the Supplicant has not authenticated to the Authentication Server.

A frame received on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function.BLADE OS 5. If this counter has a significant value but is not presently increasing. including bridge management frames. filtered) by the Forwarding Process. which have been or would have been learnt. dot1PortOutFrames dot1PortInDiscards dot1TpLearnedEntry Discards dot1StpPortForward Transitions BMD00114. including bridge management frames. but have been discarded due to a lack of space to store them in the Forwarding Database. it indicates that the problem has been occurring but is not persistent. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 143 . it indicates that the Forwarding Database is regularly becoming full (a condition which has unpleasant performance effects on the subnetwork). Note that a frame transmitted on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function. Count of valid frames received which were discarded (that is. The total number of Forwarding Database entries. Bridging statistics for port 1: dot1PortInFrames: dot1PortOutFrames: dot1PortInDiscards: dot1TpLearnedEntryDiscards: dot1StpPortForwardTransitions: 63242584 63277826 0 0 0 Table 55 Bridging Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/brg) Statistics Description dot1PortInFrames The number of frames that have been received by this port from its segment. The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its segment.1 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/brg Bridging Statistics This menu option enables you to display the bridging statistics of the selected port. If this counter is increasing. The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state.

The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the alignmentError status is returned by the MAC service to the Logical Link Control (LLC) (or other MAC user). according to the conventions of IEEE 802. according to the conventions of IEEE 802. 144 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtained are.BLADE OS 5.3 Layer Management. August 2009 . counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC. Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtained are.1 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/ether Ethernet Statistics This menu option enables you to display the ethernet statistics of the selected port Ethernet statistics for port 1: dot3StatsAlignmentErrors: dot3StatsFCSErrors: dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames: dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames: dot3StatsLateCollisions: dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions: dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors: dot3StatsFrameTooLongs: dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors: 0 0 0 0 0 0 NA 0 0 Table 56 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics Description dot3StatsAlignment Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check. counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC.3 Layer Management. dot3StatsFCSErrors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameCheckError status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user).

an instance of this object may represent a count of transmission errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted. dot3StatsLateCollisions The number of times that a collision is detected on a particular interface later than 512 bit-times into the transmission of a packet. A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts. A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts. ifOutMulticastPkts.1 Command Reference Table 56 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics Description dot3StatsSingleCollision A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for Frames which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision. or the dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors object. or ifOutBroadcastPkts. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 145 .BLADE OS 5. and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrame object. and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames object. A (late) collision included in a count represented by an instance of this object is also considered as a (generic) collision for purposes of other collision-related statistics. the dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions object. ifOutMulticastPkts.2 microseconds on a 10 Mbit/s system. The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation-specific. dot3StatsExcessive Collisions dot3StatsInternalMac TransmitErrors A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions. BMD00114. Five hundred and twelve bit-times corresponds to 51. A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer transmit error. dot3StatsMultiple CollisionFrames A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision. or ifOutBroadcastPkts. A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsLateCollisions object. In particular.

3 Layer Management. The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation-specific. Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtained are. In particular. the dot3StatsAlignmentErrors object. A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsFrameTooLongs object. dot3StatsInternalMac ReceiveErrors A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer receive error. counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC. August 2009 . according to the conventions of IEEE 802.1 Command Reference Table 56 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics Description dot3StatsFrameToo Longs A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size. an instance of this object may represent a count of received errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted.BLADE OS 5. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameTooLong status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). or the dot3StatsFCSErrors object. 146 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114.

and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer.1 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/if Interface Statistics This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. The number of packets. which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. including framing characters. ifInBroadcastPkts ifInMulticastPkts ifInFlowControlPkts ifInDiscards BMD00114. For a MAC layer protocol. The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. Interface statistics for port 1: ifHCIn Counters Octets: 51697080313 UcastPkts: 65356399 BroadcastPkts: 0 MulticastPkts: 0 FlowCtrlPkts: 0 Discards: 0 Errors: 0 ifHCOut Counters 51721056808 65385714 6516 0 0 0 21187 Table 57 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if) Statistics Description ifInOctets ifInUcastPkts The total number of octets received on the interface. including those that were discarded or not sent. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. this includes both Group and Functional addresses. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sublayer. The total number of flow control pause packets received on the interface. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 147 . which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer. The number of packets. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sublayer.BLADE OS 5.

this includes both Group and Functional addresses. For a MAC layer protocol. the number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. the number of inbound transmission units that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. the number of outbound transmission units that could not be transmitted because of errors.BLADE OS 5. the number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors. The total number of flow control pause packets transmitted out of the interface. and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. including framing characters. including those that were discarded or not sent. The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface. ifOutOctets ifOutUcastPkts ifOutBroadcastPkts ifOutMulticastPkts ifOutFlowControlPkts ifOutDiscards ifOutErrors 148 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. including those that were discarded or not sent. This object is a 64-bit version of ifOutBroadcastPkts. and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces. For packet-oriented interfaces. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. August 2009 . including those that were discarded or not sent. This object is a 64-bit version of ifOutMulticastPkts.1 Command Reference Table 57 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if) Statistics Description ifInErrors For packet-oriented interfaces.

The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing. ipInDiscards /stats/port <port number>/link Link Statistics This menu enables you to display the link statistics of the selected port. BMD00114. Link statistics for port 1: linkStateChange: 1 Table 59 Link Statistics (/stats/port/link) Statistics Description linkStateChange The total number of link state changes. but which were discarded (for example. including those received in error. for lack of buffer space). GEA IP statistics for port 1: ipInReceives : 0 ipInHeaderError: 0 ipInDiscards : 0 Table 58 Interface Protocol Statistics (/stats/port/ip) Statistics Description ipInReceives ipInHeaderErrors The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces.BLADE OS 5. The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch).1 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/ip Interface Protocol Statistics This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 149 .

The total number of packets (including bad packets.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 . and multicast packets) received.1 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/rmon RMON Statistics This menu enables you to display the Remote Monitoring (RMON) statistics of the selected port. The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. broadcast packets. RMON statistics for port 2: etherStatsDropEvents: etherStatsOctets: etherStatsPkts: etherStatsBroadcastPkts: etherStatsMulticastPkts: etherStatsCRCAlignErrors: etherStatsUndersizePkts: etherStatsOversizePkts: etherStatsFragments: etherStatsJabbers: etherStatsCollisions: etherStatsPkts64Octets: etherStatsPkts65to127Octets: etherStatsPkts128to255Octets: etherStatsPkts256to511Octets: etherStatsPkts64Octets: etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets: NA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 60 RMON Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics Description etherStatsDropEvents etherStatsOctets etherStatsPkts etherStatsBroadcastPkts etherStatsMulticastPkts The total number of packets received that were dropped because of system resource constraints. 150 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address. The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits. but including FCS octets). The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.BLADE OS 5. The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were greater than 127 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error). The allowed range to detect jabber is between 20 ms and 150 ms. but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).1 Command Reference Table 60 RMON Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics Description etherStatsCRCAlignErrors The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were greater than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. etherStatsUndersizePkts etherStatsOversizePkts etherStatsFragments etherStatsJabbers etherStatsCollisions etherStatsPkts64Octets etherStatsPkts65to127 Octets etherStatsPkts128to255 Octets etherStatsPkts256to511 Octets BMD00114. The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). inclusive. Jabber is defined as the condition where any packet exceeds 20 ms. but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were greater than 255 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 151 . The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were less than or equal to 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were greater than 1023 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). 152 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. August 2009 .1 Command Reference Table 60 RMON Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics Description etherStatsPkts512to1023 Octets etherStatsPkts1024to1518 Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were greater than 511 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).BLADE OS 5.

Show FDB stats lacp . Use the clear option to delete all LACP statistics. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 153 .Show Hot Links stats lldp . See page 158 for sample output. hotlink Displays Hotlinks statistics.1 Command Reference /stats/l2 Layer 2 Statistics Menu [Layer 2 Statistics Menu] fdb .BLADE OS 5.Show OAM stats The Layer 2 statistics provided by each menu option are briefly described in Table 61. oam Displays the OAM Statistics menu. See page 156 for sample output. Table 61 Layer 2 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l2) Command Syntax and Usage fdb [clear] Displays FDB statistics. See page 155 for sample output. See page 157 for sample output. lacp [<port number>|clear] Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) statistics for a specified port. BMD00114. Use the clear option to delete all FDB statistics. with pointers to detailed information.Show LACP stats hotlink . See page 154 for sample output. or for all ports if no port is specified.Show LLDP port stats oam . lldp <port number> Displays LLDP port statistics.

Highest number of entries recorded at any given time in the Forwarding Database. August 2009 . finds. FDB statistics are described in the following table: Table 62 Forwarding Database Statistics (/stats/fdb) Statistic Description current hiwat Current number of entries in the Forwarding Database.BLADE OS 5. and unsuccessful searches. 154 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. including the number of new entries.1 Command Reference /stats/l2/fdb [clear] FDB Statistics FDB statistics: current: 83 hiwat: 855 This menu option enables you to display statistics regarding the use of the forwarding database. Use the clear option to delete all FDB statistics.

BLADE OS 5.0 LACPDUs transmitted: .0 Valid Marker Rsp PDUs received: .870 Valid Marker PDUs received: . August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 155 . Total number of LACP data units with an unknown version or type.0 Marker Rsp PDUs transmitted: . length.0 Illegal subtype received: .6031 Marker PDUs transmitted: . Total number of valid LACP marker data units received.1 Command Reference /stats/l2/lacp [<port number>|clear] LACP Statistics Port 1: -------------------------------------Valid LACPDUs received: . Total number of LACP marker data units transmitted.0 Unknown version/TLV type: . Total number of valid LACP marker response data units received. Total number of LACP marker response data units transmitted. and value (TLV) received. Total number of LACP data units with an illegal subtype received.0 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) statistics are described in the following table: Table 63 LACP Statistics (/stats/l2/lacp) Statistic Description Valid LACPDUs received Valid Marker PDUs received Valid Marker Rsp PDUs received Unknown version/TLV type Illegal subtype received LACPDUs transmitted Marker PDUs transmitted Marker Rsp PDUs transmitted Total number of valid LACP data units received. BMD00114. Total number of LACP data units transmitted. Use the clear option to delete all LACP statistics.

156 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. Total number of FDB update requests sent. Total number of FDB update requests that failed.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 . Total number of times the Backup interface transitioned to the Active state.1 Command Reference /stats/l2/hotlink Hotlinks Statistics Hot Links Trigger Stats: Trigger 1 statistics: Trigger Name: Trigger 1 Master active: Backup active: FDB update: 0 0 0 failed: 0 The following table describes the Hotlinks statistics: Table 64 Hotlinks Statistics (/stats/l2/hotlink) Statistic Description Master active Backup active FDB update failed Total number of times the Master interface transitioned to the Active state.

Total number of LLDP frames that had errors..BLADE OS 5...... Total number of unrecognized TLV (Type... Length..... BMD00114.... Total number of LLDP frames discarded. and Value) fields received...... Total number of LLDP frames received....1 Command Reference /stats/l2/lldp <port number> LLDP Port Statistics LLDP Port 1 Statistics ..Frames Transmitted : 0 Frames Received : 0 Frames Received in Errors : 0 Frames Discarded : 0 TLVs Unrecognized : 0 Neighbors Aged Out : 0 .... Total number of neighbor devices that have had their LLDP information aged out. The following table describes the LLDP port statistics: Table 65 LLDP port Statistics (/stats/l2/lldp) Statistic Frames Transmitted Frames Received Frames Received in Errors Frames Discarded TLVs Unrecognized Neighbors Aged Out Description Total number of LLDP frames transmitted.... August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 157 .

/stats/l2/oam/port <port number> OAM Statistics OAM statistics on port 1 -----------------------------------------Information OAMPDU Tx : 0 Information OAMPDU Rx : 0 Unsupported OAMPDU Tx : 0 Unsupported OAMPDU Tx : 0 Local faults ------------0 Link fault records 0 Critical events 0 Dying gasps Remote faults ------------0 Link fault records 0 Critical events 0 Dying gasps OAM statistics include the following: Total number of OAM Protocol Data Units (OAMPDUs) transmitted and received. August 2009 . Local faults detected Remote faults detected 158 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. See page 158 for sample output.BLADE OS 5. dump Displays all OAM statistics.1 Command Reference /stats/l2/oam OAM Statistics [OAM statistics Menu] port . Total number of unsupported OAM Protocol Data Units (OAMPDU) transmitted and received.Show OAM port statistics dump .Show all OAM statistics The following table describes the OAM statistics commands: Table 66 OAM Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l2) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays OAM statistics for the selected port.

BLADE OS 5. BMD00114.Clear VRRP stats rip . arp Displays Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) statistics. See page 162 for sample output.Clear IP stats ripclear . Use the clear option to delete all route statistics.Total number of IGMP groups ipmcgrps . See page 165 for sample output.1 Command Reference /stats/l3 Layer 3 Statistics Menu [Layer 3 Statistics Menu] geal3 . with pointers to detailed information.Show VRRP stats clrvrrp .Show DNS stats icmp .Clear IGMP stats ipclear . August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 159 .Show RIP stats igmpgrps .Clear all OSPF stats dump .Show route stats arp . Table 67 Layer 3 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l3) Command Syntax and Usage geal3 Displays the Gigabit Ethernet Aggregators (GEA) statistics menu.Show ARP stats dns .Show IP stats route . ip Displays IP statistics.GEA Layer 3 Stats Menu ip .OSPF stats vrrp .Show UDP stats igmp . GEA statistics are used by Technical Support personnel.Show ICMP stats tcp .Clear RIP stats ospfclr .Show IGMP stats ospf . See page 165 for sample output.Total number of IPMC groups clrigmp .Show TCP stats udp . route [clear] Displays route statistics.Dump layer 3 stats The Layer 3 statistics provided by each menu option are briefly described in Table 67.

you can display the protocol statistics for VRRP. tcp [clear] Displays TCP statistics. ipmcgrps Displays the total number of current IP multicast groups that are registered on the switch. Use the clear option to delete all UDP statistics. See page 167 for sample output. See page 166 for sample output. Use the clear option to delete all DNS statistics. See page 178 for sample output. igmpgrps Displays the total number of IGMP groups that are registered on the switch.1 Command Reference Table 67 Layer 3 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l3) Command Syntax and Usage dns [clear] Displays Domain Name System (DNS) statistics. Use the clear option to delete all TCP statistics. icmp [clear] Displays ICMP statistics. ospf Displays OSPF statistics. clrvrrp Clears VRRP statistics. See page 169 for sample output. See page 172 for sample output. rip Displays Routing Information Protocol (RIP) statistics. See page 179 for sample output.BLADE OS 5. See page 171 for sample output. August 2009 . igmp Displays IGMP statistics. udp [clear] Displays UDP statistics. 160 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. See page 173 for sample output. Use the clear option to delete all ICMP statistics. vrrp When virtual routers are configured.

ospfclear Clears Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) statistics.1 Command Reference Table 67 Layer 3 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l3) Command Syntax and Usage clrigmp Clears IGMP statistics. If you want to capture dump data to a file. dump Dumps all Layer 3 statistics. ipclear Clears IPv4 statistics. ripclear Clears Routing Information Protocol (RIP) statistics.BLADE OS 5. Use this command with caution as it will delete all the IPv4 statistics. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 161 . set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command.

and so forth. time-to-live exceeded. In entities which do not act as IP Gateways. The number of input datagrams for which this entity (the switch) was not their final IP destination. this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address. The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers. including those received in error. 0.Route option processing was successful. this counter will include only those packets. The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch). This count includes invalid addresses (for example. ipInAddrErrors ipForwDatagrams ipInUnknownProtos 162 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114.0. version number mismatch. as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination.BLADE OS 5.0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (for example.0. and the Source. which were Source-Routed via this entity (the switch).1 Command Reference /stats/l3/ip IPv4 Statistics IP statistics: ipInReceives: ipInAddrErrors: ipInUnknownProtos: ipInDelivers: ipOutDiscards: ipReasmReqds: ipReasmFails: ipFragFails: ipRoutingDiscards: ipReasmTimeout: 3115873 35447 500504 2334166 4 0 0 0 0 5 ipInHdrErrors: ipForwDatagrams: ipInDiscards: ipOutRequests: ipOutNoRoutes: ipReasmOKs: ipFragOKs: ipFragCreates: ipDefaultTTL: 1 0 0 1010542 4 0 0 0 255 Table 68 IP Statistics (stats/l3/ip) Statistics Description ipInReceives ipInHdrErrors The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces. For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams. other format errors. errors discovered in processing their IP options. August 2009 . including bad checksums. The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. Class E).

but which were discarded (for example. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 163 . Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.BLADE OS 5.assembly algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out. and so forth). for lack of buffer space). for example. which meet this no-route criterion. The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user-protocols (including ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user-protocols (including ICMP). but which were discarded (for example. The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this entity (the switch).1 Command Reference Table 68 IP Statistics (stats/l3/ip) Statistics Description ipInDiscards The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing. Note that this includes any datagrams which a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down. errors. ipInDelivers ipOutRequests ipOutDiscards ipOutNoRoutes ipReasmReqds ipReasmOKs ipReasmFails ipFragOKs ipFragFails BMD00114. The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this entity (the switch). for lack of buffer space). The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination. Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms (notably the algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received. The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this entity (the switch) but could not be. Note that this counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagrams. Note that this counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams. The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination. The number of failures detected by the IP re. The number of IP datagrams successfully re. because their Don't Fragment flag was set.assembled.

whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol. ipDefaultTTL ipReasmTimeout 164 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. The number of routing entries. which were chosen to be discarded even though they are valid. One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free-up buffer space for other routing entries. August 2009 . The maximum number of seconds. which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity (the switch). The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live (TTL) field of the IP header of datagrams originated at this entity (the switch).1 Command Reference Table 68 IP Statistics (stats/l3/ip) Statistics Description ipFragCreates ipRoutingDiscards The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity (the switch).BLADE OS 5.

August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 165 . The highest number of ARP entries ever recorded in the ARP table. The maximum number of routes that are supported.1 Command Reference /stats/l3/route [clear] Route Statistics Route statistics: ipRoutesCur: ipRoutesMax: 11 512 ipRoutesHighWater: 11 Table 69 Route Statistics (/stats/l3/route) Statistics Description ipRoutesCur ipRoutesHighWater ipRoutesMax The total number of outstanding routes in the route table. Use the clear option to delete all route statistics.BLADE OS 5. The highest number of routes ever recorded in the route table. /stats/l3/arp ARP Statistics This menu option enables you to display Address Resolution Protocol statistics. ARP statistics: arpEntriesCur: arpEntriesMax: 3 2047 arpEntriesHighWater: 4 Table 70 ARP Statistics (/stats/l3/arp) Statistics Description arpEntriesCur arpEntriesHighWater arpEntriesMax The total number of outstanding ARP entries in the ARP table. BMD00114. The maximum number of ARP entries that are supported.

1 Command Reference /stats/l3/dns [clear] DNS Statistics This menu option enables you to display Domain Name System statistics. DNS statistics: dnsInRequests: dnsBadRequests: 0 0 dnsOutRequests: 0 Table 71 DNS Statistics (/stats/dns) Statistics Description dnsInRequests dnsOutRequests dnsBadRequests The total number of DNS request packets that have been received. The total number of DNS response packets that have been transmitted. The total number of DNS request packets received that were dropped. August 2009 . Use the clear option to delete all DNS statistics. 166 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114.BLADE OS 5.

The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received. stop sending data) messages received.BLADE OS 5. The number of ICMP Redirect messages received. The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received. The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received. The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received. Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors. The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full. The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 167 . and so forth).1 Command Reference /stats/l3/icmp [clear] ICMP Statistics ICMP statistics: icmpInMsgs: icmpInDestUnreachs: icmpInParmProbs: icmpInRedirects: icmpInEchoReps: icmpInTimestampReps: icmpInAddrMaskReps: icmpOutErrors: icmpOutTimeExcds: icmpOutSrcQuenchs: icmpOutEchos: icmpOutTimestamps: icmpOutAddrMasks: 245802 41 0 0 244350 0 0 0 0 0 253777 0 0 icmpInErrors: icmpInTimeExcds: icmpInSrcQuenchs: icmpInEchos: icmpInTimestamps: icmpInAddrMasks: icmpOutMsgs: icmpOutDestUnreachs: icmpOutParmProbs: icmpOutRedirects: icmpOutEchoReps: icmpOutTimestampReps: icmpOutAddrMaskReps: 1393 0 0 18 0 0 253810 15 0 0 18 0 0 Table 72 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp) Statistics Description icmpInMsgs The total number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received. icmpInErrors icmpInDestUnreachs icmpInTimeExcds icmpInParmProbs icmpInSrcQuenchs icmpInRedirects icmpInEchos icmpInEchoReps icmpInTimestamps icmpInTimestampReps BMD00114. bad length. The number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums. The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received. The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received.

168 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. icmpOutErrors icmpOutDestUnreachs icmpOutTimeExcds icmpOutParmProbs icmpOutSrcQuenchs icmpOutRedirects icmpOutEchos icmpOutEchoReps icmpOutTimestamps icmpOutTimestampReps icmpOutAddrMasks icmpOutAddrMaskReps Use the clear option to delete all ICMP statistics. The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent. The total number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) attempted to send. This value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram. August 2009 . The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent. The number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffer. The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages sent. The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent. since hosts do not send redirects. In some implementations there may be no types of errors that contribute to this counter's value. stop sending data) messages sent. The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent. this object will always be zero. The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent. The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent.1 Command Reference Table 72 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp) Statistics Description icmpInAddrMasks icmpInAddrMaskReps icmpOutMsgs The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received.BLADE OS 5. The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent. For a host. Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors. The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent. The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent. The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full. The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received.

In particular. tcpRtoMax tcpMaxConn tcpActiveOpens tcpPassiveOpens BMD00114. when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3).1 Command Reference /stats/l3/tcp [clear] TCP Statistics TCP statistics: tcpRtoAlgorithm: tcpRtoMax: tcpActiveOpens: tcpAttemptFails: tcpInSegs: tcpRetransSegs: tcpCurBuff: tcpOutRsts: 4 240000 252214 528 756401 0 0 417 tcpRtoMin: tcpMaxConn: tcpPassiveOpens: tcpEstabResets: tcpOutSegs: tcpInErrs: tcpCurConn: 0 512 7 4 756655 0 3 Table 73 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp) Statistics Description tcpRtoAlgorithm tcpRtoMin The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting unacknowledged octets.BLADE OS 5. In entities where the maximum number of connections is dynamic. measured in milliseconds. The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout. The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-SENT state from the CLOSED state. an object of this type has the semantics of the UBOUND quantity described in RFC 793. this object should contain the value -1. when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3). The limit on the total number of TCP connections the entity (the switch) can support. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. In particular. an object of this type has the semantics of the LBOUND quantity described in RFC 793. The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout. The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-RCVD state from the LISTEN state. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 169 . More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. measured in milliseconds.

tcpEstabResets tcpInSegs tcpOutSegs tcpRetransSegs tcpInErrs tcpCurBuff tcpCurConn tcpOutRsts Use the clear option to delete all TCP statistics. August 2009 . The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSE-WAIT state. The number of TCP segments sent containing the RST flag. The total number of outstanding TCP sessions that are currently opened. The total number of outstanding memory allocations from heap by TCP protocol stack. The total number of segments retransmitted . This count includes segments received on currently established connections.that is. plus the number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the LISTEN state from the SYN-RCVD state. the number of TCP segments transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted octets. The total number of segments sent. The total number of segments received.1 Command Reference Table 73 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp) Statistics Description tcpAttemptFails The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the SYN-SENT state or the SYN-RCVD state. including those on current connections but excluding those containing only retransmitted octets. The total number of segments received in error (for example.BLADE OS 5. bad TCP checksums). including those received in error. 170 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114.

BMD00114.1 Command Reference /stats/l3/udp [clear] UDP Statistics UDP statistics: udpInDatagrams: udpInErrors: 54 0 udpOutDatagrams: udpNoPorts: 43 1578077 Table 74 UDP Statistics (/stats/l3/udp) Statistics Description udpInDatagrams udpOutDatagrams udpInErrors udpNoPorts The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to the switch. The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port. The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no application at the destination port.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 171 . Use the clear option to delete all UDP statistics. The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity (the switch).

Total number of Filter Change records received. BMD00114.1 Command Reference /stats/l3/igmp <VLAN number> IGMP Statistics IGMP Snoop vlan 2 statistics: ----------------------------------------------------------------------rxIgmpValidPkts: 0 rxIgmpInvalidPkts: 0 rxIgmpGenQueries: 0 rxIgmpGrpSpecificQueries: 0 rxIgmpGroupSrcSpecificQueries: 0 rxIgmpLeaves: 0 rxIgmpReports: 0 txIgmpReports: 0 txIgmpGrpSpecificQueries: 0 txIgmpLeaves: 0 rxIgmpV3CurrentStateRecords: 0 rxIgmpV3SourceListChangeRecords:0 rxIgmpV3FilterChangeRecords: 0 This menu option displays statistics about the use of the IGMP Multicast Groups.BLADE OS 5. IGMP statistics are described in the following table: Table 75 IGMP Statistics (/stats/l3/igmp) Statistic Description rxIgmpValidPkts rxIgmpInvalidPkts rxIgmpGenQueries rxIgmpGrpSpecific Queries Total number of valid IGMP packets received Total number of invalid packets received Total number of General Membership Query packets received Total number of Membership Query packets received from specific groups rxIgmpGroupSrcSpecific Total number of Group Source-Specific Queries (GSSQ) received Queries rxIgmpLeaves rxIgmpReports txIgmpReports txIgmpGrpSpecific Queries txIgmpLeaves rxIgmpV3CurrentState Records rxIgmpV3SourceList ChangeRecords rxIgmpV3FilterChange Records 172 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu Total number of Leave requests received Total number of Membership Reports received Total number of Membership reports transmitted Total number of Membership Query packets transmitted to specific groups Total number of Leave messages transmitted Total number of Current State records received Total number of Source List Change records received. August 2009 .

Show global stats aindex . aindex Displays area statistics. See page 174 for sample output. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 173 . BMD00114.BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference /stats/l3/ospf OSPF Statistics Menu [OSPF stats Menu] general . if Displays interface statistics.Show area(s) stats if .Show interface(s) stats Table 76 OSPF Statistics Menu (/stats/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage general Displays global statistics.

August 2009 .1 Command Reference /stats/l3/ospf/general OSPF Global Statistics The OSPF General Statistics contain the sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.BLADE OS 5. OSPF stats ---------Rx/Tx Stats: Pkts hello database ls requests ls acks ls updates Nbr change stats: hello start n2way adjoint ok negotiation done exchange done bad requests bad sequence loading done n1way rst_ad down Timers kickoff hello retransmit lsa lock lsa ack dbage summary ase export Rx -------0 23 4 3 7 9 Tx -------0 518 12 1 7 7 Intf change Stats: hello down loop unloop wait timer backup nbr change 2 0 2 2 2 2 0 0 2 0 0 1 4 2 0 0 2 0 5 514 1028 0 0 0 0 0 174 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114.

The sum total of all Database Description packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Hello packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 175 . The sum total of all Link State Request packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Update packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.) across all OSPF areas and interfaces.BLADE OS 5. The sum total of all Link State Update packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. an indication that Hello packets should now be sent to the neighbor at intervals of HelloInterval seconds. The sum total of all Link State Request packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all OSPF packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Hello packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. BMD00114. The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is. The sum total of all Database Description packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces.1 Command Reference Table 77 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) Statistics Description Rx/Tx Stats: Rx Pkts Tx Pkts Rx Hello Tx Hello Rx Database Tx Database Rx ls Requests Tx ls Requests Rx ls Acks Tx ls Acks Rx ls Updates Tx ls Updates Nbr Change Stats: hello Start The sum total of all Hello packets received from neighbors on all OSPF areas and interfaces.

bad requests bad sequence 176 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. The sum total number of times the Neighbor adjacency has been reset across all OPSF areas and interfaces. in the initial state of a neighbor conversation. The total number of Neighboring routers down (that is. in which this router is not mentioned across all OSPF interfaces and areas. negotiation done The sum total number of neighbors in this state wherein the Master/slave relationship has been negotiated. Unexpectedly has the init bit set c. The sum total number of Link State Requests which have been received for a link state advertisement not contained in the database across all interfaces and OSPF areas.) across all OSPF areas and interfaces. exchange done The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is. and sequence numbers have been exchanged. The sum total number of Hello packets received from neighbors.BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference Table 77 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (continued) Statistics Description n2way adjoint ok The sum total number of bidirectional communication establishment between this router and other neighboring routers. The sum total number of Database Description packets which have been received that either: a. loading done n1way rst_ad down The sum total number of link state updates received for all out-of-date portions of the database across all OSPF areas and interfaces. Has an options field differing from the last Options field received in a Database Description packet. in an adjacency's final state) having transmitted a full sequence of Database Description packets. Any of these conditions indicate that some error has occurred during adjacency establishment for all OSPF areas and interfaces. across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of decisions to be made (again) as to whether an adjacency should be established/maintained with the neighbor across all OSPF areas and interfaces. across all OSPF areas and interfaces. Has an unexpected DD sequence number b. August 2009 .

The sum total number of changes in the set of bidirectional neighbors associated with any interface across all OSPF areas. The total number of times the Summary timer has been fired. The sum total number of times the Wait Timer has been fired. The sum total number of times the Link State Advertisement (LSA) lock timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of interfaces. BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 177 . connected to the attached network in all OSPF areas. The sum total of interfaces no longer connected to the attached network across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of times the Retransmit timer has been fired across all OPSF areas and interfaces. The total number of times the Autonomous System Export (ASE) timer has been fired.BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference Table 77 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (continued) Statistics Description Intf Change Stats: hello down loop unloop wait timer The sum total number of Hello packets sent on all interfaces and areas. indicating the end of the waiting period that is required before electing a (Backup) Designated Router across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The total number of times the data base age (Dbage) has been fired. backup nbr change Timers Kickoff: hello retransmit lsa lock lsa ack dbage summary ase export The sum total number of times the Hello timer has been fired (which triggers the send of a Hello packet) across all OPSF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of times the LSA Ack timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of Backup Designated Routers on the attached network for all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of interfaces down in all OSPF areas.

When virtual routers are configured.1 Command Reference /stats/l3/vrrp VRRP Statistics Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on the GbE2c provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. you can display the protocol statistics for VRRP. The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad version number. The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad password. The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had bad data. and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. based on a number of priority criteria. The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad virtual router ID. If the master fails. The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been sent. The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad interval. The statistics for the VRRP LAN are displayed: VRRP statistics: vrrpInAdvers: vrrpOutAdvers: vrrpBadVersion: vrrpBadAddress: vrrpBadPassword: 0 0 0 0 0 vrrpBadAdvers: vrrpBadVrid: vrrpBadData: vrrpBadInterval: 0 0 0 0 Table 78 VRRP Statistics (/stats/l3/vrrp) Statistics Description vrrpInAdvers The total number of valid VRRP advertisements that have been received. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master. The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad address.BLADE OS 5. The total number of VRRP advertisements received that were dropped. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. August 2009 . vrrpBadAdvers vrrpOutAdvers vrrpBadVersion vrrpBadVrid vrrpBadAddress vrrpBadData vrrpBadPassword vrrpBadInterval 178 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114.

August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 179 .1 Command Reference /stats/l3/rip Routing Information Protocol Statistics RIP ALL STATS INFORMATION: RIP packets received = 12 RIP packets sent = 75 RIP request received = 0 RIP response recevied = 12 RIP request sent = 3 RIP reponse sent = 72 RIP route timeout = 0 RIP bad size packet received = RIP bad version received RIP bad zeros received RIP bad src port received RIP bad src IP received RIP packets from self received 0 = = = = = 0 0 0 0 0 BMD00114.BLADE OS 5.

Show Packet stats tcb .Show CPU utilization mem . 180 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. August 2009 .Show I2C stats pkt . ucb Displays all UDP control blocks that are in use. mem Displays system memory statistics. To view a sample output. see page 183.Show All UDP control blocks in use cpu . to check for leads and load. This command is used by Technical Support personnel.BLADE OS 5. i2c Displays I2C statistics. To view a sample output and a description of the stats. see page 183. see page 184. To view a sample output and a description of the stats. This command is used by Technical Support personnel. To view a sample output and a description of the stats. see page 181. pkt Displays packet statistics.Show Memory utilization stats Table 79 Management Processor Statistics Menu Options (/stats/mp) Command Syntax and Usage thr Displays STEM thread statistics. and 64 seconds. cpu Displays CPU utilization for periods of up to 1.Show STEM thread stats i2c . tcb Displays all TCP control blocks that are in use.1 Command Reference /stats/mp Management Processor Statistics Menu [MP-specific Statistics Menu] thr .Show All TCP control blocks in use ucb . 4.

1 Command Reference /stats/mp/pkt MP Packet Statistics Packet counts seen by MP: allocs: 859 frees: 859 failures: 0 small packet buffers: ---------------------current: 0 hi-watermark: 4 hi-water time: 17:56:35 Tue Jul 14. Total number of packet allocations with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packet allocation failures from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.BLADE OS 5. 2009 jumbo packet buffers: ---------------------current: hi-watermark: 0 0 Table 80 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt) Statistics Description allocs frees failures small packet buffers current hi-watermark hi-water time Total number of packet allocations from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. 2009 medium packet buffers: ---------------------current: 0 hi-watermark: 1 hi-water time: 17:56:16 Tue Jul 14. Time stamp that indicates when the hi-watermark was reached. Total number of times the packet buffers are freed (released) to the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 181 . The highest number of packet allocation with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.

1 Command Reference Table 80 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt) Statistics Description medium packet buffers current hi-watermark hi-water time jumbo packet buffers current hi-watermark Total number of packet allocations with more than 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. August 2009 .BLADE OS 5. Time stamp that indicates when the hi-watermark was reached. The highest number of packet allocation with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. 182 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. The highest number of packet allocation with more than 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packet allocations with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.

243 80 23 listen established Table 81 MP Specified TCP Statistics (/stats/mp/tcb) Statistics Description 10ad41e8/10ad5790 0.27.0 0 <=> 0.1 Command Reference /stats/mp/tcb TCP Statistics All TCP allocated control blocks: 10ad41e8: 0.0.0.27. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 183 .5 0/1171 0.0/47.0 10ad5790: 47.0.23.80.0/47.0.BLADE OS 5.81.23.0.81.80.5 1171 <=> 47.0.0.243 80/23 listen/established Memory Destination IP address Destination port Source IP Source port State /stats/mp/ucb UCB Statistics All UDP allocated control blocks: 161: listen BMD00114.0.

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference /stats/mp/cpu CPU Statistics This menu option enables you to display the CPU utilization statistics. The utilization of MP CPU over 4 seconds. CPU utilization: cpuUtil1Second: cpuUtil4Seconds: cpuUtil64Seconds: 53% 54% 54% Table 82 CPU Statistics (stats/mp/cpu) Statistics Description cpuUtil1Second cpuUtil4Seconds cpuUtil64Seconds The utilization of MP CPU over 1 second. It shows the percentage. It shows the percentage. August 2009 . 184 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. The utilization of MP CPU over 64 seconds. It shows the percentage.

or for all ACLs if the option is omitted. Hits for ACL 1.Display all available ACL stats .Clear ACL stats ACL statistics are described in the following table. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 185 .1 Command Reference /stats/acl ACL Statistics Menu [ACL Menu] acl dump clracl . port 1: 26057515 26057497 BMD00114. /stats/acl/acl [<ACL number>] ACL Statistics List This option displays statistics for the selected ACL if an ACL number is specified. For details. port 1: Hits for ACL 2. see page 185. clracl Clears all ACL statistics.BLADE OS 5. Table 83 ACL Statistics Menu Options (/stats/acl) Command Syntax and Usage acl <ACL number> Displays the Access Control List Statistics for a specific ACL. dump Displays all ACL statistics.Display ACL stats .

snmpInBadC'tyUses 186 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. as follows: >> Statistics# snmp clear SNMP statistics: snmpInPkts: snmpInBadC'tyNames: snmpInASNParseErrs: snmpOutPkts: snmpInTooBigs: snmpInBadValues: snmpInGenErrs: snmpInTotalSetVars: snmpInGetNexts: snmpInGetResponses: snmpOutTooBigs: snmpOutBadValues: snmpOutGenErrs: snmpOutGetNexts: snmpOutGetResponses: snmpSilentDrops: 150097 0 0 150097 0 0 0 2731 131389 0 0 0 1 0 150093 0 snmpInBadVersions: snmpInBadC'tyUses: snmpEnableAuthTraps: snmpInBadTypes: snmpInNoSuchNames: snmpInReadOnlys: snmpInTotalReqVars: snmpInGetRequests: snmpInSetRequests: snmpInTraps: snmpOutNoSuchNames: snmpOutReadOnlys: snmpOutGetRequests: snmpOutSetRequests: snmpOutTraps: snmpProxyDrops: 0 0 0 0 0 0 798464 17593 615 0 1 0 0 0 4 0 Table 84 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics Description snmpInPkts snmpInBadVersions snmpInBadC'tyNames The total number of Messages delivered to the SNMP entity from the transport service. The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP entity which used an SNMP community name not known to the said entity (the switch). August 2009 .1 Command Reference /stats/snmp [clear] SNMP Statistics Note – You can reset the SNMP counter to zero by using clear command. which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and were for an unsupported SNMP version. The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP protocol entity which represented an SNMP operation which was not allowed by the SNMP community named in the Message. The total number of SNMP Messages.

As such. which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is `read-Only'. BER describes how to represent or encode values of each ASN. The total number of valid SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is genErr. from simple types such as integers and bit strings to structured types such as sets and sequences.1 is a flexible notation that allows one to define a variety of data types. this object is provided as a means of detecting incorrect implementations of the SNMP. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is badValue. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is too big. ASN. which contains the value `read-Only' in the error-status field. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 187 . snmpInNoSuchNames snmpInBadValues snmpInReadOnlys snmpInGenErrs BMD00114. Note: OSI's method of specifying abstract objects is called ASN. snmpEnableAuth Traps snmpOutPkts snmpInBadTypes snmpInTooBigs An object to enable or disable the authentication traps generated by this entity (the switch).1 Command Reference Table 84 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics Description snmpInASNParseErrs The total number of ASN. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is noSuchName.208). The total number of SNMP Messages which were passed from the SNMP protocol entity to the transport service.1 or BER errors encountered by the SNMP protocol entity when decoding SNMP Messages received.BLADE OS 5. The total number of SNMP Messages which failed ASN parsing.1 type as a string of eight-bit octets. defined in X. It should be noted that it is a protocol error to generate an SNMP PDU. and one set of rules for representing such objects as strings of ones and zeros is called the BER (Basic Encoding Rules.1 (Abstract Syntax Notation One. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). defined in X.209).

which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status is noSuchName. The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is genErr. The total number of MIB objects. which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs). snmpInTotalSetVars snmpInGetRequests snmpInGetNexts snmpInSetRequests snmpInGetResponses snmpInTraps snmpOutTooBigs snmpOutNoSuchNames snmpOutBadValues snmpOutReadOnlys snmpOutGenErrs snmpOutGetRequests 188 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114.1 Command Reference Table 84 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics Description snmpInTotalReqVars The total number of MIB objects which have been retrieved successfully by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP Get-Request and Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs).BLADE OS 5. Not in use. The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is too big. The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). August 2009 . The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is badValue. which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. which have been altered successfully by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs).

BLADE OS 5. GetNextRequest-PDUs. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. GetNextRequest-PDUs. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of GetRequest-PDUs.1 Command Reference Table 84 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics Description snmpOutGetNexts snmpOutSetRequests snmpOutGet Responses snmpOutTraps snmpSilentDrops The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs). snmpProxyDrops BMD00114. SetRequest-PDUs. August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 189 . and InformRequest-PDUs delivered to the SNMPv2 entity which were silently dropped because the size of a reply containing an alternate Response-PDU with an empty variable bindings field was greater than either a local constraint or the maximum message size associated with the originator of the request. GetBulkRequest-PDUs. The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. and InformRequest-PDUs delivered to the SNMP entity which were silently dropped because the transmission of the message to a proxy target failed in a manner such that no Response-PDU could be returned. GetBulkRequest-PDUs. SetRequest-PDUs. The total number of GetRequest-PDUs. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity.

August 2009 . Updates: The total number of times the switch updated its time based on the NTP responses received from the secondary NTP server. 190 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. Updates: The total number of times the switch updated its time based on the NTP responses received from the primary NTP server. 2009 Current system time: 18:55:49 Tue Jul 13.1 Command Reference /stats/ntp NTP Statistics BLADE OS uses NTP (Network Timing Protocol) version 3 to synchronize the switch’s internal clock with an atomic time calibrated NTP server. Secondary Server Requests Sent: The total number of NTP requests the switch sent to the secondary NTP server to synchronize time. Last update time: 18:04:16 Tue Jul 13. the switch can accurately update its internal clock to be consistent with other devices on the network and generates accurate syslogs. Responses Received: The total number of NTP responses received from the secondary NTP server. With NTP enabled. NTP statistics: Primary Server: Requests Sent: Responses Received: Updates: Secondary Server: Requests Sent: Responses Received: Updates: 17 17 1 0 0 0 Last update based on response from primary server. 2009 Table 85 NTP Statistics Parameters (/stats/ntp) Field Description Primary Server Requests Sent: The total number of NTP requests the switch sent to the primary NTP server to synchronize time.BLADE OS 5. Responses Received: The total number of NTP responses received from the primary NTP server.

August 2009 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 191 .BLADE OS 5. The switch system time when the following command was issued: /stats/ntp Note – Use the following command to delete all NTP statistics: /stats/ntp clear BMD00114. The time stamp showing the time when the switch was last updated.1 Command Reference Table 85 NTP Statistics Parameters (/stats/ntp) Field Description Last update based on response from primary server Last update time Current system time Last update of time on the switch based on either primary or secondary NTP response received.

The total numbers of times that cross-connect ports in the Link to Enable group were automatically enabled because of a failure in the Link to Monitor group. The total number of times that Spanning Tree Blocking state was detected on the downlink ports in the Link to Monitor group. depending on your configuration). /stats/dump Statistics Dump Use the dump command to dump all switch statistics available from the Statistics Menu (40K or more. 192 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu BMD00114. Server Link Failure Detection statistics: Number of times LtM link failure: 1 Number of times LtM link in Blocking State: 0 Number of times LtE got auto enabled: 1 Table 86 SFD Statistics Field Number of times LtM link failure Number of times LtM link in Blocking Stat Number of times LtE got auto enabled Description The total numbers of times that link failures were detected on the downlink ports in the Link to Monitor group. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. To reset SFD statistics. August 2009 . follow the command /stats/sfd with the following argument: clear.1 Command Reference /stats/sfd Server Link Failure Detection Statistics This menu option allows you to display Server Link Failure Detection (SFD) statistics. If you want to capture dump data to a file.BLADE OS 5. This data can be used to tune or debug switch performance.

viewing.Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg .Restore current configuration from FTP/TFTP server cur .Server Link Failure Detection Menu setup .CHAPTER 6 The Configuration Menu This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) for making.RMON Menu sfd . /cfg Configuration Menu [Configuration Menu] sys .QOS Menu acl .Access Control List Menu pmirr .System-wide Parameter Menu port .Step by step configuration set up dump .Layer 3 Menu rmon .Layer 2 Menu l3 . August 2009 193 . and saving switch configuration changes.Port Menu qos .Port Mirroring Menu l2 . Changes can be saved to non-volatile memory (NVRAM).Backup current configuration to FTP/TFTP server gtcfg .Display current configuration BMD00114. Changes to configuration are not active until explicitly applied.

l2 Displays the Layer 2 Configuration Menu. To view menu options. see page 198.1 Command Reference Each configuration option is briefly described in Table 87. rmon Displays the Remote Monitoring (RMON) Configuration Menu. pmirr Displays the Mirroring Configuration Menu. see page 376. sfd Displays the Server Link Failure Detection Configuration Menu. see page 376. To view menu options. l3 Displays the Layer 3 Configuration Menu. see page 238. For details. To view menu options. setup Step-by-step configuration set-up of the switch. For details. see page 313. To view menu options. see page 263. Table 87 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays the System Configuration Menu. To view menu options. see page 249. qos Displays the Quality of Service Configuration Menu. To view menu options. acl Displays the ACL Configuration Menu. see page 247. dump Dumps current configuration to a script file. August 2009 . see page 373. To view menu options. see page 368. To view menu options. To view menu options.BLADE OS 5. see page 265. 194 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. port <port number> Displays the Port Configuration Menu. with pointers to detailed menu commands.

and Saving Changes As you use the configuration menus to set switch parameters. you can enter diff at any prompt in the CLI. Therefore. Note – The diff command is a global command. The Information menu displays current run-time information of switch parameters. Also. you can do the following: View the pending changes Apply the pending changes Save the changes to flash memory Viewing Pending Changes You can view all pending configuration changes by entering diff at the menu prompt.BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference Table 87 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage ptcfg <FTP/TFTP server host name or IP address> <filename on host> Backs up current configuration to FTP/TFTP server. gtcfg <host name or IP address of FTP/TFTP server> <filename on host> Restores current configuration from FTP/TFTP server. Reverting. port status) might differ from run-time information that you view in the Information menu. For details. settings you view in the Configuration menu (for example. see page 377. Therefore. cur Displays current configuration parameters. BMD00114. any changes are lost the next time the switch boots unless the changes are explicitly saved. While configuration changes are in the pending state. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 195 . For details. Applying. the changes you make do not take effect immediately. see page 377. Viewing. All changes are considered “pending” until you explicitly apply them. Note – Some operations can override the settings in the Configuration menu.

August 2009 . you can save them to flash memory on the GbE2c. Enter revert apply to remove all changes that have not been saved.1 Command Reference Applying Pending Changes To make your configuration changes active. To apply configuration changes. The configuration being replaced by the save is first copied to the backup configuration block. # apply Note – The apply command is a global command. To save the new configuration. Note – If you do not save the changes. If you do not want the previous configuration block copied to the backup configuration block. they will be lost the next time the system is rebooted. enter the following command at any CLI prompt: # save When you save configuration changes. enter the following instead: # save n 196 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. Therefore. Reverting Changes The revert command removes configuration changes that have been made. enter apply at any prompt in the CLI. you must apply them. the changes are saved to the active configuration block. you can enter apply at any prompt in the administrative interface. # revert Saving the Configuration In addition to applying the configuration changes. but not applied.BLADE OS 5.

BMD00114. Your options include: The active configuration block The backup configuration block Factory default configuration You can view all pending configuration changes that have been applied but not saved to flash memory using the diff flash command. It is a global command that can be executed from any menu.BLADE OS 5. see “Selecting a Configuration Block” on page 390. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 197 .1 Command Reference You can decide which configuration you want to run the next time you reset the switch. For instructions on selecting the configuration to run at the next system reset.

Syslog Menu . Table 88 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys) Command Syntax and Usage syslog Displays the Syslog Menu.Enable/disable use of DHCP on Mgmt interface . To view menu options. August 2009 .sFlow Menu .Set login banner .Set system DST for US prior to 2007 .Enable/disable Reminders .TACACS+ Authentication Menu .Enable/disable use of BOOTP .LDAP Authentication Menu . and management access lists. see page 207. tacacs+ Displays the TACACS+ Authentication Menu.BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys System Configuration Menu [System Menu] syslog sshd radius tacacs+ ldap ntp ssnmp access sflow date time timezone olddst dlight idle notice bannr hprompt bootp dhcp reminder rstctrl cur .Set timeout for idle CLI sessions .Set system time .Set system date .Enable/disable System reset on panic . To view menu options.RADIUS Authentication Menu . see page 203.SSH Server Menu . Web-based management settings. see page 205.Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt . see page 201.Set system timezone (daylight savings) . To view menu options.NTP Server Menu . radius Displays the RADIUS Authentication Menu.Set login notice . To view menu options.Set system daylight savings . 198 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.Display current system-wide parameters This menu provides configuration of switch management parameters such as user and administrator privilege mode passwords. sshd Displays the SSH Server Menu.System SNMP Menu .System Access Menu .

When enabled. To view menu options. To view menu options. see page 211. region) by the timezone wizard. The date retains its value when the switch is reset. You are prompted to select your location (continent. Once a region is selected. see page 213. To view menu options. dlight enable|disable Disables or enables daylight savings time in the system clock. timezone Configures the time zone where the switch resides. BMD00114. olddst enable|disable Enables or disables use of the Daylight Saving Time (DST) rules in effect prior to the year 2007. see page 236. The default setting is disabled. ssnmp Displays the System SNMP Menu. To view menu options. time Configures the system time using a 24-hour clock format. To view menu options. sflow Displays the sFlow menu. access Displays the System Access Menu. see page 214. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 199 . The time retains its value when the switch is reset. the switch will add an extra hour to the system clock so that it is consistent with the local clock. etc.1 Command Reference Table 88 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage ldap Displays the LDAP Authentication Menu. country. the switch updates the time to reflect local changes to Daylight Savings Time. The default value is disabled. date Prompts the user for the system date. see page 230. ntp Displays the Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server Menu.BLADE OS 5.

When enabled. bootp disable|enable Enables or disables the use of BOOTP. This notice can contain up to 1024 characters and new lines. rstctrl disable|enable Enables or disables the reset control flag. The default is 10 minutes. When enabled. dhcp disable|enable Enables or disables Dynamic Host Control Protocol for setting the IP address on the management interface.BLADE OS 5. It is also displayed as part of the output from the /info/sys command.1 Command Reference Table 88 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage idle <idle timeout in minutes> Sets the idle timeout for CLI sessions. the IP address obtained from the DHCP server overrides the static IP address. reminder disable|enable Enables or disables reminder messages in the CLI. The default setting is enabled. cur Displays the current system parameters. the login banner is displayed. 200 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. When a user or administrator logs into the switch. maximum 80 characters> Configures a login banner of up to 80 characters. The default setting is enabled. using the last known Layer 2/3 information. the switch continues to function after a crash of the main processor. The default setting is enabled. notice <maximum 1024 character multi-line login notice> <'-' to end> Displays login notice immediately before the “Enter password:” prompt. from 1 to 60 minutes. August 2009 . hprompt disable|enable Enables or disables displaying of the host name (system administrator’s name) in the Command Line Interface (CLI). bannr <string. If you enable BOOTP. the switch will query its BOOTP server for all of the switch IP parameters. The default setting is enabled.

log all severity levels. The default is 7. console disable|enable Enables or disables delivering syslog messages to the console. The default is 0. host2 <new syslog host IP address> Sets the IP address of the second syslog host. facil2 <syslog host local facility (0-7)> This option sets the facility level of the second syslog host displayed. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 201 .BLADE OS 5. It is enabled by default. facil <syslog host local facility (0-7)> This option sets the facility level of the first syslog host displayed. which means log all severity levels.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/syslog System Host Log Configuration Menu [Syslog Menu] host host2 sever sever2 facil facil2 console log cur Set IP address of first syslog host Set IP address of second syslog host Set the severity of first syslog host Set the severity of second syslog host Set facility of first syslog host Set facility of second syslog host Enable/disable console output of syslog messages Enable/disable syslogging of features Display current syslog settings Table 89 Host Log Menu Options (/cfg/sys/syslog) Command Syntax and Usage host <new syslog host IP address> Sets the IP address of the first syslog host. disabling console ensures the switch is not affected by syslog messages. The default is 7. which means. The default is 0. sever2 <syslog host local severity (0–7)> This option sets the severity level of the second syslog host displayed. BMD00114. When necessary. sever <syslog host local severity (0–7)> This option sets the severity level of the first syslog host displayed.

stg.1 Command Reference Table 89 Host Log Menu Options (/cfg/sys/syslog) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage log <feature|all> <enable|disable> Displays a list of features for which syslog messages can be generated. August 2009 . or servers). or to enable or disable syslog on all available features. 202 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. cur Displays the current syslog settings. You can choose to enable or disable specific features (such as vlans.

for auto-generation of the RSA server key. dis Disables the SCP apply and save. All data using SSH is encrypted. sshport <TCP port number> Sets the SSH server port number.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/sshd Secure Shell Server Configuration Menu [SSHD Menu] intrval scpadm hkeygen skeygen sshport ena dis on off cur Set Interval for generating the RSA server key Set SCP-only admin password Generate the RSA host key Generate the RSA server key Set SSH server port number Enable the SCP apply and save Disable the SCP apply and save Turn SSH server ON Turn SSH server OFF Display current SSH server configuration Telnet traffic on the network is not secure. Table 90 SSH Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sshd) Command Syntax and Usage intrval <0-24> Set the interval. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 203 . ena Enables the SCP apply and save. The SSH program securely logs into another computer over a network and executes commands in a secure environment. scpadm Set the administration password for SCP access. BMD00114. this menu enables Secure Shell access from any SSH client. SSH scripts can be viewed by using the /cfg/dump command (see page 376). hkeygen Generate the RSA host key. in hours.BLADE OS 5. For the switch. skeygen Generate the RSA server key.

August 2009 . off Disables the SSH server.BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference Table 90 SSH Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sshd) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage on Enables the SSH server. cur Displays the current SSH server configuration. 204 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.

Display current RADIUS configuration Table 91 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address> Sets the primary RADIUS server address. The default is 1645. The default is 3 seconds. retries <RADIUS server retries (1-3)> Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different RADIUS server. BMD00114.Enable/disable RADIUS secure backdoor for telnet/ssh/ http/https on .Set RADIUS secret secret2 . timeout <RADIUS server timeout seconds (1-10)> Sets the amount of time.Turn RADIUS authentication OFF cur .Set secondary RADIUS server address secret .BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/radius RADIUS Server Configuration Menu [RADIUS Server Menu] prisrv .Set RADIUS server retries timeout . secret2 <1-32 character secret> This is the secondary shared secret between the switch and the RADIUS server(s).Set secondary RADIUS server secret port .Set primary RADIUS server address secsrv .Enable/disable RADIUS backdoor for telnet/ssh/http/https secbd .Set RADIUS server timeout bckdoor . before a RADIUS server authentication attempt is considered to have failed. between 1500 .Turn RADIUS authentication ON off . in seconds. secret <1-32 character secret> This is the shared secret between the switch and the RADIUS server(s).3000. secsrv <IP address> Sets the secondary RADIUS server address. port <RADIUS port> Enter the number of the UDP port to be configured. The default is 3 requests. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 205 .Set RADIUS port retries .

so you can connect using noradius and the administrator password even if the backdoor (bckdoor) or secure backdoor (secbd) are disabled. secbd disable|enable Enables or disables the RADIUS back door using secure password for Telnet/SSH/ HTTP/HTTPS.1 Command Reference Table 91 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage bckdoor disable|enable Enables or disables the RADIUS backdoor for Telnet/SSH/HTTP/HTTPS. Backdoor for console is always enabled. cur Displays the current RADIUS server parameters. and use the administrator password to log into the switch. The default value is disabled. If secure backdoor is enabled (secbd ena). The switch allows this even if RADIUS servers are available. This command does not apply when backdoor (Telnet) is enabled. If Telnet backdoor is enabled (bckdoor ena). August 2009 . The switch allows this only if RADIUS servers are not available.BLADE OS 5. on Enables the RADIUS server. you must login using RADIUS authentication when connecting via the console or Telnet/SSH/HTTP/HTTPS. 206 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. type in noradius as a backdoor to bypass RADIUS checking. off Disables the RADIUS server. To obtain the RADIUS backdoor password for your switch. type in noradius as a backdoor to bypass RADIUS checking. and use the administrator password to log into the switch. Note – If RADIUS is enabled. contact your Service and Support line.

BLADE OS 5. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 207 . and therefore less secure than TACACS+ and Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) protocols. as opposed to password-only in authentication requests.) TACACS+ protocol is more reliable than RADIUS. TACACS is an encryption protocol. RADIUS combines authentication and authorization in a user profile. It supports full-packet encryption. as TACACS+ uses the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) whereas RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP). Also.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/tacacs+ TACACS+ Server Configuration Menu TACACS (Terminal Access Controller Access Control system) is an authentication protocol that allows a remote access server to forward a user's logon password to an authentication server to determine whether access can be allowed to a given system. TACACS+ offers the following advantages over RADIUS as the authentication device: TACACS+ is TCP-based. and accounting. (Both TACACS and TACACS+ are described in RFC 1492. [TACACS+ Server prisrv secsrv chpass_p chpass_s secret secret2 port retries timeout usermap bckdoor secbd cmap passch cauth clog dreq on off cur - Menu] Set IP address of primary TACACS+ server Set IP address of secondary TACACS+ server Set new password for primary server Set new password for secondary server Set secret for primary TACACS+ server Set secret for secondary TACACS+ server Set TACACS+ port number Set number of TACACS+ server retries Set timeout value of TACACS+ server retries Set user privilege mappings Enable/disable TACACS+ backdoor for telnet/ssh/ http/https Enable/disable TACACS+ secure backdoor Enable/disable TACACS+ new privilege level mapping Enable/disable TACACS+ password change Enable/disable TACACS+ command authorization Enable/disable TACACS+ command logging Enable/disable TACACS+ directed request Enable TACACS+ authentication Disable TACACS+ authentication Display current TACACS+ settings BMD00114. authorization. whereas TACACS+ separates the two operations. It supports de-coupled authentication. so it facilitates connection-oriented traffic.

timeout <TACACS server timeout seconds. port <TACACS port> Enter the number of the TCP port to be configured. The default is 49.1 Command Reference Table 92 TACACS+ Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/tacacs) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address> Defines the primary TACACS+ server address. 4-15> Sets the amount of time. Enter a TACACS+ authorization level (0-15). 208 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. secsrv <IP address> Defines the secondary TACACS+ server address. retries <TACACS server retries.65000. The CLI will prompt you for input. 1-3> Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different TACACS+ server. usermap <0-15> user|oper|admin|none Maps a TACACS+ authorization level to a switch user level. before a TACACS+ server authentication attempt is considered to have failed. The CLI will prompt you for input. The default is 5 seconds. in seconds. secret <1-32 character secret> This is the shared secret between the switch and the TACACS+ server(s). August 2009 . chpass_s Configures the password for the secondary TACACS+ server. The default is 3 requests. chpass_p Configures the password for the primary TACACS+ server. secret2 <1-32 character secret> This is the secondary shared secret between the switch and the TACACS+ server(s).BLADE OS 5. followed by the corresponding switch user level. between 1 .

or HTTP/HTTPS. SSH/SCP. It is recommended that you use Secure Backdoor to ensure the switch is secured. The default setting is disabled. The default setting is disabled. because Secure Backdoor disallows access through the back door when the TACACS+ servers are responding. passch enable|disable Enables or disables TACACS+ password change. The default setting is disabled. clog disable|enable Enables or disables TACACS+ command logging. To obtain the TACACS+ backdoor password for your switch. cmap enable|disable Enables or disables TACACS+ privilege-level mapping. or HTTP/HTTPS only when the TACACS+ servers are not responding.BLADE OS 5. secbd enable|disable Enables or disables TACACS+ secure back door access through Telnet. contact your Service and Support line. This feature is recommended to permit access to the switch when the TACACS+ servers become unresponsive. BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 209 . cauth disable|enable Enables or disables TACACS+ command authorization. the only way to gain access when TACACS+ servers are unresponsive is to use the back door via the console port. If no back door is enabled.1 Command Reference Table 92 TACACS+ Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/tacacs) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage bckdoor disable|enable Enables or disables the TACACS+ back door for Telnet. SSH/SCP. The default value is disabled. Enabling this feature allows you to bypass the TACACS+ servers.

and use the administrator password to log into the switch. Note – If TACACS+ is enabled. type in notacacs as a backdoor to bypass TACACS+ checking. each user must add a configured TACACS+ server hostname to the username (for example. This is the default setting. you must login using TACACS+ authentication when connecting via the console or Telnet/SSH/HTTP/HTTPS.BLADE OS 5. so you can connect using notacacs and the administrator password even if the backdoor (bckdoor) or secure backdoor (secbd) are disabled. which uses a specified TACACS+ server for authentication. cur Displays current TACACS+ configuration parameters. off Disables the TACACS+ server. If Telnet backdoor is enabled (bckdoor ena). 210 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. username@hostname) during login. No-truncate: The entire login string is sent to the TACACS+ server.1 Command Reference Table 92 TACACS+ Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/tacacs) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage dreq disable|enable Enables or disables TACACS+ directed request. This command allows the following options: Restricted: Only the username is sent to the specified TACACS+ server. type in notacacs as a backdoor to bypass TACACS+ checking. accounting. Backdoor for console is always enabled. When directed-request is enabled. The switch allows this only if TACACS+ servers are not available. and use the administrator password to log into the switch. If secure backdoor is enabled (secbd ena). authorization. on Enables the TACACS+ server. August 2009 . When enabled. The switch allows this even if TACACS+ servers are available.

1-3> Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different LDAP server. secsrv <IP address> Defines the secondary LDAP server address.dc=mydomain. Enter the full path for your organization. between 1 .Disable LDAP authentication cur .65000. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 211 . retries <LDAP server retries. [LDAP Server Menu] prisrv .Set number of LDAP server retries timeout .Display current LDAP settings Table 93 LDAP Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ldap) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address> Defines the primary LDAP server address. 4-15> Sets the amount of time. The default is 3 requests.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ldap LDAP Server Configuration Menu LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) is an authentication protocol that allows a remote access server to forward a user's logon password to an authentication server to determine whether access can be allowed to a given system. For example: ou=people.Set timeout value of LDAP server retries domain .Set IP address of primary LDAP server secsrv . The default is 5 seconds.dc=com BMD00114.Set LDAP port number retries .Enable LDAP authentication off . The default is 389. port <LDAP port> Enter the number of the TCP port to be configured.BLADE OS 5. timeout <LDAP server timeout seconds.Set IP address of secondary LDAP server port .Set domain name bckdoor . in seconds. before a LDAP server authentication attempt is considered to have failed. domain <domain name (1-128 characters)>|none Sets the domain name for the LDAP server.Enable/disable LDAP backdoor for telnet/ssh/http/https on .

contact your Service and Support line. This is the default setting. The default setting is disabled. on Enables the LDAP server. 212 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. off Disables the LDAP server. or HTTP/HTTPS. To obtain the LDAP backdoor password for your switch.1 Command Reference Table 93 LDAP Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ldap) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage bckdoor disable|enable Enables or disables the LDAP back door for Telnet. cur Displays current LDAP configuration parameters. SSH/SCP. August 2009 .

Display current NTP configuration This menu enables you to synchronize the switch clock to a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. BMD00114.Set secondary NTP server address intrval .Turn NTP service ON off . secsrv <IP address> Prompts for the IP addresses of the secondary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock. this option is disabled.Turn NTP service OFF cur . By default.Set NTP server resync interval on . on Enables the NTP synchronization service. intrval <5-44640> Specifies the time interval. off Disables the NTP synchronization service. cur Displays the current NTP service settings. Table 94 NTP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ntp) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address> Prompts for the IP addresses of the primary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 213 .BLADE OS 5. in minutes.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ntp NTP Server Configuration Menu [NTP Server Menu] prisrv . to re-synchronize the switch clock with the NTP server.Set primary NTP server address secsrv .

Set SNMP "sysContact" rcomm .BLADE OS 5. August 2009 .Set SNMP trap source interface for SNMPv1 timeout .Set SNMP "sysName" locn . In SNMP model of network management. a management station (client/manager) accesses a set of variables known as MIBs (Management Information Base) provided by the managed device (agent).SNMPv3 Menu name . If you are running an SNMP network management station on your network. you can manage the switch using the following standard SNMP MIBs: MIB II (RFC 1213) Ethernet MIB (RFC 1643) Bridge MIB (RFC 1493) An SNMP agent is a software process on the managed device that listens on UDP port 161 for SNMP messages.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp System SNMP Configuration Menu [System SNMP Menu] snmpv3 .Set SNMP read community string wcomm .Set SNMP "sysLocation" cont .Enable/disable SNMP "sysAuthenTrap" linkt .Enable/disable SNMP link up/down trap sfd .Display current SNMP configuration BLADE OS supports SNMP-based network management.Enable/disable SNMP Server Link Failure Detection trap cur . Each SNMP message sent to the agent contains a list of management objects to retrieve or to modify. SNMP parameters that can be modified include: System name System location System contact Use of the SNMP system authentication trap function Read community string Write community string Trap community strings 214 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.Set SNMP write community string trsrc .Set timeout for the SNMP state machine auth .

locn <1-64 characters> Configures the name of the system location. BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 215 . auth disable|enable Enables or disables the use of the system authentication trap facility. specify interface 256. The default setting is disabled. The default setting is enabled. trsrc <interface number> Configures the source interface for SNMP traps. linkt <port> [disable|enable] Enables or disables the sending of SNMP link up and link down traps. rcomm <1-32 characters> Configures the SNMP read community string. name <1-64 characters> Configures the name for the system. To send traps through the management ports. The default read community string is public. see page 217. in minutes.1 Command Reference Table 95 System SNMP Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp) Command Syntax and Usage snmpv3 Displays SNMPv3 menu. cont <1-64 characters> Configures the name of the system contact. wcomm <1-32 characters> Configures the SNMP write community string. The default value is interface 1. timeout <1-30> Set the timeout value for the SNMP state machine. The default write community string is private. The write community string controls SNMP “set” and “get” access to the switch.BLADE OS 5. The read community string controls SNMP “get” access to the switch. To view menu options.

August 2009 . 216 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. The default setting is disabled.BLADE OS 5. cur Displays the current SNMP configuration.1 Command Reference Table 95 System SNMP Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage sfd disable|enable Enables or disables the sending of Server Link Failure Detection traps.

You can also configure this entry through SNMP.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2 Framework by supporting the following: a new SNMP message format security for messages access control remote configuration of SNMP parameters For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276. You need access control when you have to process retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity. To view menu options. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 217 . BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. see page 222. access <vacmAccess number [1-32]> Configures the access rights. To view menu options. see page 219. view <vacmViewTreeFamily number [1-128]> Allows you to create different MIB views. To view menu options. [SNMPv3 Menu] usm view access group comm taddr tparam notify v1v2 cur - usmUser Table menu vacmViewTreeFamily Table menu vacmAccess Table menu vacmSecurityToGroup Table menu community Table menu targetAddr Table menu targetParams Table menu notify Table menu Enable/disable V1/V2 access Display current SNMPv3 configuration Table 96 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3) Command Syntax and Usage usm <usmUser number [1-16]> Defines a user security model (USM) entry for an authorized user. see page 221. The View-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user.

and generates Notification-Class messages based on these events or conditions. 218 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. consisting of message processing model. v1v2 disable|enable Allows you to enable or disable the access to SNMP version 1 and version 2. see page 226. August 2009 . cur Displays the current SNMPv3 configuration. comm <snmpCommunity number [1-16]> The community table contains objects for mapping community strings and version-independent SNMP message parameters. or a particular transport endpoint may be associated with several sets of SNMP parameters. This is also termed as transport endpoint. To view menu options. see page 225. There may be multiple transport endpoints associated with a particular set of SNMP parameters. taddr <snmpTargetAddr number [1-16]> Allows you to configure destination information. To view menu options. A group defines the access rights assigned to all names that belong to a particular group. see page 229. The default setting is enabled.1 Command Reference Table 96 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3) group <vacmSecurityToGroup number [1-16]> Maps the user name to the access group names and their access rights needed to access SNMP management objects. To view menu options. The SNMP MIB provides a mechanism for performing source address validation on incoming requests. see page 227. and security name information. consisting of a transport domain and a transport address.BLADE OS 5. security model. tparam <target params index [1-16]> Allows you to configure SNMP parameters. To view menu options. notify <notify index [1-16]> A notification application typically monitors a system for particular events or conditions. see page 224. and for selecting community strings based on target addresses for outgoing notifications. security level. To view menu options.

privpw Defines the privacy password. authpw Allows you to create or change your password for authentication. This is the login name that you need in order to access the switch. If you select none as the authentication protocol. The privacy protocol protects messages from disclosure. [SNMPv3 usmUser name auth authpw priv privpw del cur 1 Menu] Set USM user name Set authentication protocol Set authentication password Set privacy protocol Set privacy password Delete usmUser entry Display current usmUser configuration Table 97 User Security Model Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm) Command Syntax and Usage name <1-32 characters> Defines a string that represents the name of the user. BMD00114. The default algorithm is none. If you specify des as the privacy protocol. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 219 . If you selected an authentication algorithm using the above command. This menu helps you create a user security model entry for an authorized user. An SNMP engine must have the knowledge of applicable attributes of a user. then make sure that you have selected one of the authentication protocols (MD5 or HMAC-SHA-96). you will get an error message. auth md5|sha|none Configures the authentication protocol between HMAC-MD5-96 or HMAC-SHA-96.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm User Security Model Configuration Menu You can make use of a defined set of user identities using this Security Model. You need to provide a security name to create the USM entry.BLADE OS 5. priv des|none Configures the type of privacy protocol on your switch. The options are des (CBC-DES Symmetric Encryption Protocol) or none. otherwise you will get an error message during validation. you need to provide a password.

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

Table 97 User Security Model Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm) (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

del Deletes the selected USM user entries. cur Displays the selected USM user entries.

220

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view
SNMPv3 View Configuration Menu
[SNMPv3 vacmViewTreeFamily 1 Menu] name - Set view name tree - Set MIB subtree(OID) which defines a family of view subtrees mask - Set view mask type - Set view type del - Delete vacmViewTreeFamily entry cur - Display current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration

Table 98 SNMPv3 View Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view)
Command Syntax and Usage

name <1-32 characters> Defines the name for a family of view subtrees. tree <object identifier, such as 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1.0 (1-32 characters)> Defines the MIB tree which, when combined with the corresponding mask, defines a family of view subtrees. mask <bitmask, 1-32 characters> Configures the bit mask, which in combination with the corresponding tree, defines a family of view subtrees. type included|excluded This command indicates whether the corresponding instances of vacmViewTreeFamilySubtree and vacmViewTreeFamilyMask define a family of view subtrees, which is included in or excluded from the MIB view. del Deletes the vacmViewTreeFamily group entry. cur Displays the current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

221

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access
View-Based Access Control Model Configuration Menu
The view-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user. Access control is needed when the user has to process SNMP retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity.
[SNMPv3 vacmAccess 1 Menu] name - Set group name model - Set security model level - Set minimum level of security rview - Set read view index wview - Set write view index nview - Set notify view index del - Delete vacmAccess entry cur - Display current vacmAccess configuration

Table 99 View-based Access Control Model Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access)
Command Syntax and Usage

name <1-32 characters> Defines the name of the group. model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Allows you to select the security model to be used. level noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv|authPriv Defines the minimum level of security required to gain access rights. The level noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without authentication and without using a privacy protocol. The level authNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol. The authPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent both with authentication and using a privacy protocol. rview <1-32 characters> Defines a read view name that allows you read access to a particular MIB view. If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is granted. wview <1-32 characters> Defines a write view name that allows you write access to the MIB view. If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is granted.

222

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

Table 99 View-based Access Control Model Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access) (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

nview <1-32 characters> Defines a long notify view name that allows you notify access to the MIB view. del Deletes the View-based Access Control entry. cur Displays the View-based Access Control configuration.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

223

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group
SNMPv3 Group Configuration Menu
[SNMPv3 vacmSecurityToGroup 1 Menu] model - Set security model uname - Set USM user name gname - Set group gname del - Delete vacmSecurityToGroup entry cur - Display current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration

Table 100 SNMPv3 Group Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group)
Command Syntax and Usage

model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Defines the security model. uname <1-32 characters> Sets the user name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm/name on page 219. gname <1-32 characters> The name for the access group as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access/name on page 222. del Deletes the vacmSecurityToGroup entry. cur Displays the current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration.

224

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/comm
SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu
This command is used for configuring the community table entry. The configured entry is stored in the community table list in the SNMP engine. This table is used to configure community strings in the Local Configuration Datastore (LCD) of SNMP engine.
[SNMPv3 snmpCommunityTable 1 Menu] index - Set community index name - Set community string uname - Set USM user name tag - Set community tag del - Delete communityTable entry cur - Display current communityTable configuration

Table 101 SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/comm)
Command Syntax and Usage

index <1-32 characters> Configures the unique index value of a row in this table. name <1-32 characters> Defines the user name as defined in the /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm/name command. uname <1-32 characters> Defines a readable text string that represents the corresponding value of an SNMP community name in a security model. tag <1-255 characters> Configures a tag that specifies a set of transport endpoints to which a command responder application sends an SNMP trap. del Deletes the community table entry. cur Displays the community table configuration.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

225

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr
SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration Menu
This command is used to configure the target transport entry. The configured entry is stored in the target address table list in the SNMP engine. This table of transport addresses is used in the generation of SNMP messages.
[SNMPv3 snmpTargetAddrTable 1 Menu] name - Set target address name addr - Set target transport address IP port - Set target transport address port taglist - Set tag list pname - Set targetParams name del - Delete targetAddrTable entry cur - Display current targetAddrTable configuration

Table 102 Target Address Table Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr)
Command Syntax and Usage

name <1-32 characters> Defines the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier, target address name associated with this entry. addr <transport IP address> Configures a transport IPv4 address that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps. port <transport address port> Configures a transport address port that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps. taglist <1-255 characters> Allows you to configure a list of tags that are used to select target addresses for a particular operation. pname <1-32 characters> Defines the name as defined in the /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam/name command on page 227. del Deletes the Target Address Table entry. cur Displays the current Target Address Table configuration.

226

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam
SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu
You can configure the target parameters entry and store it in the target parameters table in the SNMP engine. This table contains parameters that are used to generate a message. The parameters include the message processing model (for example: SNMPv3, SNMPv2c, SNMPv1), the security model (for example: USM), the security name, and the security level (noAuthnoPriv, authNoPriv, or authPriv).
[SNMPv3 snmpTargetParamsTable 1 Menu] name - Set target params name mpmodel - Set message processing model model - Set security model uname - Set USM user name level - Set minimum level of security del - Delete targetParamsTable entry cur - Display current targetParamsTable configuration

Table 103 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam)
Command Syntax and Usage

name <1-32 characters> Defines the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier that is associated with this entry. mpmodel snmpv1|snmpv2c|snmpv3 Configures the message processing model that is used to generate SNMP messages. model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2 Allows you to select the security model to be used when generating the SNMP messages. uname <1-32 characters> Defines the name that identifies the user in the USM table (page 219) on whose behalf the SNMP messages are generated using this entry. level noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv|authPriv Allows you to select the level of security to be used when generating the SNMP messages using this entry. The level noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without authentication and without using a privacy protocol. The level authNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol. The authPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent both with authentication and using a privacy protocol.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

227

cur Displays the current targetParamsTable configuration.1 Command Reference Table 103 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the targetParamsTable entry. August 2009 .BLADE OS 5. 228 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.

[SNMPv3 snmpNotifyTable 1 Menu] name .1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration Menu SNMPv3 uses Notification Originator to send out traps. that matches the value of this tag is selected. tag <1-255 characters> Allows you to configure a tag that contains a tag value which is used to select entries in the Target Address Table.Set notify name tag .Display current notifyTable configuration Table 104 Notify Table Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify) Command Syntax and Usage name <1-32 characters> Defines a locally arbitrary but unique identifier associated with this SNMP notify entry. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 229 . A notification typically monitors a system for particular events or conditions.Delete notifyTable entry cur . cur Displays the current notify table configuration. and generates Notification-Class messages based on these events or conditions. del Deletes the notify table entry.BLADE OS 5. BMD00114. Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable.Set notify tag del .

see page 233.User Access Control Menu (passwords) https . user Displays the User Access Control Menu. 230 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.BLADE OS 5.Set SNMP access control tnport . set this to a different port (such as 8080).Management Network Definition Menu user . https Displays the HTTPS Menu. To view menu options.Enable/disable user configuration from BBI cur .Set Telnet server port number tport . August 2009 . To view menu options. The default is HTTP port 80. tport <TFTP port number (1-65535)> Sets the TFTP port for the switch.Set HTTP (Web) server port number http . tnport <TCP port number> Sets an optional telnet server port number for cases where the server listens for telnet sessions on a non-standard port.Set the TFTP Port for the system wport . wport <TCP port number (1-65535)> Sets the switch port used for serving switch Web content. see page 232.Enable/disable Telnet/SSH configuration from BBI userbbi . If Global Server Load Balancing is to be used.Enable/disable Telnet access tsbbi .Display current system access configuration Table 105 System Access Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access) Command Syntax and Usage mgmt Displays the Management Configuration Menu. The default is port 69.Enable/disable HTTP (Web) access tnet .1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access System Access Configuration Menu [System Access Menu] mgmt .HTTPS Web Access Menu snmp . snmp disable|read-only|read-write Disables or provides read-only/write-read SNMP access. see page 235. To view menu options.

cur Displays the current system access parameters. tnet enable|disable Enables or disables Telnet access. It is enabled by default.1 Command Reference Table 105 System Access Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage http disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP (Web) access to the Browser-Based Interface. BMD00114. tsbbi enable|disable Enables or disables Telnet/SSH configuration access through the Browser-Based Interface (BBI). This command is enabled by default. userbbi enable|disable Enables or disables user configuration access through the Browser-Based Interface (BBI).BLADE OS 5. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 231 .

Remove mgmt network definition cur . Table 106 Management Network Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/mgmt) Command Syntax and Usage add <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask> Adds a defined network through which switch access is allowed through Telnet. or the Browser-Based Interface. 232 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with a network mask address. Specify an IP address and mask address in dotted-decimal notation. RIP. clear Removes all defined management networks. which consists of a management network address and a management network mask address.BLADE OS 5.Add mgmt network definition rem . rem <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask> Removes a defined network.Clear current mgmt network definitions This menu is used to define IP address ranges which are allowed to access the switch for management purposes. August 2009 . Note: If you configure the management network without including the switch interfaces. cur Displays the current configuration. SNMP.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access/mgmt Management Networks Configuration Menu [Management Networks Menu] add .Display current mgmt network definitions clear . the configuration causes the Firewall Load Balancing health checks to fail and creates a “Network Down” state on the network.

usrpw <1-128 characters> Sets the user (user) password. eject user|oper|admin|<user name> Ejects the specified user from the switch. The operator manages all functions of the switch. Table 107 User Access Control Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user) Command Syntax and Usage uid <User ID (1-10)> Displays the User ID Menu.User ID Menu eject .1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access/user User Access Control Configuration Menu [User Access Control Menu] uid . including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. BMD00114. information. Access includes “oper” functions. admpw <1-128 characters> Sets the administrator (admin) password. He or she can view switch status information and statistics. The super user administrator has complete access to all menus. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can reset ports or the entire switch. To view menu options.Set administrator password (admin) cur . but cannot make any configuration changes. cur Displays the current user status. and configuration commands on the switch.Eject user usrpw . opw <1-128 characters> Sets the operator (oper)password. The user has no direct responsibility for switch management.Set operator password (oper) admpw .BLADE OS 5.Set user password (user) opw . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 233 . see page 234.Display current user status Note – Passwords can be a maximum of 128 characters.

BLADE OS 5. with User being the most restricted level.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access/user/uid <1-10> System User ID Configuration Menu [User ID 1 Menu] cos .Set user name pswd . name <1-8 characters> Sets the user name (maximum of eight characters). ena Enables the user ID.Delete user ID cur . BLADE OS defines these levels as: User. August 2009 .Display current user configuration Table 108 User ID Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user/uid) Command Syntax and Usage cos <user|oper|admin> Sets the Class-of-Service to define the user’s authority level.Enable user ID dis . dis Disables the user ID. 234 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. cur Displays the current user ID configuration. Operator. and Administrator.Set user password ena .Disable user ID del . pswd <1-128 characters> Sets the user password. del Deletes the user ID.Set class of service name .

BLADE OS 5. It will take approximately 30 seconds to generate the certificate. user’s name) []: Mr Smith Email (for example. For example: Country Name (2 letter code) []: CA State or Province Name (full name) []: Ontario Locality Name (for example. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 235 . city) []: Ottawa Organization Name (for example. Then the switch will restart SSL agent. port <TCP port number> Defines the HTTPS Web server port number. or the Web browser. cur Displays the current SSL Web Access configuration. company) []: Blade Organizational Unit Name (for example. generate Allows you to generate a certificate to connect to the SSL to be used during the key exchange. The user can create a new certificate defining the information that they want to be used in the various fields. section) []: Datacenter Common Name (for example. certSave Allows the client.net You will be asked to confirm if you want to generate the certificate.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/access/https HTTPS Access Configuration [https Menu] access port generate certSave cur Enable/Disable HTTPS Web access HTTPS WebServer port number Generate self-signed HTTPS server certificate save HTTPS certificate Display current SSL Web Access configuration Table 109 HTTPS Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/https) Command Syntax and Usage access ena|dis Enables or disables BBI access (Web access) using HTTPS. BMD00114. to accept the certificate and save the certificate to Flash to be used when the switch is rebooted. A default certificate is created when HTTPS is enabled for the first time. email address) []: info@bladenetwork.

saddress <IP address> Defines the sFlow server address. Use this menu to configure the sFlow agent on the switch.1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/sflow sFlow Configuration Menu [sFlow Menu] ena dis saddress sport port cur Enable sFlow Disable sFlow Set the sFlow Analyzer IP address Set the sFlow Analyzer port sFlow port Menu Display sFlow configuration sFlow is a sampling method used for monitoring high speed switched networks. port <port number> Configures the sFlow interface port.BLADE OS 5. dis Disables the sFlow agent. Table 110 sFlow Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sflow) Command Syntax and Usage ena Enables the sFlow agent. August 2009 . cur Displays the current sFlow configuration. 236 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. The default value is 6343. sport <1-65535> Configures the UDP port for the sFlow server.

Set the sFlow sampling rate cur . Table 111 sFlow Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sflow/port) Command Syntax and Usage polling <5-60>|0 Configures the sFlow polling interval. sampling <256-65536>|0 Configures the sFlow sampling rate. in seconds.Display sFlow port configuration Use this menu to configure the sFlow port on the switch. in packets per sample. cur Displays the current sFlow port configuration.BLADE OS 5.Set the sFlow polling interval sampling . BMD00114. The default value is 0 (disabled). The default value is 0 (disabled). August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 237 .1 Command Reference /cfg/sys/sflow/port <port number> sFlow Port Configuration Menu [sFlow Port Menu] polling .

see page 241. August 2009 . see page 243. To view menu options. oam Displays the OAM Discovery Configuration Menu. 238 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.1 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number> Port Configuration Menu [Port 1 Menu] gig udld oam aclqos stp 8021ppri pvid name rmon learn tag tagpvid floodblk brate mrate drate ena dis cur Gig Phy Menu UDLD Menu OAM Menu Acl/Qos Configuration Menu STP Menu .BLADE OS 5. To view menu options. udld Displays the Unidirectional Link Detection (UDLD) Menu. To view menu options. Lookup Fail Threshold Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Use the Port Configuration menu to configure settings for switch ports.1p priority Set default port VLAN id Set port name Enable/disable RMON for port Enable/Disable FDB Learning for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable tagging on pvid Enable/disable Port flood blocking Set BroadCast Threshold Set MultiCast Threshold Set Dest. Note – Port 19 is reserved for switch management. this option displays the Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu.for PVRST only Set default 802. see page 244. Table 112 Port Configuration Menu (/cfg/port) Command Syntax and Usage gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet.

BLADE OS 5. rmon e|d Enables or disables Remote Monitoring for the port. see page 245.1p priority level. see page 246. To view menu options. The default number is 1 for non-management ports. dscpmark Enables or disables DSCP re-marking on a port. BMD00114. the VLAN tag is removed from packets whose VLAN tag matches the port PVID.1 Command Reference Table 112 Port Configuration Menu (/cfg/port) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage aclqos Displays the ACL/QoS Configuration Menu. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. The default setting is none. and enabled for management ports. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. stp Displays the Spanning Tree Port menu. The default setting is disabled for uplink ports and enabled for downlink ports. tagpvid disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tag persistence. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 239 . pvid <VLAN number> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. RMON must be enabled for any RMON configurations to function. name <1-64 characters>|none Sets a name for the port. Note: VLAN 4095 is reserved for switch management. The default setting is disabled for uplink ports and downlink ports. 8021ppri <0-7> Configures the port’s 802. To view menu options. When disabled.

) cur Displays current port parameters.1 Command Reference Table 112 Port Configuration Menu (/cfg/port) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage fastfwd disable|enable Disables or enables Port Fast Forwarding. 240 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. mrate <0-262143>|dis Limits the number of multicast packets per second to the specified value. the port forwards all broadcast packets. dis Disables the port. if dictated by normal STG behavior (following priorities. drate <0-262143>|dis Limits the number of unknown unicast packets per second to the specified value. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes. etc. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 241.BLADE OS 5. the port forwards all unknown unicast packets. the port transitions into the Blocking state. which permits a port that participates in Spanning Tree to bypass the Listening and Learning states and enter directly into the Forwarding state. brate <0-262143>|dis Limits the number of broadcast packets per second to the specified value. This feature permits the switch to interoperate well within Rapid Spanning Tree networks. ena Enables the port. While in the Forwarding state.). If disabled (dis). If disabled (dis). the port listens to the BPDUs to learn if there is a loop and. August 2009 . If disabled (dis). the port forwards all multicast packets.

Some options are not valid on all ports. Table 113 Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port/gig) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|1000|10000|any Sets the link speed.” for auto negotiation (default) BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 241 . /cfg/port <port number>/gig Port Link Configuration Menu [Gigabit Link speed mode fctl auto cur Menu] .Set autonegotiation .Set link speed . See the “Operations Menu” on page 379 for other operations-level commands.Set flow control . The port state will revert to its original configuration when the switch is reset. The choices include: 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps 10000 Mps any (auto negotiate port speed) mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode.1 Command Reference Temporarily Disabling a Port To temporarily disable a port without changing its stored configuration attributes.Display current gig link configuration Link menu options are described in the following table.Set full or half duplex mode .BLADE OS 5. enter the following command at any prompt: Main# /oper/port <port number>/dis Because this configuration sets a temporary state for the port. The choices include: Full-duplex Half-duplex “Any. Some options are not valid on all ports. you do not need to use apply or save.

August 2009 . The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control cur Displays current port parameters. 242 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.1 Command Reference Table 113 Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port/gig) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control.BLADE OS 5.

1 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number>/udld UniDirectional Link Detection Configuration Menu [UDLD Menu] mode ena dis cur Set UDLD mode Enable UDLD Disable UDLD Display current port UDLD configuration UDLD menu options are described in the following table. BMD00114. ena Enables UDLD on the port. Aggressive: In addition to the normal mode. cur Displays current port UDLD parameters.BLADE OS 5. Table 114 Port UDLD Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port/udld) Command Syntax and Usage mode normal|aggressive Configures the UDLD mode for the selected port. the aggressive mode disables the port if the neighbor stops sending UDLD probes for 7 seconds. The port is disabled if UDLD determines that the port is mis-connected. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 243 . as follows: Normal: Detect unidirectional links that have mis-connected interfaces. dis Disables UDLD on the port.

If OAM determines that the port is in an anomalous condition. as follows: Active: This port link initiates OAM discovery. Table 115 Port OAM Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port/oam) Command Syntax and Usage ena Enables OAM discovery on the port. Passive: This port allows its peer link to initiate OAM discovery. OAM menu options are described in the following table. and Maintenance (OAM) protocol allows the switch to detect faults on the physical port links. the port is disabled. Administration. OAM is described in the IEEE 802. cur Displays current port OAM parameters.1 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number>/oam Port OAM Configuration Menu [OAM Menu] ena dis mode cur Enable OAM Discovery process Disable OAM Discovery process Set OAM mode Display current port OAM configuration Operation.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 . mode active|passive Configures the OAM discovery mode. 244 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. dis Disables OAM discovery on the port.3ah standard.

You can add multiple ACL Groups to a port. cur Displays current ACL QoS parameters.Remove ACL or ACL group from this port cur .BLADE OS 5. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 245 .Add ACL or ACL group to this port rem .Display current ACLs for this port Table 116 Port ACL Menu Options (/cfg/port/aclqos) Command Syntax and Usage add acl|grp <1-762> Adds the specified ACL or ACL Group to the port.1 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number>/aclqos Port ACL Configuration Menu [Port 2 ACL Menu] add . BMD00114. rem acl|grp <1-762> Removes the specified ACL or ACL Group from the port.

cur Displays current STP parameters for the port. or shared.Enable/disable edge port (for PVRST only) link . shared: Configures the port to connect to a shared medium (usually a hub). 246 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. as follows: auto: Configures the port to detect the link type. and automatically match its settings.Display current port stp configuration Table 117 Port STP menu options (/cfg/port/stp) Command Syntax and Usage edge e|d Enables or disables this port as an edge port. default: auto) (for PVRST only) cur .1 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number>/stp Port Spanning Tree Configuration Menu [Port 1 STP Menu] edge . p2p: Configures the port for Point-To-Point protocol. link auto|p2p|shared Defines the type of link connected to the port. August 2009 .BLADE OS 5.Set port link type (auto. and can begin forwarding traffic as soon as the link is up. An edge port is not connected to a bridge. p2p. Configure server ports as edge ports (enabled).

Table 118 Quality of Service Menu Options (/cfg/qos) Command Syntax and Usage 8021p Displays 802.802. This allows you to differentiate between various types of traffic. To view menu options. see page 248. and provide different priority levels. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 247 .1p configuration menu. BMD00114.1p priority value and DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) value of incoming packets.1 Command Reference /cfg/qos Quality of Service Configuration Menu [QOS Menu] 8021p .1p Menu Use the Quality of Service (QoS) menus to configure the 802.BLADE OS 5.

Table 119 802. The packets with a higher (non-zero) priority bits are given forwarding preference over packets with numerically lower priority bits value. qweight <COSq number> <weight (0-15)> Configures the weight of the selected Class of Service queue (COSq). Enter the COSq number.1p priority value (0-7).1p Configuration Menu [802. The valid range of the COSq number is set using the numcos command. Enter the 802.1 Command Reference /cfg/qos/8021p 802. followed by the scheduling weight (0-15). cur Displays the current 802.1p bits in the packet's VLAN header.1p configuration to default values Display current 802.1p bits specify the priority that you should give to the packets while forwarding them. default [priq] [qweight] Re-sets the selected parameters to their default values. August 2009 .1p parameters.1p Menu] priq qweight default cur Set priority to COS queue mapping Set weight to a COS queue Reset 802.1p Menu Options (/cfg/qos/8021p) Command Syntax and Usage priq <priority (0-7)> <COSq number> Maps the 802. The 802. followed by the COSq that handles the matching traffic.BLADE OS 5. 248 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.1p configuration This feature provides the capability to filter IP packets based on the 802.1p priority to the Class of Service queue (COSq) priority.

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference /cfg/acl Access Control List Configuration Menu [ACL Menu] acl group cur . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 249 .Access Control List Group Config Menu . see page 262. Table 120 ACL Menu Options (/cfg/acl) Command Syntax and Usage acl <1-762> Displays Access Control List configuration menu. BMD00114. To view menu options.Access Control List Item Config Menu . group <1-762> Displays ACL Group configuration menu. see page 250. ACLs define matching criteria used for IP filtering and Quality of Service functions.Display current ACL configuration Use this menu to create Access Control Lists (ACLs) and ACL Groups. cur Displays the current ACL parameters. To view menu options.

1 Command Reference /cfg/acl/acl <ACL number> ACL Configuration Menu [ACL 1 Menu] ethernet ipv4 tcpudp meter re-mark pktfmt egrport action stats reset cur Ethernet Header Options Menu IP Header Options Menu TCP/UDP Header Options Menu ACL Metering Configuration Menu ACL Re-mark Configuration Menu Set to filter specific packet format types Set to filter for packets egressing this port Set filter action Enable/disable statistics for this acl Reset filtering parameters Display current filter configuration These menus allow you to define filtering criteria for each Access Control List (ACL). To view menu options.BLADE OS 5. see page 255. see page 252. see page 256. To view menu options. To view menu options. tcpudp Displays the ACL TCP/UDP Header menu. egrport <port number> Configures the ACL to function on egress packets. meter Displays the ACL Metering menu. ipv4 Displays the ACL IP Header menu. August 2009 . re-mark Displays the ACL Re-mark menu. To view menu options. see page 253. To view menu options. Table 121 ACL Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x) Command Syntax and Usage ethernet Displays the ACL Ethernet Header menu. 250 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. pktfmt <packet format> Displays the ACL Packet Format menu. To view menu options. see page 261. see page 258.

BMD00114. stats e|d Enables or disables the statistics collection for the Access Control List. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 251 . reset Resets the ACL parameters to their default values. cur Displays the current ACL parameters. You can choose to permit (pass) or deny (drop) packets. or set the 802.BLADE OS 5.1p priority level (0-7).1 Command Reference Table 121 ACL Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage action permit|deny|setprio <0-7> Configures a filter action for packets that match the ACL definitions.

1 Command Reference /cfg/acl/acl <ACL number>/ethernet Ethernet Filtering Configuration Menu smac dmac vlan etype pri reset cur Set to filter on source MAC Set to filter on destination MAC Set to filter on VLAN ID Set to filter on ethernet type Set to filter on priority Reset all fields Display current parameters This menu allows you to define Ethernet matching criteria for an ACL. Table 122 Ethernet Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/ethernet) Command Syntax and Usage smac <MAC address (such as 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> <mask (FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF)> Defines the source MAC address for this ACL. reset Resets Ethernet parameters for the ACL to their default values. cur Displays the current Ethernet parameters for the ACL.BLADE OS 5. 252 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. dmac <MAC address (such as 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> <mask (FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF)> Defines the destination MAC address for this ACL. pri <0-7> Defines the Ethernet priority value for the ACL. vlan <VLAN number> <VLAN mask (0xfff)> Defines a VLAN number and mask for this ACL. August 2009 . etype ARP|IP|IPv6|MPLS|RARP|any|<other (0xXXXX)> Defines the Ethernet type for this ACL.

Reset all fields cur . refer to RFC 1340 and 1349. proto <0-255> Defines an IP protocol for the ACL. traffic with this destination IP address will match this ACL.Set to filter on source IP address dip . traffic with this source IP address will match this ACL.Display current parameters This menu allows you to define IPv4 matching criteria for an ACL.BLADE OS 5. For more information on ToS.255. If defined.0)> Defines a source IP address for the ACL.Set to filter on prototype tos . Specify the protocol number. Listed below are some of the well-known protocols.Set to filter on TOS reset . If defined.Set to filter on destination IP address proto . If defined. Number Name 1 2 6 17 89 112 tos <0-255> Defines a Type of Service (ToS) value for the ACL. traffic from the specified protocol matches this filter.255. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation.255. Table 123 IP version 4 Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/ipv4) Command Syntax and Usage sip <IP address> <mask (such as 255. icmp igmp tcp udp ospf vrrp BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 253 .255. dip <IP address> <mask (such as 255.1 Command Reference /cfg/acl/acl <ACL number>/ipv4 IP version 4 Filtering Configuration Menu [Filtering IPv4 Menu] sip .0)> Defines a destination IP address for the ACL.

254 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. August 2009 . cur Displays the current IPV4 parameters.1 Command Reference Table 123 IP version 4 Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/ipv4) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage reset Resets the IPv4 parameters for the ACL to their default values.BLADE OS 5.

Reset all fields cur .Set to filter on TCP/UDP source port dport . BMD00114.Set to filter TCP/UDP flags reset . traffic with the specified TCP or UDP destination port will match this ACL. Specify the port number.BLADE OS 5.Display current parameters This menu allows you to define TCP/UDP matching criteria for an ACL. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 255 . traffic with the specified TCP or UDP source port will match this ACL. Table 124 TCP/UDP Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/tcpudp) Command Syntax and Usage sport <source port (1-65535)> <mask (0xFFFF)> Defines a source port for the ACL. Specify the port number. If defined.1 Command Reference /cfg/acl/acl <ACL number>/tcpudp TCP/UDP Filtering Configuration Menu [Filtering TCP/UDP Menu] sport . Listed below are some of the well-known ports: Number Name 20 21 22 23 25 37 42 43 53 69 70 79 80 ftp-data ftp ssh telnet smtp time name whois domain tftp gopher finger http dport <destination port (1-65535)> <mask (0xFFFF)> Defines a destination port for the ACL.Set to filter on TCP/UDP destination port flags . If defined. flags <value (0x0-0x3f)> Defines a TCP/UDP flag for the ACL. just as with sport above.

512. mbsize <32-4096> Configures the maximum burst size. Table 125 ACL Metering Menu Options (/cfg/ac/acl x/meter) Command Syntax and Usage cir <64-10000000> Configures the committed rate. in Kilobits. Enter one of the following values for mbsize: 32. dpass drop|pass Configures the ACL Meter to either drop or pass out-of-profile traffic. /cfg/acl/acl <ACL number>/meter ACL Metering Configuration Menu [Metering Menu] cir mbsize enable dpass reset cur Set committed rate in KiloBits/s Set maximum burst size in KiloBits Enable/disable port metering Set to Drop or Pass out of profile traffic Reset meter parameters Display current settings This menu defines the metering profile for the selected ACL.BLADE OS 5. in Kilobits per second. 2048. 4096 enable e|d Enables or disables metering on the ACL.1 Command Reference Table 124 TCP/UDP Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/tcpudp) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage reset Resets the TCP/UDP parameters for the ACL to their default values. 128. August 2009 . 64. The committed rate must be a multiple of 64. 1024. 256 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. 256. cur Displays the current TCP/UDP Filtering parameters.

1 Command Reference Table 125 ACL Metering Menu Options (/cfg/ac/acl x/meter) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage reset Reset ACL Metering parameters to their default values. BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 257 . cur Displays current ACL Metering parameters.BLADE OS 5.

August 2009 . or out of the ACL Metering profile. cur Displays current Re-mark parameters. To view menu options. see page 259. To view menu options. based on whether packets fall within the ACL Metering profile. up1p Displays the Update User Priority Menu.1 Command Reference /cfg/acl/acl <ACL number>/re-mark Re-Mark Configuration Menu [Re-mark Menu] inprof outprof up1p reset cur In Profile Menu Out Profile Menu Set Update User Priority Menu Reset re-mark settings Display current settings You can choose to re-mark IP header data for the selected ACL. see page 259.BLADE OS 5. outprof Displays the Re-mark Out-of-Profile Menu. You can configure different re-mark values. see page 259. 258 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. Table 126 ACL Re-mark Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/re-mark) Command Syntax and Usage inprof Displays the Re-mark In-Profile Menu. reset Reset ACL Re-mark parameters to their default values. To view menu options.

Set the update DSCP reset .Reset update DSCP settings cur . The switch sets the DSCP value on Out-of-Profile packets. cur Displays current Re-Mark Out-of-Profile parameters.Out Of Profile Menu] updscp . reset Resets the update DSCP parameters to their default values. cur Displays current Re-Mark In-Profile parameters.Set the update DSCP reset .Display current settings Table 127 ACL Re-Mark In-Profile Menu (/cfg/acl/acl x/re-mark/inprof) Command Syntax and Usage updscp <0-63> Sets the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) of In-Profile packets to the selected value.Display current settings Table 128 ACL Re-Mark Out-of-Profile Menu (/cfg/acl/acl x/re-mark/outprof) Command Syntax and Usage updscp <0-63> Sets the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) of Out-of-Profile packets to the selected value. /cfg/acl/acl <ACL number>/re-mark/outprof Re-Mark Out-of-Profile Configuration Menu [Re-marking . BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 259 .reset update DSCP setting cur .In Profile Menu] updscp .1 Command Reference /cfg/acl/acl <ACL number>/re-mark/inprof Re-Mark In-Profile Configuration Menu [Re-marking . reset Resets the update DSCP parameters for Out-of-Profile packets to their default values.BLADE OS 5.

1p value.Reset in profile up1p settings cur . August 2009 .BLADE OS 5.1p value. the TOS value is used to set the 802. cur Displays current Re-Mark In-Profile User Priority parameters. utosp enable|disable Enable or disable mapping of TOS (Type of Service) priority to 802.Enable/Disable use of TOS precedence reset .Display current settings Table 129 ACL Re-Mark User Priority Menu (/cfg/acl/acl x/re-mark/up1p) Command Syntax and Usage value <0-7> Defines the 802.Set the update user priority utosp . When enabled. reset Resets UP1P settings to their default values.1 Command Reference /cfg/acl/acl <ACL number>/re-mark/up1p Re-mark Update User Priority Configuration Menu [Update User Priority Menu] value . 260 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.1p priority. The value is the priority bits information in the packet structure.

Table 130 ACL Packet Format Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/pktfmt) Command Syntax and Usage ethfmt eth2|SNAP|LLC Defines the Ethernet format for the ACL.Display current parameters This menu allows you to define Packet Format matching criteria for an ACL.Reset all fields cur . cur Displays the current Packet Format parameters for the ACL.Set to filter on IP format reset . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 261 . reset Resets Packet Format parameters for the ACL to their default values.Set to filter on ethernet format tagfmt .1 Command Reference /cfg/acl/acl <ACL number>/pktfmt Packet Format Filtering Configuration Menu [Filtering Packet Format Menu] ethfmt .Set to filter on ethernet tagging format ipfmt . BMD00114. tagfmt none|tagged Defines the tagging format for the ACL.BLADE OS 5. ipfmt none|v4|v6 Defines the IP format for the ACL.

cur Displays the current ACL group parameters.Display current ACL items in ACL group This menu allows you to compile one or more ACLs into an ACL Group. rem acl <1-762> Removes the selected ACL from the ACL Group.Remove ACL from group cur . you can assign the ACL Group to one or more ports.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 .Add ACL to group rem . Table 131 ACL Group Menu Options (/cfg/acl/group x) Command Syntax and Usage add acl <1-762> Adds the selected ACL to the ACL Group. 262 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. Once you create an ACL Group.1 Command Reference /cfg/acl/group <ACL Group number> ACL Group Configuration Menu [ACL Group 1 Menu] add .

network packets being sent and/or received on a target port are duplicated and sent to a monitor port. cur Displays current settings of the mirrored and monitoring ports. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 263 . enable. you can collect detailed information about your network performance and usage. BMD00114. and disable the monitored port. For more information about port mirroring on the switch. see “Appendix A: Troubleshooting” in the BLADE OS Application Guide. Note – Traffic on VLAN 4095 is not mirrored to the uplink ports.1 Command Reference /cfg/pmirr Port Mirroring [Port Mirroring mirror monport cur Menu] Enable/Disable Mirroring Monitoring Port based PM Menu Display All Mirrored and Monitoring Ports Port mirroring is disabled by default.BLADE OS 5. see page 264. Table 132 Port Mirroring Menu Options (/cfg/pmirr) Command Syntax and Usage mirror disable|enable Enables or disables port mirroring monport <port number> Displays port-mirroring menu. When enabled. To view menu options. The Port Mirroring Menu is used to configure. By attaching a network analyzer to the monitor port.

cur Displays the current settings of the monitoring port. August 2009 . the frame is sent to the monitoring port. or both)> Adds the port to be mirrored. If the destination port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is egress or both. out. the frame is sent to the monitoring port. rem <mirrored port (port to mirror from)> Removes the mirrored port.BLADE OS 5. It is necessary to specify the direction because: If the source port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is ingress or both (ingress and egress). 264 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. delete Deletes this monitor port. This command also allows you to enter the direction of the traffic.1 Command Reference /cfg/pmirr/monport Port-Mirroring Configuration Menu [Port 1 Menu] add rem delete cur Add "Mirrored" port Rem "Mirrored" port Delete this "Monitor" port Display current Port-based Port Mirroring configuration Table 133 Port Mirroring Monitor Port Menu Options (/cfg/pmirr/monport) Command Syntax and Usage add <mirrored port (port to mirror from)> <direction (in.

see page 288.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2 Layer 2 Configuration Menu [Layer 2 Menu] 8021x mrst stp fdb lldp trunk thash lacp failovr hotlink vlan pvstcomp bpdugrd upfast update cur 802. see page 273. To view menu options.1X Configuration Menu. trunk <trunk group number (1-12)> Displays the Trunk Group Configuration Menu. lldp Displays the LLDP Menu. see page 293. To view menu options.1x Menu Multiple Spanning Tree/Rapid Spanning Tree Menu Spanning Tree Menu FDB Menu LLDP Menu Trunk Group Menu IP Trunk Hash Menu Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu Failover Menu Hot Links Menu VLAN Menu Enable/disable PVST+ compatibility mode Enable/disable BPDU Guard Enable/disable Uplink Fast UplinkFast station update rate Display current layer 2 parameters Table 134 Layer 2 Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2) Command Syntax and Usage 8021x Displays the 802. stp <STG number (1-128)> Displays the Spanning Tree Configuration Menu. see page 279. To view menu options. To view menu options. To view menu options.BLADE OS 5. fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Menu. see page 285. To view menu options. BMD00114. mrst Displays the Rapid Spanning Tree/Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Configuration Menu. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 265 . see page 267.

lacp Displays the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu. see page 304. bpdugrd enable|disable Enables or disables BPDU guard. upfast enable|disable Enables or disables Fast Uplink Convergence. see page 296. 266 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. this feature increases bridge priorities to 65535 for all STGs and path cost by 3000 for all external STP ports. failovr Displays the Failover Configuration Menu. To view menu options. The default setting is enabled. cur Displays current Layer 2 parameters. see page 294. The default value is 40. August 2009 . To view menu options. Note: When enabled. see page 298. update <10-200> Configures the station update rate. to avoid spanning-tree loops on ports with Port Fast Forwarding enabled (/cfg/port x/fastfwd ena).BLADE OS 5. To view menu options. pvstcomp enable|disable Enables or disables VLAN tagging of spanning tree BPDUs. which provides rapid Spanning Tree convergence to an upstream switch during failover.1 Command Reference Table 134 Layer 2 Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage thash Displays the IP Trunk Hash Menu. To view menu options. To view menu options. see page 308. hotlink Displays the Hot Links Configuration menu. vlan <VLAN number (1-4095)> Displays the VLAN Configuration Menu.

1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/8021x 802.1X Configuration Menu [802.1X.1x configuration This feature allows you to configure the switch as an IEEE 802.1X Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/8021x) Command Syntax and Usage global Displays the global 802. see page 268. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 267 . To view menu options.1X Authenticator.1X Port Menu.Port 802. Table 135 802.Global 802.Disable 802.1x access control cur . cur Displays current 802. BMD00114.1x Configuration Menu] global .Enable 802. to provide port-based network access control.Show 802. see page 271.BLADE OS 5. port <port number> Displays the 802.1x configuration menu port .1X Configuration Menu. To view menu options. dis Globally disables 802.1x configuration menu ena . ena Globally enables 802.1x access control dis .1X parameters.1X.

1X Global Configuration Menu [802.Set max number of EAP-Request retransmissions raperiod .1X Guest VLAN Configuration Menu. The default value is 60 seconds.Set reauthentication time interval reauth . allowing all traffic.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/8021x/global 802.1X configuration The global 802.1X Guest VLAN configuration menu mode . in seconds. To view menu options.BLADE OS 5. The default value is 30 seconds.Set access control mode qtperiod . Table 136 802. the authenticator waits before transmitting an EAP-Request/ Identity frame to the supplicant (client) after an authentication failure in the previous round of authentication.1X configuration cur . the authenticator waits for an EAP-Response/Identity frame from the supplicant (client) before retransmitting an EAP-Request/Identity frame. force-auth: the port is authorized unconditionally.1X Global Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/8021x/global) Command Syntax and Usage gvlan Displays the 802. The default value is force-auth. August 2009 .Set EAP-Request retransmission timeout svrtmout .1X menu allows you to configure parameters that affect all switch ports (except the management port). txperiod <1-65535> Sets the time. 268 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.Set reauthentication status to on or off default .1X Global Configuration Menu] gvlan . qtperiod <0-65535> Sets the time.Set EAP-Request/Identity quiet time interval txperiod .802.Restore default 802.Display current 802.Set EAP-Request/Identity retransmission timeout suptmout .Set server authentication request timeout maxreq . in seconds. mode force-unauth|auto|force-auth Sets the type of access control for all ports: force-unauth: the port is unauthorized unconditionally. auto: the port is unauthorized until it is successfully authorized by the RADIUS server. see page 270.

The default value is 3600 seconds. in seconds. the authenticator waits for a response from the RADIUS server before declaring an authentication timeout. BMD00114. cur Displays current global 802. maxreq <1-10> Sets the maximum number of times the authenticator retransmits an EAP-Request packet to the supplicant (client). The default value is off.1X parameters. reauth on|off Sets the re-authentication status to on or off. The default value is 30 seconds.BLADE OS 5. The default value is 2. The default value is 30 seconds.1X parameters to their default values. the authenticator waits before re-authenticating a supplicant (client) when periodic re-authentication is enabled. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 269 .1X Global Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/8021x/global) Command Syntax and Usage suptmout <1-65535> Sets the time. in seconds. The time interval between transmissions of the RADIUS Access-Request packet containing the supplicant’s (client’s) EAP-Response packet is determined by the current setting of /cfg/sys/radius/timeout (default is 3 seconds). the authenticator waits for an EAP-Response packet from the supplicant (client) before retransmitting the EAP-Request packet to the authentication server. default Resets the global 802. raperiod <1-604800> Sets the time.1 Command Reference Table 136 802. in seconds. svrtmout <1-65535> Sets the time.

1X Guest VLAN. Table 137 802. August 2009 .x Guest VLAN .1X Guest VLAN menu allows you to configure a Guest VLAN for unauthenticated ports.BLADE OS 5. ena Enables the 802.1X Guest vlan ena dis cur VLAN Configuration Menu] .Disable 8021. 270 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. The Guest VLAN provides limited access to switch functions.Set 8021.x Guest VLAN number .1X Guest VLAN Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/8021x/global/gvlan) Command Syntax and Usage vlan <VLAN number> Configures the Guest VLAN number. dis Disables the 802. cur Displays current 802.1X Guest VLAN.1X Guest VLAN parameters.Display current Guest VLAN configuration The 802.1X Guest VLAN Configuration Menu [802.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/8021x/global/gvlan 802.xGuest VLAN .Enable 8021.

allowing all traffic.Set server authentication request timeout . Table 138 802.1X configuration to this port . the authenticator waits for an EAP-Response/Identity frame from the supplicant (client) before retransmitting an EAP-Request/Identity frame.1X port menu allows you to configure parameters that affect the selected port in the switch. the authenticator waits before transmitting an EAP-Request/ Identity frame to the supplicant (client) after an authentication failure in the previous round of authentication.1X configuration The 802.Display current 802.1X Port mode qtperiod txperiod suptmout svrtmout maxreq raperiod reauth default global cur Configuration Menu] .Set max number of EAP-Request retransmissions .1X Port Configuration Menu [802. the authenticator waits for an EAP-Response packet from the supplicant (client) before retransmitting the EAP-Request packet to the authentication server.the port is authorized unconditionally.Set EAP-Request/Identity quiet time interval . txperiod <1-65535> Sets the time.Set EAP-Request retransmission timeout . These settings override the global 802.the port is unauthorized unconditionally. force-auth . in seconds.1X configuration .the port is unauthorized until it is successfully authorized by the RADIUS server. in seconds.1X parameters.Apply current global 802. BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 271 . qtperiod <0-65535> Sets the time.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/8021x/port <port number> 802.BLADE OS 5.1X Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/8021x/port) Command Syntax and Usage mode force-unauth|auto|force-auth Sets the type of access control for the port: force-unauth .Set reauthentication status to on or off .Restore default 802.Set access control mode . The default value is 30 seconds.Set EAP-Request/Identity retransmission timeout . suptmout <1-65535> Sets the time. The default value is 60 seconds. in seconds. The default value is force-auth. The default value is 30 seconds. auto .Set reauthentication time interval .

August 2009 .BLADE OS 5. The default value is 30 seconds. The default value is off. cur Displays current 802. The default value is 2. reauth on|off Sets the re-authentication status to on or off. raperiod <1-604800> Sets the time. The time interval between transmissions of the RADIUS Access-Request packet containing the supplicant’s (client’s) EAP-Response packet is determined by the current setting of /cfg/sys/radius/timeout (default is 3 seconds). in seconds.1 Command Reference Table 138 802. the authenticator waits before re-authenticating a supplicant (client) when periodic re-authentication is enabled. maxreq <1-10> Sets the maximum number of times the authenticator retransmits an EAP-Request packet to the supplicant (client). default Resets the 802. the authenticator waits for a response from the RADIUS server before declaring an authentication timeout.1X port parameters. 272 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. global Applies current global 802. The default value is 3600 seconds.1X Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/8021x/port) Command Syntax and Usage svrtmout <1-65535> Sets the time.1X configuration parameters to the port.1X port parameters to their default values. in seconds.

Set Maximum Hop Count for MST (4 .Common and Internal Spanning Tree menu name .1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP). Table 139 MSTP/RSTP/PVRST Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst) Command Syntax and Usage cist Displays the Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) Menu. The version is used as a numerical identifier for the region. and Per VLAN Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (PVRST). BMD00114.Set revision level of this MST region maxhop .60) mode .Spanning Tree Mode on .BLADE OS 5. All devices within a MSTP region must have the same region name.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP). VLAN 4095 is moved back to STG 128. rev <0-65535> Configures a version number for the MSTP region. each with its own topology.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/mrst RSTP/MSTP Configuration Menu [Multiple Spanning Tree Menu] cist .Set MST region name rev . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 273 . The default is 20. see page 275. maxhop <4-60> Configures the maximum number of bridge hops a packet may traverse before it is dropped. To view menu options. VLAN 4095 is moved from STG 128 to the Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST). name <1-32 characters> Configures a name for the MSTP region. When Multiple Spanning Tree is turned off. MSTP allows you to map many VLANs to a small number of Spanning Tree Groups (STGs). Note – When Multiple Spanning Tree is turned on. IEEE 802. MRST is turned off by default.Display current MST parameters BLADE OS supports the IEEE 802. All devices within a MSTP region must have the same version number.Globally turn Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP/RSTP/PVRST) ON off . Up to 32 Spanning Tree Groups can be configured in mstp mode.Globally turn Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP/RSTP/PVRST) OFF cur .

then select mstp mode. as specified by IEEE 802.1s MSTP supports rapid convergence. As a result.BLADE OS 5.HP PVRST is interoperable with Cisco Rapid PVST+.HP PVST+ (default Spanning Tree setting) is interoperable with Cisco Rapid PVST+ only in fallback mode: Cisco will fall back to legacy PVST+ when detecting PVST+ BPDUs by default. August 2009 . Multiple Spanning Tree (mstp).1w standard-based RSTP implementation runs on one STG (i.HP PVST+ (default Spanning Tree setting) is interoperable with Cisco PVST+.e. IEEE 802. Rapid Spanning Tree (rstp). 274 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. . Note: When RSTP is turned on. .1s standard-based MSTP implementation.1 Command Reference Table 139 MSTP/RSTP/PVRST Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst) Command Syntax and Usage mode rstp|mstp|pvrst Selects the Spanning Tree mode. Note – The following configurations are unsupported or have limitations: . on Globally turns RSTP/MSTP/PVRST ON. then only a single RSTP instance (default for STG 1) is supported for all VLANs. The following configurations are supported: . IEEE 802. same as one Spanning-Tree instance) only. as follows: Per VLAN Rapid Spanning Tree Plus (pvrst).1w RSTP. if rstp mode is selected. including the default VLAN 1. The default mode is RSTP. cur Displays the current RSTP/MSTP/PVRST configuration. using IEEE 802.HP MSTP/RSTP (with mode set to mstp) is interoperable with Cisco MST/RSTP. .HP MSTP/RSTP (with mode set to either ‘mstp’ or ‘rstp’) is NOT interoperable with Cisco Rapid PVST+. If multiple Spanning-Tree instances are required. so that multiple VLANs are handled by multiple Spanning-Tree instances. the configuration parameters for STG 1 apply to RSTP. off Globally turns RSTP/MSTP/PVRST OFF. PVST+ does not support rapid convergence in current versions.

Display current CIST parameters Table 140 describes the commands used to configure Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) parameters. It is equivalent to Spanning Tree Group 0.CIST Bridge parameter menu port . see page 277.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/mrst/cist Common Internal Spanning Tree Configuration Menu [Common Internal Spanning Tree Menu] brg . To view menu options. To view menu options. see page 276. default Resets all CIST parameters to their default values.CIST Port parameter menu add .BLADE OS 5. The CIST provides compatibility with different MSTP regions and with devices running different Spanning Tree instances. cur Displays the current CIST configuration. BMD00114.Default Common Internal Spanning Tree and Member parameters cur .Add VLAN(s) to CIST default . add <VLAN numbers> Adds selected VLANs to the CIST. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 275 . port <port number> Displays the CIST Port Menu. Table 140 CIST Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst/cist) Command Syntax and Usage brg Displays the CIST Bridge Menu.

Set CIST bridge mxage . The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network is the MSTP root bridge.Set CIST bridge cur . the higher the bridge priority. and the default is 15 seconds.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/mrst/cist/brg CIST Bridge Configuration Menu [CIST Bridge Menu] prior ..). The lower the value. The maximum age parameter specifies the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigures the MSTP network. configure the bridge priority lower than all other switches and bridges on your network. August 2009 . The range is 0 to 65535. The range is 4 to 30 seconds.Display current Priority (0-65535) Max Age (6-40 secs) Forward Delay (4-30 secs) CIST bridge parameters CIST bridge parameters are used only when the switch is in MSTP mode.. The forward delay parameter specifies the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the listening state to the learning state and from the learning state to the forwarding state. Table 141 CIST Bridge Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst/cist/brg) Command Syntax and Usage prior <0-65535> Configures the CIST bridge priority. The default value is 61440. cur Displays the current CIST bridge configuration.Set CIST bridge fwd . in steps of 4096 (0. fwd <4-30 seconds> Configures the CIST bridge forward delay parameter. CIST parameters do not affect operation of STP/PVST+. mxage <6-40 seconds> Configures the CIST bridge maximum age. 4096. The range is 6 to 40 seconds. 8192.BLADE OS 5. 276 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. and the default is 20 seconds. To make this switch the root bridge.

RSTP/MSTP is turned on by default. Table 142 CIST Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst/cist/port) Command Syntax and Usage prior <0-240> Configures the CIST port priority. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment. 16. The port priority helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. The range is 0 to 240. 32. hello <1-10 seconds> Configures the CIST port Hello time. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 277 . and is calculated as follows: 100Mbps = 200000 1Gbps = 20000 10Gbps = 2000 The default value of 0 (zero) indicates that the default path cost will be computed for an auto negotiated link speed. or PVRST. default: auto) (for MSTP only) Enable/disable edge port (for MSTP only) Turn port's Spanning Tree ON Turn port's Spanning Tree OFF Display current port Spanning Tree parameters CIST port parameters are used to modify MRST operation on an individual port basis. RSTP. the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment.The Hello time specifies how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). and the default is 128. p2p. For each port. or shared.). BMD00114.BLADE OS 5.. and the default is 2 seconds. Port path cost is based on the port speed. Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge Hello value..1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/mrst/cist/port <port number> CIST Port Configuration Menu [CIST Port prior cost hello link edge on off cur 1 Menu] Set port Priority (0-240) Set port Path Cost (1-200000000. The range is 1 to 10 seconds. The port path cost is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. 0 for auto) Set CIST port Hello Time (1-10 secs) Set MSTP link type (auto. in steps of 16 (0. CIST parameters do not affect operation of STP/PVST+. cost <0-200000000> Configures the CIST port path cost.

An edge port is not connected to a bridge. The default setting is disabled. Configure server ports as edge ports (enabled). p2p: Configures the port for Point-To-Point protocol. edge disable|enable Enables or disables this port as an edge port. Note: After you configure the port as an edge port. The default link type is auto. and can begin forwarding traffic as soon as the link is up. shared: Configures the port to connect to a shared medium (usually a hub). cur Displays the current CIST port configuration. on Enables MRST on the port. you must disable the port (/oper/port x/dis) and then re-enable the port (/oper/port x/ena) for the change to take effect.1 Command Reference Table 142 CIST Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst/cist/port) Command Syntax and Usage link [auto|p2p|shared] Defines the type of link connected to the port. off Disables MRST on the port. August 2009 . and automatically match its settings. as follows: auto: Configures the port to detect the link type.BLADE OS 5. 278 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.

remove <VLAN number> Breaks the association between a VLAN and a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/stp <STP group index> Spanning Tree Configuration Menu [Spanning Tree Group 1 Menu] brg .Remove all VLANs from Spanning Tree Group on . Table 143 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/stg) Command Syntax and Usage brg Displays the Bridge Spanning Tree Menu.Bridge parameter menu port . BMD00114. Note – When RSTP is turned on.Display current bridge parameters BLADE OS supports the IEEE 802. on Globally enables Spanning Tree Protocol.Add VLAN(s) to Spanning Tree Group remove . To view menu options.1D Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). To view menu options. see page 281. only STG 1 can be configured.BLADE OS 5. clear Removes all VLANs from a spanning tree. STP is used to prevent loops in the network topology. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 279 . add <VLAN number> Associates a VLAN with a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter.Default Spanning Tree and Member parameters cur .Globally turn Spanning Tree ON off . STG is turned on by default.Port parameter menu add . port <port number> Displays the Spanning Tree Port Menu. Up to 128 Spanning Tree Groups can be configured on the switch (STG 128 is reserved for management).Remove VLAN(s) from Spanning Tree Group clear .Globally turn Spanning Tree OFF default . see page 283.

BLADE OS 5. default Restores a spanning tree instance to its default configuration. August 2009 .1 Command Reference Table 143 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/stg) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage off Globally disables Spanning Tree Protocol. cur Displays current Spanning Tree Protocol parameters. 280 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.

mxage <new bridge max age (6-40 secs)> Configures the bridge maximum age.The hello time specifies how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). The default value is 65534. The maximum age parameter specifies the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it re configures the STG network..Set bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs) aging . This command does not apply to MSTP (see CIST on page 275). Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value. hello <new bridge hello time (1-10 secs)> Configures the bridge hello time. To make this switch the root bridge.Set bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/stp <STP group number>/brg Spanning Tree Bridge Configuration Menu [Bridge Spanning Tree Menu] prior . The lower the value. This command does not apply to MSTP (see CIST on page 275).Display current bridge parameters Spanning Tree bridge parameters affect the global STG operation of the switch. BMD00114.Set bridge Hello Time [1-10 secs] mxage . in steps of 4096 (0. RSTP/MSTP: The range is 0 to 61440.Set bridge Priority [0-65535] hello . configure the bridge priority lower than all other switches and bridges on your network.Set bridge Max Age (6-40 secs) fwd . The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network is the STG root bridge. STG bridge parameters include: Bridge priority Bridge hello time Bridge maximum age Forwarding delay Table 144 Spanning Tree Bridge Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stg/brg) Command Syntax and Usage prior <new bridge priority (0-65535)> Configures the bridge priority. The range is 1 to 10 seconds. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 281 . 4096. and the default is 61440. 0 to disable) cur . and the default is 20 seconds. and the default is 2 seconds.). 8192.. the higher the bridge priority.BLADE OS 5. The range is 6 to 40 seconds.

The range is 4 to 30 seconds. the following formulas must be used: 2*(fwd-1) > mxage 2*(hello+1) < mxage 282 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. cur Displays the current bridge STG parameters. When configuring STG bridge parameters. August 2009 .BLADE OS 5. The forward delay parameter specifies the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the listening state to the learning state and from the learning state to the forwarding state. This command does not apply to MSTP (see CIST on page 275). and the default is 15 seconds.1 Command Reference Table 144 Spanning Tree Bridge Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stg/brg) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage fwd <new bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs)> Configures the bridge forward delay parameter.

The default value is 128.Display current port Spanning Tree parameters By default for STP/PVST+. default: auto) edge .Enable/disable edge port on .. STG port parameters include: Port priority Port path cost The port option of STG is turned on by default.BLADE OS 5. By default for RSTP/MSTP. Port path cost is based on the port speed. 0 for default)> Configures the port path cost. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment. and turned on for uplink ports.) and the default is 128. BMD00114. and is calculated as follows: 100Mbps = 19 1Gbps = 4 10Gbps = 2 The default value of 0 (zero) indicates that the default path cost will be computed for an auto negotiated link speed. The port priority helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port.Set port Priority (0-255) cost . Spanning Tree is turned off for downlink ports and management ports..Turn port's Spanning Tree ON off . with downlink ports configured as edge ports. RSTP/MSTP: The range is 0 to 240. in steps of 16 (0. Spanning Tree is turned off for downlink ports and management ports. and turned on for cross-connect ports and uplink ports.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/stp <STP Group Index>/port <port number> Spanning Tree Port Configuration Menu [Spanning Tree Port 1 Menu] prior . cost <1-65535.1D) / 1-200000000 (MSTP/RSTP) /0 for auto) link .Turn port's Spanning Tree OFF cur . The port path cost is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. 16. p2p.Set port Path Cost (1-65535 (802. the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. or shared. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 283 . Table 145 Spanning Tree Port Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stg/port) Command Syntax and Usage prior <port priority (0-255)> Configures the port priority. 32.Set port link type (auto.

The default link type is auto. August 2009 . as follows: auto: Configures the port to detect the link type. edge disable|enable Enables or disables this port as an edge port. off Disables STG on the port. Configure server ports as edge ports (enabled). p2p: Configures the port for Point-To-Point protocol. cur Displays the current STG port parameters. and can begin forwarding traffic as soon as the link is up. An edge port is not connected to a bridge. and automatically match its settings. on Enables STG on the port.1 Command Reference Table 145 Spanning Tree Port Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stg/port) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage link [auto|p2p|shared] Defines the type of link connected to the port.BLADE OS 5. shared: Configures the port to connect to a shared medium (usually a hub). 284 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.

August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 285 . cur Displays the current FDB parameters. see page 287. The default value is 300. Table 146 FDB Menu Options (/cfg/l2/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage mcast Displays the static Multicast menu. To view menu options. see page 286. in seconds. static Displays the static FDB menu. BMD00114. To view menu options. aging <0-65535> Configures the aging value for FDB entries.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/fdb Forwarding Database Configuration Menu [FDB Menu] mcast static aging cur Static Multicast Menu Static FDB Menu Configure FDB aging value Display current FDB configuration Use the following commands to configure the Forwarding Database (FDB).BLADE OS 5.

You can list ports separated by a space.Add a Multicast Address entry del . Known multicast packets are forwarded only to those ports specified. Use the following commands to configure static Multicast MAC entries in the Forwarding Database (FDB). Enable Flood Blocking on ports that are not to receive multicast packets (/cfg/port x/floodblk ena).1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/fdb/mcast Static Multicast MAC Configuration Menu [Static Multicast Menu] add . Known multicast packets are forwarded only to those ports specified.Delete a Multicast Address entry clear . or enter a range of ports separated by a hyphen ( .BLADE OS 5.Display current Multicast Address configuration The following options are available to control the forwarding of known and unknown multicast packets: All multicast packets are flooded to the entire VLAN. Table 147 Static Multicast MAC Menu Options (/cfg/l2/fdb/mcast) Command Syntax and Usage add <MAC address> <VLAN number> <port number Adds a static multicast entry. This is the default switch behavior.Clear all Multicast Address entries cur . 286 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. Unknown multicast packets are flooded to the entire VLAN. To configure this option: Define the Multicast MAC address for the VLAN and specify ports that are to receive multicast packets (/cfg/l2/fdb/mcast/add). August 2009 . Unknown multicast packets are dropped.). define the Multicast MAC address for the VLAN and specify ports that are to receive multicast packets (/cfg/l2/fdb/mcast/add). For example: add 01:00:00:23:3f:01 200 int1-int4 del <MAC address> <VLAN number> <port number> Deletes a static multicast entry. To configure this option.

cur Display current static FDB configuration. BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. /cfg/l2/fdb/static Static FDB Configuration Menu [Static FDB Menu] add .Delete a static FDB entry clear . cur Display current static multicast entries. 080020123456 del <MAC address> <VLAN number> Deletes a permanent FDB entry. Enter the MAC address using the following format: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx For example. clear <MAC address>|all {mac|vlan|port} Clears static FDB entries.Clear static FDB entries cur . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 287 .Display current static FDB configuration Use the following commands to configure static entries in the Forwarding Database (FBD).1 Command Reference Table 147 Static Multicast MAC Menu Options (/cfg/l2/fdb/mcast) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage clear mac <MAC address>|vlan <VLAN number>|port <port number>|all Clears static multicast entries. 08:00:20:12:34:56 You can also enter the MAC address as follows: xxxxxxxxxxxx For example. Table 148 Static FDB Menu Options (/cfg/l2/fdb/static) Command Syntax and Usage add <MAC address> <VLAN number> <port number> Adds a permanent FDB entry.Add a permanent FDB entry del .

Globally turn LLDP On off . The transmit delay timer represents the minimum time permitted between successive LLDP transmissions on a port. in seconds. see page 290.Globally turn LLDP Off cur . To view menu options. Table 149 LLDP Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lldp) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the LLDP Port Configuration menu. redelay <1-10> Configures the re-initialization delay interval.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/lldp LLDP Configuration Menu [LLDP configuration Menu] port .Set minimum interval for successive trap notification txdelay . August 2009 . The default value is 5.Set delay interval between LLDP advertisements redelay . The default value is 2.Set reinitialization delay interval on . msgtxhld <2-10> Configures the message hold time multiplier. The default value is 2. The default value is 4. in seconds. The hold time is configured as a multiple of the message transmission interval. The re-initialization delay allows the port LLDP information to stabilize before transmitting LLDP messages.BLADE OS 5. 288 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. notifint <1-3600> Configures the trap notification interval. txdelay <1-8192> Configures the transmission delay interval.Show current LLDP parameters Use the following commands to configure Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP).Set transmission interval for LLDPDU msgtxhld .LLDP Port Menu msgtxint . msgtxint <5-32768> Configures the message transmission interval.Set holdtime multiplier for LLDP advertisement notifint . in seconds. The default value is 30.

cur Display current LLDP configuration. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 289 . BMD00114. The default setting is on.BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference Table 149 LLDP Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lldp) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage on Globally turns LLDP on. off Globally turns LLDP off.

see page 291.Set LLDP admin-status of this port snmptrap .Enable/disable SNMP trap notification of this port tlv . tlv Displays the Optional TLV menu for the selected port.Optional TLVs Menu cur . cur Display current LLDP configuration.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/lldp/port <port number> LLDP Port Configuration Menu [LLDP Port 2 Menu] admstat . snmptrap e|d Enables or disables SNMP trap notification for LLDP messages. as follows: Transmit only Receive only Transmit and receive Disabled The default value is tx_rx. To view menu options. 290 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.BLADE OS 5.Show current LLDP port parameters Use the following commands to configure LLDP port options. August 2009 . Table 150 LLDP Port Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lldp/port) Command Syntax and Usage admstat disabled|tx_only|rx_only|tx_rx Configures the LLDP transmission type for the port.

Enable/disable Port Description TLV for this port sysname . Value) options for the selected port. portvid d|e Enables or disables the Port VLAN ID information type.Enable/disable Protocol Identity TLV for this port macphy .Enable/disable Maximum Frame Size TLV for this port all .1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/lldp/port <port number>/tlv LLDP Optional TLV Configuration Menu [Optional TLVs Menu] portdesc . syscap d|e Enables or disables the System Capabilities information type.Enable/disable Port and Protocol VLAN ID TLV for this port vlanname . Length. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 291 .Enable/disable VLAN Name TLV for this port protid .Display current Optional TLVs configuration Use the following commands to configure LLDP port TLV (Type.Enable/disable all the Optional TLVs for this port cur .Enable/disable Management Address TLV for this port portvid .Enable/disable Port VLAN ID TLV for this port portprot . mgmtaddr d|e Enables or disables the Management Address information type.Enable/disable System Description TLV for this port syscap . Table 151 Optional TLV Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lldp/port x/tlv) Command Syntax and Usage portdesc d|e Enables or disables the Port Description information type.Enable/disable Link Aggregation TLV for this port framesz .Enable/disable Power Via MDI TLV for this port linkaggr .BLADE OS 5. sysname d|e Enables or disables the System Name information type. BMD00114.Enable/disable System Name TLV for this port sysdescr .Enable/disable System Capabilities TLV for this port mgmtaddr . sysdescr d|e Enables or disables the System Description information type.Enable/disable MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV for this port powermdi .

vlanname d|e Enables or disables the VLAN Name information type.1 Command Reference Table 151 Optional TLV Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lldp/port x/tlv) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage portprot d|e Enables or disables the Port and VLAN Protocol ID information type. linkaggr d|e Enables or disables the Link Aggregation information type. 292 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. protid d|e Enables or disables the Protocol ID information type. powermdi d|e Enables or disables the Power via MDI information type.BLADE OS 5. cur Display current Optional TLV configuration. August 2009 . all d|e Enables or disables all optional TLV information types. macphy d|e Enables or disables the MAC/Phy Configuration information type. framesz d|e Enables or disables the Maximum Frame Size information type.

The default status of cross connect ports is disabled. Table 152 Trunk Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/trunk) Command Syntax and Usage add <port number> Adds a physical port to the current trunk group. VLAN. Up to 8 ports can belong to the same trunk group. ena Enables the current trunk group. STG. Trunking from non-BLADE devices must comply with Cisco® EtherChannel® technology. combining their bandwidth to create a single.Enable trunk group dis . Up to 12 trunk groups can be configured on the switch. A trunk is a group of ports that act together. By default.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 293 . dis Disables the current trunk group. duplex. each trunk group is empty and disabled. Configure all ports in a trunk group with the same properties (speed. rem <port number> Removes a physical port from the current trunk group. flow control.Add port to trunk group rem .Display current Trunk Group configuration Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth connections between switches or other trunk capable devices.Disable trunk group del .Delete trunk group cur . By default. with the following restrictions: Any physical switch port can belong to no more than one trunk group.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/trunk <trunk group number> Trunk Configuration Menu [Trunk group 1 Menu] add . larger port. port 17 and 18 are trunked to support an internal cross-connect trunk.Remove port from trunk group ena . and so on). BMD00114.

294 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. Table 153 IP Trunk Hash Menu Options (/cfg/l2/thash) Command Syntax and Usage set Displays the Trunk Hash Settings menu. August 2009 . see page 295. cur Displays current trunk group parameters.1 Command Reference Table 152 Trunk Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/trunk) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage del Removes the current trunk group configuration.IP Trunk Hash Settings Menu cur .Display current IP trunk hash configuration Use the following commands to configure IP trunk hash settings for the switch. The trunk hash settings affect both static trunks and LACP trunks. To view menu options. /cfg/l2/thash IP Trunk Hash Configuration Menu [IP Trunk Hash Menu] set .BLADE OS 5. cur Display current trunk hash configuration.

You can enable one or two parameters. BMD00114. sip enable|disable Enable or disable trunk hashing on the source IP.Enable/disable sip hash . dip enable|disable Enable or disable trunk hashing on the destination IP.Enable/disable dmac hash .1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/thash/set IP Trunk Hash Menu [set IP Trunk smac dmac sip dip cur Hash Settings Menu] . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 295 . Table 154 IP Trunk Hash Menu Options (/cfg/l2/thash/set) Command Syntax and Usage smac enable|disable Enable or disable trunk hashing on the source MAC. dmac enable|disable Enable or disable trunk hashing on the destination MAC.Enable/disable smac hash .Enable/disable dip hash .Display current trunk hash setting Trunk hash parameters are set globally for the switch. cur Display current layer 2 trunk hash setting.BLADE OS 5. to configure any of the following valid combinations: SMAC (source MAC only) DMAC (destination MAC only) SIP (source IP only) DIP (destination IP only) SIP + DIP (source IP and destination IP) SMAC + DMAC (source MAC and destination MAC) Use the following commands to configure IP trunk hash parameters for the switch.

timeout short|long Defines the timeout period before invalidating LACP data from a remote partner.Restore default LACP system configuration .Delete an LACP trunk . The default value is 32768. delete <1-65535> Deletes a selected LACP trunk. Choose short (3 seconds) or long (90 seconds).Set LACP system timeout scale for timing out partner info . Note: It is recommended that you use a timeout value of long.LACP Port Menu . The default value is long. To view menu options.Set LACP system priority . based on its admin key. default sysprio|timeout Restores the selected parameters to their default values. consider using static trunks instead of LACP. Table 155 LACP Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lacp) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the LACP Port menu.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/lacp LACP Configuration Menu [LACP Menu] port sysprio timeout delete default cur . sysprio <1-65535> Defines the priority value (1 through 65535) for the switch.Display current LACP configuration Use the following commands to configure Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) for the switch.BLADE OS 5. If your switch’s CPU utilization rate remains at 100% for periods of 90 seconds or more. August 2009 . see page 297. cur Display current LACP configuration. Lower numbers provide higher priority. to reduce LACPDU processing. 296 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.

active: Turn LACP on and set this port to active. The default value is 32768. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 297 . Table 156 LACP Port Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lacp/port) Command Syntax and Usage mode off|active|passive Set the LACP mode for this port. cur Displays the current LACP configuration for this port. adminkey <1-65535> Set the admin key for this port.Set LACP port priority adminkey . default adminkey|mode|prio Restores the selected parameters to their default values. BMD00114.Restore default LACP port configuration cur .Set LACP port admin key default . Only ports with the same admin key and oper key (operational state generated internally) can form a LACP trunk group. You can use this port to manually configure a static trunk. Active ports initiate LACPDUs. but respond to LACPDUs from active ports. Passive ports do not initiate LACPDUs. Lower numbers provide higher priority.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/lacp/port <port number> LACP Port Configuration Menu [LACP Port 1 Menu] mode .BLADE OS 5.Display current LACP port configuration Use the following commands to configure Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) for the selected port. The default value is off. passive: Turn LACP on and set this port to passive. as follows: off: Turn LACP off for this port. prio <1-65535> Sets the priority value for the selected port.Set LACP mode prio .

the switch automatically disables only downlink ports that belong to the same VLAN as ports in the failover trigger. vlan on|off Globally turns VLAN monitor on or off. When the VLAN Monitor is on. To view menu options. The default value is off. Table 157 Layer 2 Failover Menu Options (/cfg/l2/failovr) Command Syntax and Usage trigger <1-8> Displays the Failover Trigger menu. off Globally turns Layer 2 Failover off. cur Displays current Layer 2 Failover parameters.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/failovr Layer 2 Failover Configuration Menu [Failover Menu] trigger vlan on off cur Trigger Menu Globally turn VLAN Monitor ON/OFF Globally turn Failover ON Globally turn Failover OFF Display current Failover configuration Use this menu to configure Layer 2 Failover. see page 299. on Globally turns Layer 2 Failover on. August 2009 . see “High Availability” in the BLADE OS Application Guide. For more information about Layer 2 Failover. 298 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.BLADE OS 5.

Enable Trigger dis . mmon Displays the Manual Monitor menu for the selected trigger.Auto Monitor Menu mmon . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 299 . cur Displays the current failover trigger settings.BLADE OS 5.Display current Trigger configuration Table 158 Failover Trigger Menu Options (/cfg/l2/failovr/trigger) Command Syntax and Usage amon Displays the Auto Monitor menu for the selected trigger. BMD00114. To view menu options. To view menu options. see page 301. limit <0-1024> Configures the minimum number of operational links allowed within each trigger before the trigger initiates a failover event.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/failovr/trigger Failover Trigger Configuration Menu [Trigger 1 Menu] amon .Manual Monitor Menu limit .Disable Trigger del .Delete Trigger cur . If you enter a value of zero (0). dis Disables the selected trigger. ena Enables the selected trigger. the switch triggers a failover event only when no links in the trigger are operational. see page 300. del Deletes the selected trigger.Limit of Trigger ena .

300 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. remkey <1-65535> Removes a LACP admin key from the Auto Monitor.Remove LACP port adminkey from Auto Monitor . August 2009 . remtrnk <trunk number> Removes a trunk group from the Auto Monitor.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/failovr/trigger/amon Auto Monitor Configuration Menu [Auto Monitor addtrnk remtrnk addkey remkey cur Menu] . addkey <1-65535> Adds a LACP admin key to the Auto Monitor.Add trunk to Auto Monitor . cur Displays the current Auto Monitor settings.Remove trunk from Auto Monitor .Display current Auto Monitor configuration Table 159 Auto Monitor Menu Options (/cfg/l2/failovr/trigger/amon) Command Syntax and Usage addtrnk <trunk number)> Adds a trunk group to the Auto Monitor.BLADE OS 5.Add LACP port adminkey to Auto Monitor . LACP trunks formed with this admin key will be included in the Auto Monitor.

These menus allow you to manually define both the monitor and control ports that participate in failover teaming. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 301 .Monitor menu for the selected trigger.BLADE OS 5.Control menu for the selected trigger. Note – AMON and MMON configurations are mutually exclusive.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/failovr/trigger/mmon Manual Monitor Configuration Menu [Manual Monitor monitor control cur Menu] Monitor Menu Control Menu Display current Manual Monitor configuration Use this menu to configure Failover Manual Monitor. Table 6-1 Failover Manual Monitor options (/cfg/l2/failovr/trigger/mmon) Command Syntax and Usage monitor Displays the Manual Monitor . cur Displays the current Manual Monitor settings. control Displays the Manual Monitor . BMD00114.

August 2009 .BLADE OS 5. addtrnk <trunk group number)> Adds a trunk group to the Manual Monitor . cur Displays the current Manual Monitor . remkey <1-65535> Removes a LACP admin key from the Manual Monitor .Monitor configuration accepts only external uplink ports.Monitor.Monitor.Monitor.Monitor. The Manual Monitor . remport <port number> Removes the selected port from the Manual Monitor . Table 160 Failover Manual Monitor . addkey <1-65535> Adds a LACP admin key to the Manual Monitor .1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/failovr/trigger/mmon/monitor Manual Monitor Port Configuration Menu [Monitor Menu] addport remport addtrnk remtrnk addkey remkey cur - Add port to Monitor Remove port from Monitor Add trunk to Monitor Remove trunk from Monitor Add LACP port adminkey to Monitor Remove LACP port adminkey from Monitor Display current Monitor configuration Use this menu to define the port link(s) to monitor. LACP trunks formed with this admin key will be included in the Manual Monitor .Monitor options (/cfg/l2/failovr/trigger/mmon/monitor) Command Syntax and Usage addport <port number> Adds the selected port to the Manual Monitor .Monitor.Monitor configuration. remtrnk <trunk group number> Removes a trunk group from the Manual Monitor .Monitor.Monitor. 302 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.

remtrnk <trunk number> Removes a trunk group from the Manual Monitor .Control. remport <port number> Removes the selected port from the Manual Monitor .Control.Control. LACP trunks formed with this admin key will be included in the Manual Monitor .Control.BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/failovr/trigger/mmon/control Manual Monitor Control Configuration Menu [Control Menu] addport remport addtrnk remtrnk addkey remkey cur - Add port to Control Remove port from Control Add trunk to Control Remove trunk from Control Add LACP port adminkey to Control Remove LACP port adminkey from Control Display current Control configuration Use this menu to define the port link(s) to control. Table 161 Failover Manual Monitor .Control. addtrnk <trunk number)> Adds a trunk group to the Manual Monitor . The Manual Monitor–Control configuration accepts downlink and uplink ports. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 303 .Control. BMD00114. remkey <1-65535> Removes a LACP admin key from the Manual Monitor . addkey <1-65535> Adds a LACP admin key to the Manual Monitor .Control.Control options (/cfg/l2/failovr/trigger/mmon/control) Command Syntax and Usage addport <port number> Adds the selected port to the Manual Monitor . cur Displays the current Manual Monitor .Control configuration. but not management ports.

on Globally turns Hot Links on.Enable/disable FDB update on .1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/hotlink Hot Links Configuration Menu [Hot Links Menu] trigger . see page 305.Display current Hot Links configuration Table 162 describes the Hot Links menu options. The default value is off.Globally turn Hot Links ON off . which allows the switch to send FDB and MAC update packets over the active interface.Enable/disable BPDU flood sndfdb . The default setting is disabled. sndfdb enable|disable Enables or disables FDB Update. The default setting is disabled. off Globally turns Hot Links off.Globally turn Hot Links OFF cur .BLADE OS 5. bpdu enable|disable Enables or disables the ability to flood BPDUs on the active Hot Links interface when the interface belongs to a Spanning Tree group that is globally turned off. cur Displays current Hot Links configuration. To view menu options. 304 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. Table 162 Hot Links Menu Options (/cfg/l2/hotlink) Command Syntax and Usage trigger <1-5> Displays the Hot Links Trigger menu. August 2009 .Trigger Menu bpdu .

Enable Trigger dis .Backup Menu fdelay . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 305 .Set Trigger Name preempt . ena Enables the Hot Links trigger.Master Menu backup .Display current Trigger configuration Table 163 Hot Links Trigger Menu Options (/cfg/l2/hotlink/trigger) Command Syntax and Usage master Displays the Master interface menu for the selected trigger.Disable Trigger del . The default value is 1.Set Forward Delay (secs) name . which allows the Master interface to transition to the Active state whenever it becomes available. fdelay <0-3600> Configures the Forward Delay interval.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/hotlink/trigger <1-5> Hot Links Trigger Configuration Menu [Trigger 2 Menu] master . BMD00114. dis Disables the Hot Links trigger.BLADE OS 5. preempt e|d Enables or disables pre-emption. name <1-32 characters> Configures a name for the trigger. in seconds.Delete Trigger cur .Enable/disable Preemption ena . backup Displays the Backup interface menu for the selected trigger. The default setting is enabled.

BLADE OS 5. trunk <trunk number>|0 Adds the selected trunk group to the Master interface. cur Displays the current Hot Links Master interface configuration. August 2009 . adminkey <0-65535> Adds a LACP admin key to the Master interface. /cfg/l2/hotlink/trigger <1-5>/master Hot Links Trigger Master Configuration Menu [Master Menu] port trunk adminkey cur Set port in Master Set trunk in Master Set adminkey in Master Display current Master configuration Table 164 Hot Links Trigger Master menu (/cfg/l2/hotlink/trigger/master) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Adds the selected port to the Master interface. Enter 0 (zero) to clear the admin key. 306 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. Enter 0 (zero) to clear the port.1 Command Reference Table 163 Hot Links Trigger Menu Options (/cfg/l2/hotlink/trigger) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the Hot Links trigger. Enter 0 (zero) to clear the trunk group. cur Displays the current Hot Links Trigger configuration. LACP trunks formed with this admin key will be included in the Master interface.

trunk <trunk number>|0 Adds the selected trunk to the Backup interface. Enter 0 (zero) to clear the admin key.BLADE OS 5. BMD00114.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/hotlink/trigger <1-5>/backup Hot Links Trigger Backup Configuration Menu [Backup Menu] port trunk adminkey cur Set port in Backup Set trunk in Backup Set adminkey in Backup Display current Backup configuration Table 165 Hot Links Trigger Backup menu (/cfg/l2/hotlink/trigger/backup) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Adds the selected port to the Backup interface. cur Displays the current Hot Links Backup interface settings. Enter 0 (zero) to clear the port. Enter 0 (zero) to clear the trunk group. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 307 . LACP trunks formed with this admin key will be included in the Backup interface. adminkey <0-65535> Adds a LACP admin key to the Backup interface.

the VLAN menu option is disabled except VLAN 1. Downlink ports and uplink ports are in VLAN 1 by default. By default. which is enabled all the time. add <port number> Adds port(s) to the VLAN membership. see page 310. change the port membership of each VLAN. change the status of each VLAN. The default VLAN name is the first one.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/vlan <VLAN number> VLAN Configuration Menu [VLAN 1 Menu] pvlan privlan name stg add rem def ena dis del cur Protocol VLAN Menu Private-VLAN Menu Set VLAN name Assign VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group Add port to VLAN Remove port from VLAN Define VLAN as list of ports Enable VLAN Disable VLAN Delete VLAN Display current VLAN configuration The commands in this menu configure VLAN attributes. rem <port number> Removes port(s) from this VLAN. and delete VLANs. VLAN 4095 is reserved for switch management. To view menu options. 308 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.BLADE OS 5. Up to 1000 VLANs can be configured on the switch. stg <STG index> Assigns a VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group. Table 166 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan) Command Syntax and Usage pvlan <1-8> Displays the Protocol-based VLAN menu. August 2009 . name Assigns a name to the VLAN or changes the existing name. privlan Displays the Private VLAN menu. To view menu options. see page 312.

dis Disables this VLAN without removing it from the configuration. You cannot remove a port from VLAN 1 if the port has no membership in any other VLAN. By default. Also. Every port must be a member of at least one VLAN. you cannot add a port to more than one VLAN unless the port has VLAN tagging turned on (see the tag command on page 238). BMD00114. Any port which is removed from a VLAN and which is not a member of any other VLAN is automatically added to default VLAN 1. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 309 . cur Displays the current VLAN configuration. downlink ports and uplink ports are in VLAN 1. Note – All ports must belong to at least one VLAN. del Deletes this VLAN.1 Command Reference Table 166 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage def <list of port numbers> Defines which ports are members of this VLAN. ena Enables this VLAN.BLADE OS 5.

1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/vlan/pvlan <protocol number> Protocol-Based VLAN Configuration Menu [VLAN 1 Protocol 1 Menu] pty .3: ipxEther2: ipxSnap: netbios: sna802.Delete protocol ena .2: snaEther2: xnsEther2: Novell IPX 802.2 SNA 802.2 Novell IPX 802.2 IBM SNA Service on Ethernet XNS Compatibility rarpEther2: Reverse ARP vinesEther2: Banyan VINES 310 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.Select a predefined protocol prio .Enable protocol dis .Display current PVLAN configuration Use this menu to configure Protocol-based VLAN (PVLAN) for the selected VLAN. such as 0080 (IPv4).Enable/Disable port tagging for PVLAN taglist . Ethernet type consists of a 4-digit (16 bit) hex code.Add port to PVLAN rem .Add/Remove a list of ports to/from PVLAN tagpvl .Disable protocol cur .Remove port from PVLAN ports .BLADE OS 5. as follows: decEther2: DEC Local Area Transport ipv4Ether2: Internet IP (IPv4) ipv6Ether2: IPv6 ipx802.Set protocol type protocol .Set priority to protocol add . protocol <protocol type> Selects a pre-defined protocol.Enable tagging a port list for PVLAN del . August 2009 . Table 167 PVLAN Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan/pvlan) Command Syntax and Usage pty <(Ether2|SNAP|LLC)> <Ethernet type> Configures the frame type and the Ethernet type for the selected protocol.3 Novell IPX Novell IPX SNAP NetBIOS 802.2: ipx802.

BLADE OS 5. tagpvl <port number> [enable|disable] Enables or disables port tagging on this PVLAN. dis Disables the selected protocol on the VLAN. del Deletes the selected protocol configuration from the VLAN. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 311 . rem <port number> Removes a port from the selected PVLAN. Enter empty to disable tagging on all ports by this PVLAN.1 Command Reference Table 167 PVLAN Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan/pvlan) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage prio <0-7> Configures the priority value for this PVLAN. cur Displays current parameters for the selected PVLAN. ena Enables the selected protocol on the VLAN. BMD00114. add <port number> Adds a port to the selected PVLAN. ports <port number> Defines a list of ports that belong to the selected protocol on this VLAN. taglist {<port number>|empty} Defines a list of ports that will be tagged by the selected protocol on this VLAN. Enter 0 (zero) to remove all ports.

community: Community VLANs carry upstream traffic from host ports. map <2-4094>|none Configures Private VLAN mapping between a secondary VLAN (isolated or community) and a primary VLAN. August 2009 .BLADE OS 5. Table 168 Private VLAN Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan/privlan) Command Syntax and Usage type primary|isolated|community Defines the VLAN type. cur Displays current parameters for the selected Private VLAN. 312 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. isolated: The isolated VLAN carries unidirectional traffic from host ports. dis Disables the Private VLAN. ena Enables the Private VLAN. A Private VLAN may have only one isolated VLAN. as follows: primary: A Private VLAN must have only one primary VLAN.1 Command Reference /cfg/l2/vlan/privlan Private VLAN Configuration Menu [privlan Menu] type map ena dis cur Set Private-VLAN type Associate secondary VLAN with a primary VLAN Enable Private-VLAN Disable Private-VLAN Display current Private-VLAN configuration Use this menu to configure a Private VLAN. Enter the primary VLAN ID. The primary VLAN carries unidirectional traffic to ports on the isolated VLAN or to community VLAN. A Private VLAN may have multiple community VLANs.

To view menu options. see page 320. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 313 . To view menu options. To view menu options.BLADE OS 5. To view menu options see page 321. To view menu options. nwf <network filter number (1-256)> Displays the Network Filter Configuration Menu. To view menu options. BMD00114. frwd Displays the IP Forwarding Menu. see page 318. arp Displays the Address Resolution Protocol Menu. route Displays the IP Static Route Menu. see page 316. see page 315.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3 Layer 3 Configuration Menu [Layer 3 Menu] if gw route arp frwd nwf rmap rip ospf igmp dns bootp sm vrrp loopif rtrid cur Interface Menu Default Gateway Menu Static Route Menu ARP Menu Forwarding Menu Network Filters Menu Route Map Menu Routing Information Protocol Menu Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Menu IGMP Menu Domain Name System Menu Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu ServerMobility Menu Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu Loopback Interface Menu Set router ID Display current IP configuration Table 169 Layer 3 Configuration Menu (/cfg/l3) Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number (1-256)> Displays the IP Interface Menu. see page 317. gw <default gateway number (1-4> Displays the IP Default Gateway Menu.

To view menu options. sm Displays the ServerMobility Menu. August 2009 . see page 350. 314 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. see page 349. ospf Displays the OSPF Menu. rtrid <IP address (such as.4. rip Displays the Routing Interface Protocol Menu. 192.101)> Sets the router ID. To view menu options. To view menu options. see page 329.17. To view menu options see page 322. To view menu options. vrrp Displays the Virtual Router Redundancy Configuration Menu. see page 325. To view menu options.1 Command Reference Table 169 Layer 3 Configuration Menu (/cfg/l3) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage rmap <route map number (1-32)> Displays the Route Map Menu.BLADE OS 5. To view menu options. cur Displays the current IP configuration. To view menu options. igmp Displays the IGMP Menu. To view menu options. see page 341. bootp Displays the Bootstrap Protocol Menu. loopif Displays the IP Loopback Interface Menu. see page 367. see page 363. dns Displays the IP Domain Name System Menu. see page 351.

BMD00114. del Removes this IP interface.4.17. ena Enables this IP interface. Each IP interface represents the switch on an IP subnet on your network. It is enabled by default. Table 170 IP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/if) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IPv4 address (such as 192. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315 .0)> Configures the IP subnet address mask for the interface using dotted decimal notation. relay disable|enable Enables or disables the BOOTP relay on this interface.BLADE OS 5. vlan <VLAN number> Configures the VLAN number for this interface.255.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/if <interface number> IP Interface Configuration Menu [IP Interface addr mask vlan relay ena dis del cur 1 Menu] Set IP address Set subnet mask Set VLAN number Enable/disable BOOTP relay Enable IP interface Disable IP interface Delete IP interface Display current interface configuration The switch can be configured with up to 256 IP interfaces. The Interface option is disabled by default. Each VLAN can contain multiple IPv4 interfaces. Each interface can belong to only one VLAN. using dotted decimal notation.255.101)> Configures the IPv4 address of the switch interface. mask <IP subnet mask (such as 255. dis Disables this IP interface. cur Displays the current interface settings.

dis Disables the gateway. arp disable|enable Enables or disables Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) health checks. intr <0-60 seconds> The switch pings the default gateway to verify that it’s up. The intr option sets the time between health checks. The default is 8 attempts.Delete default gateway cur .17. The range is from 0 to 60 seconds. The default value is disabled. August 2009 . /cfg/l3/gw <gateway number> Default Gateway Configuration Menu [Default gateway 1 Menu] addr . 316 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.Enable/disable ARP only health checks ena .Enable default gateway dis .Display current default gateway configuration The switch can be configured with up to 4 IPv4 gateways. you are prompted to change the BOOTP setting.1 Command Reference Note – If you enter an IP address for interface 1.Set interval between ping attempts retry .44)> Configures the IP address of the default IP gateway using dotted decimal notation.4. ena Enables the gateway for use.BLADE OS 5. The arp option does not apply to management gateways. Table 171 Default Gateway Menu Options (/cfg/l3/gw) Command Syntax and Usage addr <default gateway address (such as.Disable default gateway del .Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN arp . 192.Set IP address intr . retry <number of attempts (1-120)> Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this default gateway inoperative. The default is 2 seconds. The range is from 1 to 120 attempts. This option is disabled by default.

BMD00114. rem <destination> <mask> [<interface number>] Removes a static route. Enter all addresses using dotted decimal notation. clear <destination IP address>|<gateway IP address>|all <value> Clears the selected IPv4 static routes.BLADE OS 5. /cfg/l3/route IPv4 Static Route Configuration Menu [IP Static Route Menu] add . cur Displays the current IPv4 static routes. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 317 . Table 172 IP Static Route Configuration Menu Options (cfg/l3/route) Command Syntax and Usage add <destination> <mask> <gateway> [<interface number>] Adds a static route.Clear static routes cur . You will be prompted to enter a destination IP address.Add static route rem . destination subnet mask. and gateway address.1 Command Reference Table 171 Default Gateway Menu Options (/cfg/l3/gw) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the gateway from the configuration. The destination address of the route to remove must be specified using dotted decimal notation.Remove static route clear . cur Displays the current gateway settings.Display current static routes Up to 128 IPv4 static routes can be configured.

cur Displays the current ARP configurations.Display current ARP configuration Table 173 ARP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp) Command Syntax and Usage static Displays Static ARP menu. ARP resolves a physical address from an IP address. see page 319. [ARP Menu] static rearp cur . rearp <2-120 minutes> Defines re-ARP period in minutes.Set re-ARP period in minutes . August 2009 .1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/arp ARP Configuration Menu Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the TCP/IP protocol that resides within the Internet layer. ARP also maintains IP to physical address pairs in its cache memory. In any IP communication. To view options. Then the corresponding physical address is used to send a packet. You can set this duration between two and 120 minutes.BLADE OS 5. 318 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. the ARP cache is consulted to see if the IP address of the computer or the router is present in the ARP cache.Static ARP Menu . ARP queries machines on the local network for their physical addresses.

cur Displays current static ARP configuration.4. Static ARPs are also useful to communicate with devices that do not respond to ARP requests. clear [<interface number>|<VLAN number>|<port number>|all] <ARP entry number> Clears static ARP entries.Clear static ARP entries cur . [Static ARP Menu] add . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 319 .Display current static ARP configuration Table 174 ARP Static Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp/static) Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> <MAC address> <VLAN number> <port number> Adds a permanent ARP entry.Delete an ARP entry clear .17.BLADE OS 5. Static ARPs can also be configured on some gateways as a protection against malicious ARP Cache corruption and possible DOS attacks. del <IP address (such as. Static ARP entries enable the switch to reach the hosts without sending an ARP broadcast request to the network. BMD00114.101)> Deletes a permanent ARP entry.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/arp/static ARP Static Configuration Menu Static ARP entries are permanent in the ARP cache and do not age out like the ARP entries that are learned dynamically. 192.Add a permanent ARP entry del .

Forwarding is turned on by default. 320 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.Globally turn IP Forwarding ON off . off Disables IP forwarding (routing) on the switch.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/frwd IP Forwarding Configuration Menu [IP Forwarding Menu] dirbr . noicmprd disable|enable Enables or disables ICMP re-directs. The default setting is disabled. The default setting is disabled.Enable or disable forwarding directed broadcasts noicmprd . cur Displays the current IP forwarding settings.Enable/disable No ICMP Redirects on .Display current IP Forwarding configuration Table 175 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/frwd) Command Syntax and Usage dirbr disable|enable Enables or disables forwarding directed broadcasts.BLADE OS 5.Globally turn IP Forwarding OFF cur . August 2009 . on Enables IP forwarding (routing) on the switch.

44> Sets the IP address that will be accepted by the peer when the filter is enabled. such as 192.Delete Network Filter cur .0 mask <IP network filter mask> Sets the network filter mask that is used with addr. cur Displays the current the Network Filter configuration.0.IP Address mask . delete Deletes the Network Filter configuration.Display current Network Filter configuration Table 176 IP Network Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/nwf) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address. a range of IP addresses is accepted.Enable Network Filter disable .0 enable Enables the Network Filter configuration. If used with the mask option.17.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/nwf <1-256> Network Filter Configuration Menu [IP Network Filter 1 Menu] addr . The default value is 0.BLADE OS 5. disable Disables the Network Filter configuration. BMD00114.0.4. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 321 . The default address is 0.0.0.Disable Network Filter delete .IP network filter mask enable .

the higher the precedence. Type 1—External routes are calculated using both internal and external metrics. [IP Route Map alist metric type prec enable disable delete cur 1 Menu] Access List number Set metric of the matched route Set OSPF metric-type of the matched route Set the precedence of this route map Enable route map Disable route map Delete route map Display current route map configuration Routing maps control and modify routing information. Type 1 routes have more cost than Type 2. see page 324. The smaller the value. August 2009 . Default value is 10. The default is type 1. Type 2—External routes are calculated using only the external metrics. none—Removes the OSPF metric. type <value (1|2)>|none Assigns the type of OSPF metric. For more information. Table 177 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap) Command Syntax and Usage alist <number 1-8> Displays the Access List menu. disable Disables the route map. enable Enables the route map.BLADE OS 5. 322 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rmap <route map number> Routing Map Configuration Menu Note – The map number (1-32) represents the routing map you wish to configure. metric <1-16777214>|none Sets the metric of the matched route. prec <value (1-255)> Sets the precedence of the route map.

cur Displays the current route configuration.1 Command Reference Table 177 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage delete Deletes the route map. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 323 . BMD00114.BLADE OS 5.

1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rmap <route map number>/alist <access list number> IP Access List Configuration Menu Note – The route map number (1-32) and the access list number (1-8) represent the IP access list you wish to configure. delete Deletes the access list. disable Disables the access list. enable Enables the access list. cur Displays the current Access List configuration. August 2009 . metric <1-16777214>|none Sets the metric value in the AS-External (ASE) LSA. See “/cfg/l3/nwf <1-256>” on page 321 for details.BLADE OS 5. 324 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. [IP Access List nwf metric action enable disable delete cur 1 Menu] Network Filter number Metric Set Network Filter action Enable Access List Disable Access List Delete Access List Display current Access List configuration Table 178 IP Access List Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/alist) Command Syntax and Usage nwf <network filter number (1-256)> Sets the network filter number. action permit|deny Permits or denies action for the access list.

Note – Do not configure RIP version 1 parameters if your routing equipment uses RIP version 2. cur Displays the current RIP configuration. BMD00114. on Globally turns RIP on.RIP Interface Menu update . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 325 .1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rip Routing Information Protocol Configuration Menu [Routing Information Protocol Menu] if . redist fixed|static|ospf|eospf Displays the RIP Route Redistribution menu.Globally turn RIP OFF current . see page 328.BLADE OS 5. off Globally turns RIP off.Globally turn RIP ON off . Table 179 RIP Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rip) Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number> Displays the RIP Interface menu. This option is turned off by default. update <1-120> Configures the time interval for sending for RIP table updates. For more information. The default value is 30 seconds.Display current RIP configuration The RIP Menu is used for configuring Routing Information Protocol (RIP) parameters. in seconds.Set update period in seconds redist . For more information. see page 326.RIP Route Redistribute Menu on .

the switch uses only split horizon.Set default route action metric . The default value is enabled.Enable/disable triggered updates mcast . August 2009 .Enable/disable split horizon trigg .Display current RIP interface configuration The RIP Menu is used for configuring Routing Information Protocol parameters.Enable/disable supplying route updates listen .Enable/disable multicast updates default . The default value is disabled. the switch uses split horizon with poisoned reverse. This option is turned off by default. The default value is version 2. the switch learns routes from other routers.Enable/disable poisoned reverse split . the switch supplies routes to other routers. When disabled.BLADE OS 5.Enable interface disable .Set metric auth .Set RIP version supply . poison disable|enable When enabled.Set authentication key enable . The default value is enabled.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rip/if <interface number> Routing Information Protocol Interface Configuration Menu [RIP Interface 1 Menu] version . split disable|enable Enables or disables split horizon. listen disable|enable When enabled.Disable interface current . supply disable|enable When enabled.Set authentication type key . 326 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.Enable/disable listening to route updates poison . Table 180 RIP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rip/if) Command Syntax and Usage version 1|2|both Configures the RIP version used by this interface. Note – Do not configure RIP version 1 parameters if your routing equipment uses RIP version 2. The default value is enabled.

key Configures the authentication key password. the switch rejects RIP default routes. The default value is none.9).1 Command Reference Table 180 RIP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rip/if) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage trigg disable|enable Enables or disables Triggered Updates. When enabled. The default value is enabled. disable Disables this RIP interface. default none|listen|supply|both When enabled. Triggered Updates are used to speed convergence. auth none|password Configures the authentication type. The default is none. which indicates the relative distance to the destination. the switch accepts RIP default routes from other routers. even if it is not yet time for the update message. Triggered Updates force a router to send update messages immediately. BMD00114. When disabled. current Displays the current RIP configuration.0.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 327 . mcast disable|enable Enables or disables multicast updates of the routing table (using address 224. metric <1-15> Configures the route metric.0. but gives them lower priority than configured default gateways. The default value is enabled. enable Enables this RIP interface. The default value is 1.

type all. ). The routes of the redistribution protocol matched by the route maps in the route redistribution list will be redistributed. August 2009 . type all. cur Displays the current RIP route redistribute configuration. To add specific route maps. rem <1-32> <1-32>|all Removes the route map from the RIP route redistribution list. enter routing map numbers. separated by a comma ( .Export all routes of this protocol cur .Add rmap into route redistribution list rem . Table 181 RIP Redistribution Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rip/redist) Command Syntax and Usage add <1-32> <1-32>|all Adds selected routing maps to the RIP route redistribution list. 328 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. To add all 32 route maps. To remove specific route maps. To remove a previous configuration and stop exporting the routes of the protocol.Remove rmap from route redistribution list export .1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rip/redist fixed|static|ospf|eospf RIP Route Redistribution Configuration Menu [RIP Redistribute Fixed Menu] add . To remove all 32 route maps. separated by a comma ( .BLADE OS 5. enter none.Display current route-maps added The following table describes the RIP Route Redistribute Menu options. enter routing map numbers. ). export <1-15>|none Exports the routes of this protocol in which the metric and metric type are specified.

August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 329 . See page 338 to view menu options. host <1-128> Displays the menu for configuring OSPF for the host routes. It also makes Area Border Route (ABR) load sharing and ABR failover possible.OSPF Interface menu virt . if <interface number> Displays the OSPF interface configuration menu.OSPF Area (index) menu range .OSPF Route Redistribute menu lsdb .OSPF Virtual Links menu md5key . Up to 128 host routes can be configured. Host routes are used for advertising network device IP addresses to external networks to perform server load balancing within OSPF. This area index does not represent the actual OSPF area number.Display current OSPF configuration Table 182 OSPF Configuration Menu (/cfg/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the area index menu. See page 331 to view menu options.Globally turn OSPF ON off . virt <virtual link (1-3)> Displays the Virtual Links menu used to configure OSPF for a Virtual Link.Set the LSDB limit default . See page 336 to view menu options. md5key <key ID (1-255)> Assigns a string to MD5 authentication key.OSPF MD5 Key Menu host .Originate default route information on .Globally turn OSPF OFF cur .BLADE OS 5.OSPF Summary Range menu if . BMD00114.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf Open Shortest Path First Configuration Menu [Open Shortest Path First Menu] aindex . range <1-16> Displays summary routes menu for up to 16 IP addresses. See page 333 to view menu options. See page 334 to view menu options.OSPF Host Entry menu redist .

1 Command Reference Table 182 OSPF Configuration Menu (/cfg/l3/ospf) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage redist fixed|static|rip Displays Route Distribution Menu. August 2009 . off Disables OSPF on the switch. lsdb <LSDB limit (0-6144. cur Displays the current OSPF configuration settings. 0 for no limit)> Sets the link state database limit. 330 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. Use none for no default.BLADE OS 5. on Enables OSPF on the switch. See page 339 to view menu options. default <metric (1-16777214)> <metric-type 1|2>|none Sets one default route among multiple choices in an area.

type transit|stub|nssa Defines the type of area. All routes received via that stub area carry the configured metric to potentially influencing routing decisions. NSSA: Not-So-Stubby Area (NSSA) is similar to stub area with additional capabilities. Metric type determines the method for influencing routing decisions for external routes.17. Stub area: is an area where external routing information is not distributed.Set time interval between two SPF calculations enable . External routes from outside the Autonomous System (AS) can be advertised within the NSSA but are not distributed into other areas.Set authentication type spf . Metric value assigns the priority for choosing the switch for default route.Set stub area metric auth .Display current OSPF area configuration Table 183 Area Index Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex) Command Syntax and Usage areaid <IP address (such as. For example.Disable area delete . 192. the area type must be defined as transit.BLADE OS 5.Set area ID type . a stub area is connected to only one other area.Enable area disable . BMD00114. For example. when a virtual link has to be established with the backbone. routes originating from within the NSSA can be propagated to adjacent transit and backbone areas.4. Transit area: allows area summary information to be exchanged between routing devices.Set area type metric .101)> Defines the IP address of the OSPF area number.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/aindex <area index> Area Index Configuration Menu [OSPF Area (index) 1 Menu] areaid .Delete area cur . Any area that is not a stub area or NSSA is considered to be transit area. metric <metric value (1-65535)> Configures a stub area to send a numeric metric value. Typically. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 331 .

August 2009 .BLADE OS 5. enable Enables the OSPF area.1 Command Reference Table 183 Area Index Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex) Command Syntax and Usage auth none|password|md5 none: No authentication required. delete Deletes the OSPF area. 332 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. spf <interval (1-255)> Sets time interval between two successive SPF (shortest path first) calculations of the shortest path tree using the Dijkstra’s algorithm. cur Displays the current OSPF configuration. password: Authenticates simple passwords so that only trusted routing devices can participate. disable Disables the OSPF area. md5: This parameter is used when MD5 cryptographic authentication is required.

Enable range .Enable/disable hide range .0)> Configures the IP address mask for the range.Set area index .4.Display current OSPF summary range configuration Table 184 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/range) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP Address (such as. mask <IP mask (such as.Disable range . hide disable|enable Hides the OSPF summary range.17.Delete range . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 333 .Set IP mask .255.255.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/range <range number> OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu [OSPF Summary addr mask aindex hide enable disable delete cur Range 1 Menu] . delete Deletes the OSPF summary range. 255. BMD00114. disable Disables the OSPF summary range. 192. current Displays the current OSPF summary range.101)> Configures the base IP address for the range.BLADE OS 5. enable Enables the OSPF summary range. aindex <area index (0-2)> Configures the area index used by the switch.Set IP address .

Usually the cost is inversely proportional to the bandwidth of the interface. August 2009 .) cost <1-65535> Configures cost set for the selected path—preferred or backup. prio <priority value (0-255)> Configures the priority value for the switch’s OSPF interfaces. hello <1-65535> hello <1-65535ms> Configures the interval. between the hello packets for the interfaces. in seconds or milliseconds.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/if <interface number> OSPF Interface Configuration Menu [OSPF Interface aindex prio cost hello dead trans retra key mdkey passive ptop enable disable delete cur 1 Menu] Set area index Set interface router priority Set interface cost Set hello interval in seconds or milliseconds Set dead interval in seconds or milliseconds Set transit delay in seconds Set retransmit interval in seconds Set authentication key Set MD5 key ID Enable/disable passive interface Enable/disable point-to-point interface Enable interface Disable interface Delete interface Display current OSPF interface configuration Table 185 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/if) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Configures the OSPF area index. A priority value of 0 specifies that the interface cannot be used as Designated Router (DR) or Backup Designated Router (BDR). Low cost indicates high bandwidth. (A priority value of 255 is the highest and 1 is the lowest.BLADE OS 5. 334 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.

1 Command Reference Table 185 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/if) Command Syntax and Usage dead <1-65535> dead <1-65535ms> Configures the health parameters of a hello packet. before declaring a silent router to be down. key <key>|none Sets the authentication key to clear the password. enable Enables OSPF interface. mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none Assigns an MD5 key to the interface. disable Disables OSPF interface. cur Displays the current settings for OSPF interface. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 335 .BLADE OS 5. On a passive interface. trans <1-3600> Configures the transit delay in seconds. delete Deletes OSPF interface. passive enable|disable Sets the interface as passive. in seconds or milliseconds. BMD00114. ptop enable|disable Sets the interface as point-to-point. retra <1-3600> Configures the retransmit interval in seconds. you can disable OSPF protocol exchanges. but the router advertises the interface in its LSAs so that IP connectivity to the attached network segment will be established.

Enable interface .Set hello interval in seconds or milliseconds . nbr <NBR router ID (IP address)> Configures the router ID of the virtual neighbor.Set retransmit interval in seconds . in seconds.Delete interface .0. 336 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.BLADE OS 5.Display current OSPF interface configuration Table 186 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/virt) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Configures the OSPF area index. Default is five seconds.Set dead interval in seconds or milliseconds . key <password> Configures the password (up to eight characters) for each virtual link. in seconds or milliseconds. Default is none. in seconds. in seconds or milliseconds. Default is one second.Disable interface . trans <1-3600> Configures the delay in transit.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/virt <link number> OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu [OSPF Virtual aindex hello dead trans retra nbr key mdkey enable disable delete cur Link 1 Menu] .Set authentication key .0.Set area index .Set transit delay in seconds . hello <1-65535)> hello <1-65535ms)> Configures the authentication parameters of a hello packet. retra <1-3600> Configures the retransmit interval. Default is 0. August 2009 . dead <1-65535> dead <1-65535ms> Configures the health parameters of a hello packet.Set router ID of virtual neighbor .0. The default value is 60 seconds.Set MD5 key ID .

1 Command Reference Table 186 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/virt) Command Syntax and Usage mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none Sets MD5 key ID for each virtual link. BMD00114. cur Displays the current OSPF virtual link settings. delete Deletes OSPF virtual link. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 337 . Default is none. enable Enables OSPF virtual link. disable Disables OSPF virtual link.BLADE OS 5.

338 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.Set cost of this host entry enable .Display current OSPF host entry configuration Table 187 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/host) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as. delete Deletes OSPF host entry. August 2009 .Set host entry IP address aindex .101)> Configures the base IP address for the host entry. cur Displays the current OSPF host entries.Delete host entry cur . enable Enables OSPF host entry. aindex <area index (0-2)> Configures the area index of the host.Set area index cost .4.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/host <host number> OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu [OSPF Host Entry 1 Menu] addr .17. cost <1-65535> Configures the cost value of the host.Disable host entry delete .BLADE OS 5.Enable host entry disable . disable Disables OSPF host entry. 192.

.. export <metric (1-16777214)> <metric type [1|2]> |none Exports the routes of this protocol as external OSPF AS-external LSAs in which the metric and metric type are specified.To add all the 32 route maps. rem (<route map (1-32)> <route map (1-32)>) ..Remove rmap from route redistribution list export . To add specific route maps. cur Displays the current route map settings.Add rmap into route redistribution list rem . |all Removes the route map from the route redistribution list. To remove a previous configuration and stop exporting the routes of the protocol. |all Adds selected routing maps to the rmap list.Display current route-maps added Table 188 OSPF Route Redistribution Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/redist) Command Syntax and Usage add (<route map (1-32)> <route map [1-32]>). NULL at the end. BMD00114. To remove specific route maps. enter all. enter routing map numbers one per line. The routes of the redistribution protocol matched by the route maps in the route redistribution list will be redistributed. enter routing map numbers one per line.. To remove all 32 route maps. enter all. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 339 . This option adds a route map to the route redistribution list. enter none.BLADE OS 5. NULL at end.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/redist fixed|static|rip OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu [OSPF Redistribute Fixed Menu] add . Removes routing maps from the rmap list.Export all routes of this protocol cur .

1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/md5key <key ID> OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu [OSPF MD5 Key key delete cur 1 Menu] Set authentication key Delete key Display current MD5 key configuration Table 189 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/ip/ospf/md5key) Command Syntax and Usage key <1-16 characters> Sets the authentication key for this OSPF packet. August 2009 . 340 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. cur Displays the current MD5 key configuration. delete Deletes the authentication key for this OSPF packet.BLADE OS 5.

mrouter Displays the Static Multicast Router Menu. cur Displays the current IGMP configuration parameters. To view menu options. Table 190 IGMP Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp) Command Syntax and Usage snoop Displays the IGMP Snoop Menu. see page 345. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 341 .BLADE OS 5. see page 346. off Globally turns IGMP off. To view menu options. BMD00114. igmpflt Displays the IGMP Filtering Menu.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/igmp IGMP Configuration Menu [IGMP Menu] snoop mrouter igmpflt on off cur IGMP Snoop Menu Static Multicast Router Menu IGMP Filtering Menu Globally turn IGMP ON Globally turn IGMP OFF Display current IGMP configuration Table 190 describes the commands used to configure basic IGMP parameters. see page 342. To view menu options. on Globally turns IGMP on.

Enable/disable Fastleave processing in VLAN cur . The range is from 1 to 255 seconds. Table 191 IGMP Snoop Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/snoop) Command Syntax and Usage igmpv3 Displays the IGMP version 3 Menu. see page 344.Set report timeout mrto . 342 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. the switch removes the host from its IGMP table. and forwards it only to ports connected to those servers. The default is 255 seconds.Display current IGMP Snooping configuration IGMP Snooping allows the switch to forward multicast traffic only to those ports that request it. The switch learns which server hosts are interested in receiving multicast traffic.Set expected packet loss on subnet flood . IGMP snooping prevents multicast traffic from being flooded to all ports. qinterval <1-600> Configures the interval for IGMP Query Reports.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/igmp/snoop IGMP Snooping Configuration Menu [IGMP Snoop Menu] igmpv3 . if the proper conditions are met. To view menu options. mrto <1-600 seconds> Configures the timeout value for IGMP Membership Queries (mrouter).IGMP Version3 Snoop Menu timeout .Remove VLAN(s) from IGMP Snooping clear . the switch removes the multicast router from its IGMP table. Once the timeout value is reached.Remove all VLAN(s) from IGMP Snooping fastlv . timeout <1-255> Configures the timeout value for IGMP Membership Reports (host). Table 191 describes the commands used to configure IGMP Snooping. August 2009 . Once the timeout value is reached.BLADE OS 5.Send unregistered IPMC to CPU aggr .Add VLAN(s) to IGMP Snooping rem . if the conditions are met.Flood unregistered IPMC cpu .Set IGMP query interval robust . The default value is 125 seconds.Set source ip to use when proxying GSQ add . The range is from 1 to 600 seconds. The default is 10 seconds.Set multicast router timeout qintrval .Aggregate IGMP report srcip .

4. 192. The default setting is enabled. forward subsequent packets to the Mrouter(s) on the ingress VLAN. which adds an entry in the IPMC table.17. BMD00114. cpu enable|disable Configures the switch to forward unregistered IP multicast traffic to the MP. Note: If none of the IGMP hosts reside on the VLAN of the streaming server for a IPMC group. aggr enable|disable Enables or disables IGMP Membership Report aggregation. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 343 . drop subsequent packets with same IPMC. you must disable IGMP flooding to ensure that multicast data is forwarded across the VLANs for that IPMC group. which allows you to tune the switch for expected packet loss on the subnet. The default value is 2. The default setting is enabled. clear Removes all VLANs from IGMP Snooping. as follows: If no Mrouter is present. srcip <IP address (such as. If the subnet is expected to be lossy (high rate of packet loss). rem <VLAN number> Removes the selected VLAN(s) from IGMP Snooping.101)> Configures the source IP address used as a proxy for IGMP Group Specific Queries. increase the value.BLADE OS 5. If an Mrouter is present. then the switch drops all unregistered IPMC traffic. Note: If both flood and cpu are disabled. add <VLAN number> Adds the selected VLAN(s) to IGMP Snooping.1 Command Reference Table 191 IGMP Snoop Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/snoop) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage robust <2-10> Configures the IGMP Robustness variable. flood enable|disable Configures the switch to flood unregistered IP multicast traffic to all ports.

August 2009 . When disabled. /cfg/l3/igmp/snoop/igmpv3 IGMP Version 3 Configuration Menu [IGMP V3 Snoop Menu] sources . the switch drops IGMPv1 and IGMPv2 reports. if the host sends a Leave message. Fastleave allows the switch to immediately remove a port from the IGMP port list. This command is disabled by default.Enable/disable snooping EXCLUDE mode reports ena . cur Displays the current IGMP Snooping parameters. Use this command to limit the number of IGMP sources to provide more refined control. The default value is enabled. Table 192 IGMP V3 Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/snoop/igmpv3) Command Syntax and Usage sources <1-64> Configures the maximum number of IGMP multicast sources to snoop from within the group record.1 Command Reference Table 191 IGMP Snoop Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/snoop) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage fastlv <VLAN number> disable|enable Enables or disables Fastleave processing.Display current IGMP Snooping V3 configuration Table 192 describes the commands used to configure IGMP version 3. 344 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. ena Enables IGMP version 3. and the proper conditions are met. The default value is disabled.BLADE OS 5. The default value is enabled. v1v2 enable|disable Enables or disables snooping on IGMP version 1 and version 2 reports. When disabled. exclude enable|disable Enables or disables snooping on IGMPv3 Exclude Reports.Set the number of sources to snoop in group record v1v2 .Enable IGMPv3 Snooping dis . the switch ignores Exclude Reports.Disable IGMPv3 Snooping cur .Enable/disable snooping IGMPv1/v2 reports exclude .

2. cur Displays the current IGMP Static Multicast Router parameters. cur Displays the current IGMP version 3 configuration. Note – When you configure a static multicast router on a VLAN.BLADE OS 5. or 3) of the multicast router. Table 193 IGMP Static Multicast Router Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/mrouter) Command Syntax and Usage add <port number> <VLAN number> <IGMP version number> Selects a port/VLAN combination on which the static multicast router is connected. BMD00114.Remove all Static Multicast Router Ports cur . clear Clears all static multicast routers from the switch. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 345 . remove <port number> <VLAN number> <IGMP version number> Removes a static multicast router from the selected port/VLAN combination.Display current Multicast Router configuration Table 193 describes the commands used to configure a static multicast router. and configures the IGMP version (1.Remove port as Multicast Router Port clear .Add port as Multicast Router Port rem . /cfg/l3/igmp/mrouter IGMP Static Multicast Router Configuration Menu [Static Multicast Router Menu] add .1 Command Reference Table 192 IGMP V3 Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/snoop/igmpv3) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage dis Disables IGMP version 3. the switch continues to learn dynamic multicast routers on that VLAN.

August 2009 . see page 348. 346 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.IGMP Filtering Port Menu ena .Disable IGMP Filtering cur . see page 347. To view menu options. Table 194 IGMP Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt) Command Syntax and Usage filter <filter number (1-16)> Displays the IGMP Filter Definition Menu. dis Disables IGMP filtering globally. port <port number> Displays the IGMP Filtering Port Menu.Display current IGMP Filtering configuration Table 194 describes the commands used to configure an IGMP filter.IGMP Filter Definition Menu port . ena Enables IGMP filtering globally. To view menu options.Enable IGMP Filtering dis .BLADE OS 5. cur Displays the current IGMP Filtering parameters.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt IGMP Filtering Configuration Menu [IGMP Filter Menu] filter .

Display current IGMP filter configuration Table 195 describes the commands used to define an IGMP filter.0.Set IP Multicast address range action .BLADE OS 5.0. action allow|deny Allows or denies multicast traffic for the IP multicast addresses specified. Table 195 IGMP Filter Definition Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt/filter) Command Syntax and Usage range <IP multicast address (such as 224. ena Enables this IGMP filter. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 347 .Disable filter del . BMD00114.Set filter action ena .Delete filter cur .1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt/filter <filter number> IGMP Filter Definition Menu [IGMP Filter 1 Definition Menu] range . dis Disables this IGMP filter. del Deletes this filter’s parameter definitions.Enable filter dis . cur Displays the current IGMP filter.10)> <IP multicast address> Configures the range of IP multicast addresses for this filter.

Remove IGMP filter from port cur .Enable/disable IGMP filtering on port add . Table 196 IGMP Filter Port Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt/port) Command Syntax and Usage filt enable|disable Enables or disables IGMP filtering on this port. August 2009 . rem <filter number (1-16)> Removes an IGMP filter from this port. cur Displays the current IGMP filter parameters for this port.Add IGMP filter to port rem .BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt/port <port number> IGMP Filtering Port Configuration Menu [IGMP Port 1 Menu] filt . 348 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. add <filter number (1-16)> Adds an IGMP filter to this port.Display current IGMP filtering Port configuration Table 196 describes the commands used to configure a port for IGMP filtering.

For example: mycompany.Set IP address of secondary DNS server dname . use dotted decimal notation. dname <dotted DNS notation>|none Sets the default domain name used by the switch.4.17. To set an IPv4 address.com cur Displays the current Domain Name System settings.4.17. and for setting the default domain name served by the switch services. traceroute. DNS parameters must be configured prior to using hostname parameters with the ping.Set IP address of primary DNS server secon . use dotted decimal notation. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 349 . Table 197 Domain Name Service Menu Options (/cfg/l3/dns) Command Syntax and Usage prima <IPv4 address (such as 192.101)> You are prompted to set the IP address for your secondary DNS server. secon <IPv4 address (such as 192. BMD00114.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/dns Domain Name System Configuration Menu [Domain Name System Menu] prima .Set default domain name cur . To set an IPv4 address. and tftp commands.101)> You are prompted to set the IP address for your primary DNS server.BLADE OS 5.Display current DNS configuration The Domain Name System (DNS) Menu is used for defining the primary and secondary DNS servers on your local network.

use dotted decimal notation.Globally turn BOOTP relay OFF cur . on Globally turns on BOOTP relay. BOOTP relay is turned off by default.Globally turn BOOTP relay ON off .101)> Sets the IP address of the second BOOTP server. use dotted decimal notation. off Globally turns off BOOTP relay.4.17. cur Displays the current BOOTP relay configuration. addr2 <IPv4 address (such as 192. August 2009 .101)> Sets the IP address of the BOOTP server. To set an IPv4 address. The BOOTP configuration enables the switch to forward a client request for an IP address to two DHCP/BOOTP servers with IP addresses that have been configured on the switch.Set IP address of BOOTP server addr2 .17.BLADE OS 5.4.Display current BOOTP relay configuration The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) Relay Menu is used to allow hosts to obtain their configurations from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. To set an IPv4 address. Table 198 Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bootp) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IPv4 address (such as 192.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/bootp Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu [Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu] addr .Set IP address of second BOOTP server on . 350 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.

BLADE OS has extended VRRP to include virtual servers as well. see page 361. To view menu options. see the “High Availability” chapter in the Application Guide. If the master fails. used to combine all virtual routers together as one logical entity. BMD00114. VRRP is disabled. one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. allowing for full active/active redundancy between switches. To view menu options. group Displays the VRRP virtual router group menu. Table 199 VRRP Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp) Command Syntax and Usage vr <virtual router number (1-255)> Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Menu. if <interface number> Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Interface Menu. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master. To view menu options.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp VRRP Configuration Menu [Virtual Router vr group if track hotstan on off cur Redundancy Protocol Menu] VRRP Virtual Router menu VRRP Virtual Router Group menu VRRP Interface menu VRRP Priority Tracking menu Enable/disable hot-standby processing Globally turn VRRP ON Globally turn VRRP OFF Display current VRRP configuration Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. Group options must be configured when using two or more switches in a hot-standby failover configuration where only one switch is active at any given time. By default. see page 358.BLADE OS 5. This menu is used for configuring virtual routers on this switch. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 351 . based on a number of priority criteria. see page 353. For more information on VRRP.

August 2009 . This menu is used for weighting the criteria used when modifying priority levels in the master router election process.1 Command Reference Table 199 VRRP Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Tracking Menu. By default.BLADE OS 5. see page 362. this option is disabled. To view menu options. on Globally enables VRRP on this switch. in which two or more switches provide redundancy for each other. off Globally disables VRRP on this switch. 352 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. cur Displays the current VRRP parameters. hotstan disable|enable Enables or disables hot standby processing.

vrid <virtual router ID (1-255)> Defines the virtual router ID. each participating VRRP device must be configured with the same virtual router: one that shares the same vrid and addr combination.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number> Virtual Router Configuration Menu [VRRP Virtual track vrid addr if prio adver preem ena dis del cur Router 1 Menu] . see page 356.Set IP address .Set virtual router ID . This is used in conjunction with addr (below) to define a virtual router on this switch. To view menu options.Enable or disable preemption .Priority Tracking Menu .Set advertisement interval .Delete virtual router . BMD00114.Disable virtual router . Table 200 VRRP Virtual Router Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for this virtual router. All vrid values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router’s IP interface belongs.Set renter priority . Tracking is an BLADE OS proprietary extension to VRRP. The default value is 1. To create a pool of VRRP-enabled routing devices which can provide redundancy to each other.Set interface number . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 353 .Enable virtual router . a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address. The vrid for standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 255. used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. Virtual routers are disabled by default.Display current VRRP virtual router configuration This menu is used for configuring virtual routers for this switch.BLADE OS 5. A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address. On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router.

this switch is considered the “owner” of the defined virtual router. adver <1-255> Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements.0. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface. August 2009 . this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same). prio <1-254> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual server. if this virtual router is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master. The default value is 1. the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest).101)> Defines the IP address for this virtual router using dotted decimal notation. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. An owner has a special priority of 255 (highest) and will always assume the role of master router. If there is a tie.0. The default interface is 1.0. The default address is 0. this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control.1 Command Reference Table 200 VRRP Virtual Router Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as. This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds.BLADE OS 5. the device with the highest IP interface address wins.4. this option is enabled. By default. 354 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. preem disable|enable Enables or disables master preemption. This pre-emption occurs even if the preem option below is disabled. ena Enables this virtual router. This is used in conjunction with the vrid (above) to configure the same virtual router on each participating VRRP device. 192. The default value is 100. When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track). When enabled. Note that even when preem is disabled. During the master router election process. if <interface number> Selects a switch IP interface. this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. even if it must pre-empt another virtual router which has assumed master routing authority. the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins.17. If the IP interface has the same IP address as the addr option above.

1 Command Reference Table 200 VRRP Virtual Router Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage dis Disables this virtual router. BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 355 . del Deletes this virtual router from the switch configuration. cur Displays the current configuration information for this virtual router.BLADE OS 5.

BLADE OS 5. This command is disabled by default. August 2009 . the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each virtual router in master mode on this switch. continuously updating virtual router priority levels when enabled.” A virtual server router is defined as any virtual router whose IP address (addr) is the same as any configured virtual server IP address. and ports below) apply to standard virtual routers. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP interface active on this switch.Enable/disable tracking master virtual routers . This command is disabled by default. ifs disable|enable When enabled. Criteria are tracked dynamically. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. If the virtual router pre-emption option (see preem in Table 200 on page 353) is enabled. increasing routing and load balancing efficiency.Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports . An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN.Enable/disable tracking other interfaces . Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results. 356 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. This is useful for making sure that traffic for any particular client/server pairing are handled by the same switch. ifs.Display current VRRP virtual router configuration This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool of virtual routers. the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through the VRRP Tracking Menu (see page 362). Some tracking criteria (vrs. otherwise called “virtual interface routers. Table 201 Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track) Command Syntax and Usage vrs disable|enable When enabled. this virtual router can assume master routing authority when its priority level rises above that of the current master.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number>/track Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration Menu [VRRP Virtual vrs ifs ports cur Router 1 Priority Tracking Menu] .

BMD00114. cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 357 . the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. This command is disabled by default.1 Command Reference Table 201 Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track) Command Syntax and Usage ports disable|enable When enabled. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master.BLADE OS 5.

if <interface number> Selects a switch IP interface.Set renter priority . The default virtual router ID is 1. see page 360.Enable virtual router . The default switch IP interface number is 1. which forces all virtual routers on the switch to either be master or backup as a group.Set interface number .Delete virtual router .Display current VRRP virtual router configuration The Virtual Router Group menu is used for associating all virtual routers into a single logical virtual router. On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router. 358 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. All vrid values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router’s IP interface (see if below) belongs. where only one switch is active at any time.Enable or disable preemption .Priority Tracking Menu .Set advertisement interval .BLADE OS 5. a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address. A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address. To view menu options. vrid <virtual router ID (1-255)> Defines the virtual router ID. used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. Tracking is an BLADE OS proprietary extension to VRRP. August 2009 . Table 202 Virtual Router Group Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for the virtual router group. Note – This option is required to be configured only when using at least two switches in a hot-standby failover configuration. The vrid for standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 255.Disable virtual router .Set virtual router ID .1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/group Virtual Router Group Configuration Menu [VRRP Virtual track vrid if prio adver preem ena dis del cur Router Group Menu] .

the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. ena Enables the virtual router group. If there is a tie. del Deletes the virtual router group from the switch configuration. this option is enabled. the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). By default. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface. preem disable|enable Enables or disables master preemption. dis Disables the virtual router group.BLADE OS 5. When enabled. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same). cur Displays the current configuration information for the virtual router group. The default is 1. This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. adver <1-255> Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements.1 Command Reference Table 202 Virtual Router Group Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage prio <1-254> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group. Note that even when preem is disabled. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 359 . if the virtual router group is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master. When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track). During the master router election process. BMD00114. the device with the highest IP interface address wins. this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. The default value is 100.

360 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router. This command is disabled by default. Table 203 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu (/cfg/l3/vr/group/track) Command Syntax and Usage ifs disable|enable When enabled. This command is disabled by default. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/group/track Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu [Virtual Router ifs ports cur Group Priority Tracking Menu] Enable/disable tracking other interfaces Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports Display current VRRP Group Tracking configuration Note – If Virtual Router Group Tracking is enabled. The tracking setting for the other individual virtual routers will be ignored. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP interface active on this switch.BLADE OS 5. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. August 2009 . then the tracking option will be available only under group option. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. ports disable|enable When enabled. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN.

Table 204 VRRP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/if) Command Syntax and Usage auth none|password Defines the type of authentication that will be used: none (no authentication). The IP interface itself is not deleted. passw <password> Defines a plain text password up to eight characters long.BLADE OS 5. or password (password authentication).1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/if <interface number> VRRP Interface Configuration Menu Note – The interface-number represents the IP interface on which authentication parameters must be configured. This password will be added to each VRRP packet transmitted by this interface when password authentication is chosen (see auth above). [VRRP Interface auth passw del cur 1 Menu] Set authentication types Set plain-text password Delete interface Display current VRRP interface configuration This menu is used for configuring VRRP authentication parameters for the IP interfaces used with the virtual routers. del Clears the authentication configuration parameters for this IP interface. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 361 . BMD00114. cur Displays the current configuration for this IP interface’s authentication parameters.

BLADE OS 5.Set priority increment for VLAN switch port tracking cur . The default value is 2. The default value is 2. Note – These priority tracking options only define increment values. The default value is 2. ports <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (0 through 254) for active ports on the virtual router’s VLAN.Display current VRRP Priority Tracking configuration This menu is used for setting weights for the various criteria used to modify priority levels during the master router election process. cur Displays the current configuration of priority tracking increment values. August 2009 . the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through this menu. 362 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. These options do not affect the VRRP master router election process until options under the VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu (see page 356) are enabled. ifs <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (0 through 254) for active IP interfaces detected on this switch. Table 205 VRRP Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track) Command Syntax and Usage vrs <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (0 through 254) for virtual routers in master mode detected on this switch.Set priority increment for virtual router tracking ifs .Set priority increment for IP interface tracking ports . Each time one of the tracking criteria is met (see “VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu” on page 356).1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/track VRRP Tracking Configuration Menu [VRRP Tracking Menu] vrs .

August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 363 . For more information about ServerMobility. scheme vmac|chassis|switch Selects the ServerMobility encoding scheme. as follows: vmac: Use the port’s virtual MAC address chassis: Use the chassis ID switch: Use the switch name add <port number> Configures a port as a Server Mobility port. BMD00114. see the BLADE OS Application Guide. Table 206 ServerMobility Menu Options (/cfg/l3/sm) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the Server Mobility port menu.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/sm ServerMobility™ Configuration Menu [ServerMobility port recovery default scheme add rem filter nsmrelay on off cur Menu] Server Mobility Port Menu Server Mobility Auto-Recovery Menu Set ServerMobility configuration to factory default Set ServerMobility encoding scheme Add ServerMobility ports Remove ServerMobility ports Enable/Disable DHCP request message filters on ports Enable/Disable relay on non-ServerMobility ports Globally turn ServerMobility ON Globally turn ServerMobility OFF Display current ServerMobility configuration The following table describes the Server Mobility Configuration menu options. rem <port number> Removes the port from Server Mobility.BLADE OS 5. default Resets the Server Mobility parameters to their factory default values. recovery Displays the Server Mobility Auto-Recovery menu.

364 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. so that the DHCP server receives only DHCP requests from the switch. The default value is disabled. When enabled. off Globally turns Server Mobility off. nsmrelay e|d Enables or disables BOOTP Relay for all ports that have ServerMobility disabled.1 Command Reference Table 206 ServerMobility Menu Options (/cfg/l3/sm) (continued) Command Syntax and Usage filter <port number> e|d Enables or disables filtering DHCP request information on the port.BLADE OS 5. DHCP requests from the server are filtered. cur Displays the current ServerMobility configuration settings. August 2009 . on Globally turns Server Mobility on.

August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 365 . remback <port number> Removes the backup port. cur Displays the current ServerMobility port settings.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/sm/port <port number> ServerMobility™ Port Configuration Menu [Port 2 Menu] addback .Display current configuration The following table describes the Server Mobility Port menu options.Set backup port remback . Table 207 ServerMobility Port Options (/cfg/l3/sm/port) Command Syntax and Usage addback <port number> Adds a backup port to the selected port.Remove backup port cur . BMD00114.BLADE OS 5.

ena Enables ServerMobility Auto-Recovery.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/sm/recovery ServerMobility™ Auto-Recovery Configuration Menu [Server Auto-Recovery Menu] time . The default value is 5 seconds.Set auto-recovery time ena . the backup port sends a DCHP request after the timer expires.Display current configuration Auto-Recovery allows a backup port to automatically take over for a failed ServerMobility port.BLADE OS 5. Table 208 ServerMobility Auto-Recovery Options (/cfg/l3/sm/recovery) Command Syntax and Usage time <1-255> Configures the auto-recovery timer. 366 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. August 2009 .Enable auto-recovery dis . cur Displays the current ServerMobility Auto-Recovery settings.Disable auto-recovery cur . in seconds. dis Enables ServerMobility Auto-Recovery. If the active port fails (link state is down). The following table describes the Server Mobility Auto-Recovery menu options. The default setting is disabled.

del Deletes the selected loopback interface. BMD00114.Disable IP interface del . Table 209 IP Loopback Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/loopif) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address> Defines the loopback interface IP address.Delete IP interface cur . dis Disables the loopback interface. A loopback interface is always accessible over the network.1 Command Reference /cfg/l3/loopif <interface number (1-5)> IP Loopback Interface Configuration Menu [IP Loopback Interface 2 Menu] addr .Enable IP interface dis . August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 367 .Set IP address mask . mask <subnet mask> Defines the loopback interface subnet mask. cur Displays the current IP loopback interface parameters.BLADE OS 5. ena Enables the loopback interface.Set subnet mask ena .Display current interface configuration An IP loopback interface is not connected to any physical port.

To view menu options. alarm <1-65535> Displays the RMON Alarm Configuration menu. see page 371. event <1-65535> Displays the RMON Event Configuration menu. Table 210 describes the Remote Monitoring (RMON) configuration menu options. 368 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114.1 Command Reference /cfg/rmon Remote Monitoring Configuration [RMON Menu] hist event alarm cur RMON History Menu RMON Event Menu RMON Alarm Menu Display current RMON configuration Remote Monitoring (RMON) allows you to monitor traffic flowing through the switch. The RMON MIB is described in RFC 1757. see page 369.BLADE OS 5. cur Displays the current RMON parameters. August 2009 . see page 370. To view menu options. Table 210 Remote Monitoring (RMON) Menu Options (/cfg/rmon) Command Syntax and Usage hist <1-65535> Displays the RMON History Configuration menu. To view menu options.

cur Displays the current RMON History parameters.3.2. intrval <1-3600> Configures the time interval over which the data is sampled for each bucket. Table 211 RMON History Menu Options (/cfg/rmon/hist) Command Syntax and Usage ifoid <1-127 characters> Configures the interface MIB Object Identifier. The default value is 1800. as follows: 1.1. BMD00114. The default value is 30.x where x is the ifIndex rbnum <1-65535> Configures the requested number of buckets.2.2. owner <1-127 characters> Enter a text string that identifies the person or entity that uses this History index.1 Command Reference /cfg/rmon/hist <1-65535> RMON History Configuration Menu [RMON History ifoid rbnum intrval owner delete cur 2 Menu] Set interface MIB object to monitor Set the number of requested buckets Set polling interval Set owner for the RMON group of statistics Delete this history and restore defaults Display current history configuration Table 211 describes the RMON History Menu options.1. delete Deletes the selected History index. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 369 . The maximum number of buckets that can be granted is 50.BLADE OS 5. which is the number of discrete time intervals over which data is to be saved. The IFOID must correspond to the standard interface OID.6.1.1.

Delete this event and restore defaults cur .Set event type owner .Display current event configuration Table 212 describes the RMON Event Menu options. an SNMP trap is sent to the management station.Set description for the event type . an entry is made in the log table and sent to the configured syslog host. owner <1-127 characters> Enter a text string that identifies the person or entity that uses this event index. 370 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu BMD00114. For log events. For trap events. cur Displays the current RMON Event parameters.Set owner for the event delete . August 2009 .1 Command Reference /cfg/rmon/event <1-65535> RMON Event Configuration Menu [RMON Event 2 Menu] descn . type none|log|trap|both Selects the type of notification provided for this event.BLADE OS 5. Table 212 RMON Event Menu Options (/cfg/rmon/event) Command Syntax and Usage descn <1-127 characters> Enter a text string to describe the event. delete Deletes the selected RMON Event index.

Set rising threshold . Table 213 RMON Alarm Menu Options (/cfg/rmon/alarm) Command Syntax and Usage oid <1-127 characters> Configures an alarm MIB Object Identifier. or time interval. delta—delta value.Display current alarm configuration The Alarm RMON group can track rising or falling values for a MIB object. The MIB object must be a counter.Set MIB oid datasource to monitor . intrval <1-65535> Configures the time interval over which data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds. almtype rising|falling|either Configures the alarm type as rising. as follows: abs—absolute value. August 2009 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 371 . BMD00114. gauge.BLADE OS 5.Set alarm interval . the value of the selected variable is compared directly with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval. the value of the selected variable at the last sample is subtracted from the current value.Set owner for the alarm . sample abs|delta Configures the method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds.Set startup alarm type . Each alarm index must correspond to an event index that triggers once the alarm threshold is crossed. or either (rising or falling). Table 213 describes the RMON Alarm Menu options.Set event index to fire on rising threshold crossing . and the difference compared with the thresholds.Delete this alarm and restore defaults .1 Command Reference /cfg/rmon/alarm <1-65535> RMON Alarm Configuration Menu [RMON Alarm 2 oid intrval sample almtype rlimit flimit revtidx fevtidx owner delete cur Menu] . integer.Set sample type . falling. The default value is 1800.Set falling threshold .Set event index to fire on falling threshold crossing .

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

Table 213 RMON Alarm Menu Options (/cfg/rmon/alarm) (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

rlimit <-2147483647 - 2147483647> Configures the rising threshold for the sampled statistic. When the current sampled value is greater than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was less than this threshold, a single event is generated. flimit <-2147483647 - 214748364) Configures the falling threshold for the sampled statistic. When the current sampled value is less than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was greater than this threshold, a single event is generated. revtidx <1-65535> Configures the rising alarm event index that is triggered when a rising threshold is crossed. fevtidx <1-65535> Configures the falling alarm event index that is triggered when a falling threshold is crossed. owner <1-127 characters> Enter a text string that identifies the person or entity that uses this alarm index. delete Deletes the selected RMON Alarm index. cur Displays the current RMON Alarm parameters.

372

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/cfg/sfd

Server Link Failure Detection Configuration
[Server Link Failure Detection Menu] ltm - Link to Monitor Menu lte - Link to Enable Menu on - Globally turn Server Link Failure Detection ON off - Globally turn Server Link Failure Detection OFF cur - Display current Server Link Failure Detection configuration

Server Link Failure Detection (SFD) allows the switch to monitor specific downlink ports to detect server link failures. When all of the server links in the Link to Monitor (LtM) fail, the switch enables the interconnect ports. The following table describes the Server Link Failure Detection (SFD) Configuration Menu options. Table 214 Server Link Failure Detection (SFD) Menu Options (/cfg/sfd)
Command Syntax and Usage

ltm Displays the SFD Link to Monitor menu. To view menu options, see page 374. ltd Displays the SFD Link to Disable menu. To view menu options, see page 375. on Globally turns on Server Link Failure Detection. off Globally turns off Server Link Failure Detection. cur Displays the current SFD configuration parameters.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

373

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/sfd/ltm

SFD Link to Monitor Menu
[Link to Monitor Menu] addport - Add port to Link to Monitor remport - Remove port from Link to Monitor addtrnk - Add trunk to Link to Monitor remtrnk - Remove trunk from Link to Monitor addkey - Add adminkey to Link to Monitor remkey - Remove adminkey from Link to Monitor cur - Display current LtM configuration

The following table describes the Link to Monitor (LtM) Menu options. The LtM can consist of only downlink ports (1-16) or a single trunk containing only downlink ports. Table 215 SFD Link to Monitor Menu Options (/cfg/sfd/ltm)
Command Syntax and Usage

addport <port number> Adds a port to the LtM. Only downlink ports (1-16) are allowed in the SFD LtM. remport <port number> Removes a port from the LtM. addtrnk <trunk number> Adds a trunk group to the LtM. The LtM trunk group can contain only downlink ports (1-16). remtrnk <trunk number> Removes a trunk group from the LtM. addkey <1-65535> Adds an LACP admin key to the LtM. LACP trunks formed with this admin key will be included in the SFD LtM. remkey <1-65535> Removes an LACP admin key from the LtM. cur Displays the current SFD Link to Monitor parameters.

374

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/sfd/lte

SFD Link to Enable Menu
[Link to Enable addport remport addtrnk remtrnk addkey remkey cur Menu] Add port to Link to Enable Remove port from Link to Enable Add trunk to Link to Enable Remove trunk from Link to Enable Add adminkey to Link to Enable Remove adminkey from Link to Enable Display current Link to Enable configuration

The following table describes the SFD Link to Enable (LtE) Menu options. The LtE can consist of only interconnect ports or a single trunk containing only interconnect ports. Table 216 SFD Link to Enable Menu Options (/cfg/sfd/lte)
Command Syntax and Usage

addport <port number> Adds a port to the LtE. Only interconnect ports are allowed in the LtE. remport <port number> Removes a port from the LtE. addtrnk <trunk number> Adds a trunk group to the LtE. The LtE trunk group can contain only interconnect ports. remtrnk <trunk number> Removes a trunk group from the LtE. addkey <1-65535> Adds an LACP admin key to the LtE. LACP trunks formed with this admin key will be included in the LtE. remkey <1-65535> Removes an LACP admin key from the LtE. cur Displays the current SFD Link to Enable parameters.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

375

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/cfg/setup

Setup
The setup program steps you through configuring the system date and time, BOOTP, IP, Spanning Tree, port speed/mode, VLAN parameters, and IP interfaces. To start the setup program, at the Configuration# prompt, enter:
Configuration# setup

For a complete description of how to use setup, see “First-Time Configuration” on page 23.

/cfg/dump

Dump
The dump program writes the current switch configuration to the terminal screen. To start the dump program, at the Configuration# prompt, enter:
Configuration# dump

The configuration is displayed with parameters that have been changed from the default values. The screen display can be captured, edited, and placed in a script file, which can be used to configure other switches through a Telnet connection. When using Telnet to configure a new switch, paste the configuration commands from the script file at the command line prompt of the switch. The active configuration can also be saved or loaded via TFTP, as described on page 377.

376

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/cfg/ptcfg <FTP/TFTP server> <filename>

Saving the Active Switch Configuration
When the ptcfg command is used, the switch’s active configuration commands (as displayed using /cfg/dump) will be uploaded to the specified script configuration file on the FTP/TFTP server. To start the switch configuration upload, at the Configuration# prompt, enter:
Configuration# ptcfg <FTP or TFTP server> <filename>

Where server is the FTP/TFTP server IPv4 address or hostname, and filename is the name of the target script configuration file. Note – The output file is formatted with line-breaks but no carriage returns—the file cannot be viewed with editors that require carriage returns (such as Microsoft Notepad). Note – If the FTP/TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system, the specified ptcfg file must exist prior to executing the ptcfg command and must be writable (set with proper permission, and not locked by any application). The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current configuration data.

/cfg/gtcfg <FTP/TFTP server> <filename>

Restoring the Active Switch Configuration
When the gtcfg command is used, the active configuration will be replaced with the commands found in the specified configuration file. The file can contain a full switch configuration or a partial switch configuration. The configuration loaded using gtcfg is not activated until the apply command is used. If the apply command is found in the configuration script file loaded using this command, the apply action will be performed automatically. To start the switch configuration download, at the Configuration# prompt, enter:
Configuration# gtcfg <FTP or TFTP server> <filename>

Where server is the FTP/TFTP server IPv4 address or hostname, and filename is the name of the target script configuration file.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

377

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

378

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

CHAPTER 7

The Operations Menu
The Operations Menu is generally used for commands that affect switch performance immediately, but do not alter permanent switch configurations. For example, you can use the Operations Menu to immediately disable a port (without the need to apply or save the change), with the understanding that when the switch is reset, the port returns to its normally configured operation.

/oper

Operations Menu
[Operations Menu] port - Operational Port Menu vrrp - Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu passwd - Change current user password clrlog - Clear syslog messages tnetsshc - Close all telnet/SSH connections ntpreq - Send NTP request

BMD00114, August 2009

379

ntpreq Allows the user to send requests to the NTP server. passwd <1-128 characters> Allows the user to change the password. You need to enter the current password in use for validation.BLADE OS 5. August 2009 . To view menu options. To view menu options. tnetsshc Closes all open Telnet and SSH connections. see page 383. clrlog Clears all Syslog messages. Table 217 Operations Menu (/oper) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the Operational Port Menu. 380 Chapter 7: The Operations Menu BMD00114. see page 381.1 Command Reference The commands of the Operations Menu enable you to alter switch operational characteristics without affecting switch configuration. vrrp Displays the Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu.

Enable FDB Learning ldis .x Menu rmon .Enable port dis .8021.Disable port lena . BMD00114. ena Temporarily enables the port.Enable/disable RMON for port ena . lena Temporarily enables FDB learning on the port. To view menu options. rmon e|d Enables or disables Remote Monitoring (RMON) for the port.Current port state Operations-level port options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling a port.Disable FDB Learning cur .1X Port Menu.BLADE OS 5. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. see page 382. Table 218 Operations-Level Port Menu Options (/oper/port) Command Syntax and Usage 8021x Displays the 802. ldis Temporarily disables FDB learning on the port. The default setting is disabled. August 2009 Chapter 7: The Operations Menu 381 . The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. dis Temporarily disables the port. cur Displays the current settings for the port. and for re-setting the port.1 Command Reference /oper/port <port number> Operations-Level Port Options Menu [Operations Port 1 Menu] 8021x .

the port is placed in unauthorized state. depending on the 802.1X mode is configured as auto. 382 Chapter 7: The Operations Menu BMD00114.1X access control on this port reauth .1X Operation Menu] reset . August 2009 .1 Command Reference /oper/port <port number>/8021x Operations-Level Port 802. The following actions take place. and authentication is not required. then authentication is initiated. This command only applies if the port’s 802. auto . reauth Re-authenticates the supplicant (client) attached to the port.1X port configuration: force unauth . force auth .the port is placed in unauthorized state.Initiate reauthentication on this port now Operations-level port 802.1X Menu Options (/oper/port x/8021x) Command Syntax and Usage reset Re-initializes the 802.1X options are used to temporarily set 802.1X Options Menu [802.BLADE OS 5.Reinitialize 802.1X access-control parameters for the port.the port is placed in authorized state. and traffic is blocked. Table 219 Operations-Level Port 802.1X parameters for a port.

When this command is executed. This is generally used for passing master control back to a preferred switch once the preferred switch has been returned to service after a failure. BMD00114. the virtual router forced into backup mode by this command will resume master control in the following cases: This switch owns the virtual router (the IP addresses of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same) This switch’s virtual router has a higher priority and preemption is enabled.1 Command Reference /oper/vrrp Operations-Level VRRP Options Menu [VRRP Operations Menu] back . August 2009 Chapter 7: The Operations Menu 383 . the current master gives up control and initiates a new election by temporarily advertising its own priority level as 0 (lowest). There are no other virtual routers available to take master control. After the new election.Set virtual router to backup Table 220 Operations-Level VRRP Menu Options (/oper/vrrp) Command Syntax and Usage back <virtual router number (1-255)> Forces the specified master virtual router on this switch into backup mode.BLADE OS 5.

1 Command Reference 384 Chapter 7: The Operations Menu BMD00114. August 2009 .BLADE OS 5.

August 2009 385 .Prompt for selectable boot mode gtimg . refer to “Switch Images and Configuration Files” on page 448.CHAPTER 8 The Boot Options Menu To use the Boot Options Menu.Upload selected software image via TFTP reset . you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator. The Boot Options Menu provides options for: Selecting a switch software image to be used when the switch is next reset Selecting a configuration block to be used when the switch is next reset Downloading or uploading a new software image to the switch via FTP/TFTP In addition to the Boot Menu.Select config block to use on next boot mode . To use SNMP.Download new software image via TFTP ptimg .Select software image to use on next boot conf .Display current boot options Each of these options is discussed in greater detail in the following sections. you can use a Web browser or SNMP to work with switch image and configuration files.Select CLI mode to use on next boot prompt .Reset switch [WARNING: Restarts Spanning Tree] cur . BMD00114. /boot Boot Menu [Boot Options Menu] image .

When you load new software. you can upgrade the software running on your switch. you would probably load the new image software into image2. as well as boot software. August 2009 . The typical upgrade process for the software image consists of the following steps: Place the new image onto a FTP or TFTP server on your network. select System > Config/Image Control. you must specify where it should be placed: either into image1. On the support site. This lets you test the new software and reload the original active image (stored in image1). Loading New Software to Your Switch The switch can store up to two different software images. click on software updates. or on a local computer.1 Command Reference Updating the Switch Software Image The switch software image is the executable code running on the HP GbE2c L2/L3 Ethernet Blade Switch. Using the BBI You can use the Browser-Based Interface to load software onto the switch. As new versions of the image are released. For example. On the switch. perform the following steps to load a software image: 1. if your active image is currently loaded into image1. or boot. Transfer the new image to your switch. In the Navigation Window. called boot. The software image to load can reside in one of the following locations: FTP server TFTP server Local computer After you log onto the BBI. image2. use the /boot/cur command to determine the current software version. if needed.BLADE OS 5. Select the new software image to be loaded into switch memory the next time the switch is reset. Click the Configure context button in the toolbar. 2. A version of the image ships with the switch. called image1 and image2. and comes pre-installed on the device. 386 Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu BMD00114.

go to Step 4. If you are loading software from a FTP/TFTP server. August 2009 Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu 387 . BMD00114. If you are loading software from your computer (HTTP client).1 Command Reference The Switch Image and Configuration Management page appears. 3.BLADE OS 5. enter the server’s information in the FTP/TFTP Settings section.

use the following procedure to download the new software to your switch. 388 Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu BMD00114. select the image version you want to replace (Image for Transfer). Once the image has loaded. Enter name of file on FTP/TFTP server: <filename> The exact form of the name will vary by server.BLADE OS 5. Enter the hostname or IP address of the FTP or TFTP server. Using the CLI To load a new software image to your switch. If you are loading software from a FTP/TFTP server. Enter the name of the new software file on the server. the file location is normally relative to the FTP or TFTP directory (usually /tftpboot). select the file and click OK.1 Command Reference 4. enter the file name and click Get Image. enter: Boot Options# gtimg 2. August 2009 . If you are loading software from your computer. When the above requirements are met. See “Domain Name System Configuration Menu” on page 349. Click Download via Browser. Enter hostname or IP address of FTP/TFTP server: <name or IP address> 4. However. click Browse. In the Image Settings section. Enter the name of the switch software to be replaced: Enter name of switch software image to be replaced ["image1"/"image2"/"boot"]: <image> 3. At the Boot Options# prompt. 1. In the File Upload Dialog. the page refreshes to show the new software. you need the following: The image or boot software loaded on a FTP/TFTP server on your network The hostname or IP address of the FTP/TFTP server The name of the new software image or boot file Note – The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames.

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

5. Enter your username for the server, if applicable.
Enter username for FTP server or hit return for TFTP server: <username> or <Enter>

6. The system prompts you to confirm your request. You should next select a software image to run, as described below.

Selecting a Software Image to Run
You can select which software image (image1 or image2) you want to run in switch memory for the next reboot. 1. At the Boot Options# prompt, enter:
Boot Options# image

2. Enter the name of the image you want the switch to use upon the next boot. The system informs you of which image is currently set to be loaded at the next reset, and prompts you to enter a new choice:
Currently set to use switch software "image1" on next reset. Specify new image to use on next reset ["image1"/"image2"]:

Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch
You can upload a software image from the switch to a FTP or TFTP server. 1. At the Boot Options# prompt, enter:
Boot Options# ptimg

2. The system prompts you for information. Enter the desired image:
Enter name of switch software image to be uploaded ["image1"|"image2"|"boot"]: <image>

3.

Enter the name or the IP address of the FTP or TFTP server:
Enter hostname or IP address of FTP/TFTP server: <name or IP address>

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu

389

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

4. Enter the name of the file into which the image will be uploaded on the FTP or TFTP server:
Enter name of file on FTP/TFTP server: <filename>

5. The system then requests confirmation of what you have entered. To have the file uploaded, enter Y.
image2 currently contains Software Version 5.1 that was downloaded at 0:23:39 Thu Jan 4, 2009. Upload will transfer image2 (2788535 bytes) to file "image1" on FTP/TFTP server 192.1.1.1. Confirm upload operation (y/n) ? y

Selecting a Configuration Block
When you make configuration changes to the switch, you must save the changes so that they are retained beyond the next time the switch is reset. When you perform the save command, your new configuration changes are placed in the active configuration block. The previous configuration is copied into the backup configuration block. There is also a factory configuration block. This holds the default configuration set by the factory when your switch was manufactured. Under certain circumstances, it may be desirable to reset the switch configuration to the default. This can be useful when a custom-configured switch is moved to a network environment where it will be re-configured for a different purpose. Use the following procedure to set which configuration block you want the switch to load the next time it is reset: 1. At the Boot Options# prompt, enter:
Boot Options# conf

2. Enter the name of the configuration block you want the switch to use: The system informs you of which configuration block is currently set to be loaded at the next reset, and prompts you to enter a new choice:
Currently set to use active configuration block on next reset. Specify new block to use ["active"/"backup"/"factory"]:

390

Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

Resetting the Switch
You can reset the switch to make your software image file and configuration block changes occur. Note – Resetting the switch causes the Spanning Tree Group to restart. This process can be lengthy, depending on the topology of your network. To reset the switch, at the Boot Options# prompt, enter:
>> Boot Options# reset

You are prompted to confirm your request.

Accessing the ISCLI
The default command-line interface for the switch is the BLADE OS CLI. To access the ISCLI, enter the following command and reset the switch:
Main# boot/mode iscli

To access the BLADE OS CLI, enter the following command from the ISCLI and reload the switch:
Switch (config)# boot cli-mode bladeos-cli

Users can select the CLI mode upon login, if the /boot/prompt command is enabled. Only an administrator can view and enable /boot/prompt. When /boot/prompt is enabled, the first user to log in can select the CLI mode. Subsequent users must use the selected CLI mode, until all users have logged out.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu

391

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

392

Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

CHAPTER 9

The Maintenance Menu
The Maintenance Menu is used to manage dump information and forward database information. It also includes a debugging menu to help with troubleshooting.

/maint

Maintenance Menu
Note – To use the Maintenance Menu, you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator.
[Maintenance Menu] sys - System Maintenance Menu fdb - Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu debug - Debugging Menu arp - ARP Cache Manipulation Menu route - IP Route Manipulation Menu lldp - LLDP Cache Manipulation Menu igmp - IGMP Multicast Group Menu uudmp - Uuencode FLASH dump ptdmp - Upload FLASH dump via FTP/TFTP cldmp - Clear FLASH dump tsdmp - Tech support dump pttsdmp - Upload tech support dump via FTP/TFTP

Dump information contains internal switch state data that is written to flash memory on the switch after any one of the following occurs: The watchdog timer forces a switch reset. The purpose of the watchdog timer is to reboot the switch if the switch software freezes. The switch detects a hardware or software problem that requires a reboot.

BMD00114, August 2009

393

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

Table 221 Maintenance Menu (/maint)
Command Syntax and Usage

sys Displays the System Maintenance Menu. To view menu options, see page 395. fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu. To view menu options, see page 396. debug Displays the Debugging Menu. To view menu options, see page 397. arp Displays the ARP Cache Manipulation Menu. To view menu options, see page 398. route Displays the IP Route Manipulation Menu. To view menu options, see page 399. lldp Displays the LLDP Cache Manipulation Menu. To view menu options, see page 400. igmp Displays the IGMP Maintenance Menu. To view menu options, see page 401. uudmp Displays dump information in uuencoded format. For details, see page 404. ptdmp <host name> <file name> Saves the system dump information via FTP/TFTP. For details, see page 404. cldmp Clears dump information from flash memory. For details, see page 405. tsdmp Dumps all switch information, statistics, and configuration.You can log the tsdump output into a file. pttsdmp Redirects the technical support dump (tsdmp) to an external TFTP server.

394

Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/maint/sys

System Maintenance Menu
This menu is reserved for use by Technical Support personnel. The options are used to perform system debugging.
[System Maintenance Menu] flags - Set NVRAM flag word tmask - Set MP trace mask word

Table 222 System Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/sys)
Command Syntax and Usage

flags <new NVRAM flags word as 0xXXXXXXXX> This command sets the flags that are used for debugging purposes by Technical Support personnel. tmask <new trace mask word as 0xXXXXXXXX> [p] This command sets the trace mask that is used for debugging purposes by Technical Support personnel.

BMD00114, August 2009

Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu

395

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference

/maint/fdb

Forwarding Database Maintenance Menu
[FDB Manipulation Menu] find - Show a single FDB entry by MAC address port - Show FDB entries for a single port vlan - Show FDB entries for a single VLAN dump - Show all FDB entries del - Delete an FDB entry clear - Clear entire FDB mcdump - Display all Multicast MAC entries added mcreload - Reload all Multicast MAC entries

The Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu can be used to view information and to delete a MAC address from the forwarding database or clear the entire forwarding database. This is helpful in identifying problems associated with MAC address learning and packet forwarding decisions. Table 223 FDB Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/fdb)
Command Syntax and Usage

find <MAC address> [<VLAN number>] Displays a single database entry by its MAC address. You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device. Enter the MAC address using one of the following formats: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx (such as 08:00:20:12:34:56) xxxxxxxxxxxx (such as 080020123456) port <port number> Displays all FDB entries for a particular port. vlan <VLAN number> Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN. dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database. For details, see page 73. del <MAC address> [<VLAN number>] Removes a single FDB entry. clear Clears the entire Forwarding Database from switch memory.

396

Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu

BMD00114, August 2009

the MP trace buffer is saved into the snap trace buffer area. Table 224 Miscellaneous Debug Menu Options (/maint/debug) Command Syntax and Usage tbuf Displays the Management Processor trace buffer. /maint/debug Debugging Menu [Miscellaneous Debug Menu] tbuf . snap Displays the Management Processor snap (or post-mortem) trace buffer. 2008. The output from these commands can be interpreted by Technical Support personnel. mcreload Reloads static Multicast MAC entries. This buffer contains information traced at the time that a reset occurred.1 Command Reference Table 223 FDB Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage mcdump Displays all Multicast MAC entries in the FDB. clrcfg Deletes all flash configuration blocks. BMD00114. Header information similar to the following is shown: MP trace buffer at 13:28:15 Fri May 30.BLADE OS 5. mask: 0x2ffdf748 The buffer information is displayed after the header. August 2009 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 397 . You can view the following information using the debug menu: Events traced by the Management Processor (MP) Events traced to a buffer area when a reset occurs If the switch resets for any reason.Show MP trace buffer snap .Clear all flash configs The Miscellaneous Debug Menu displays trace buffer information about events that can be helpful in understanding switch operation.Show MP snap (or post-mortem) trace buffer clrcfg .

or a portion according to one of the options listed on the menu above (find.17. you can also refer to “ARP Information” on page 97.101)> Shows a single ARP entry by IP address. clear Clears the entire ARP list from switch memory. 398 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu BMD00114. 192. Note – To display all ARP entries currently held in the switch.Show a single ARP entry by IP address port . addr Shows the list of IP addresses which the switch will respond to for ARP requests.BLADE OS 5.Clear ARP cache Table 225 ARP Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/arp) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as. port <port number> Shows ARP entries on a single port. vlan <VLAN number> Shows ARP entries on a single VLAN.Show ARP entries on a single port vlan . dump). dump Shows all ARP entries. vlan.4.Show ARP entries on a single VLAN addr .Show all ARP entries clear .1 Command Reference /maint/arp ARP Cache Maintenance Menu [Address Resolution Protocol Menu] find .Show ARP entries for switch's interfaces dump . August 2009 . port.

For a description of IP routing tags.17.Show routes to a single gateway type . 192.1 Command Reference /maint/route IP Route Manipulation Menu [IP Routing Menu] find . gw <default gateway address (such as. 192.Clear route table Table 226 IP Route Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/route) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as. August 2009 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 399 .4.BLADE OS 5. clear Clears the route table from switch memory. type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast Shows routes of a single type. dump Shows all routes.101)> Shows a single route by destination IP address.Show routes of a single type tag . you can also refer to “IP Routing Information” on page 94.44)> Shows routes to a default gateway.4.Show a single route by destination IP address gw . see Table 31 on page 95 tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|broadcast|martian|multicast Shows routes of a single tag. For a description of IP routing types.Show routes of a single tag if . Note – To display all routes. see Table 32 on page 96 if <interface number> Shows routes on a single interface.Show routes on a single interface dump .Show all routes clear .17. BMD00114.

dump Displays all LLDP information. August 2009 . 400 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu BMD00114. remodev <1-256> Displays information received from LLDP -capable devices. clear Clears the LLDP cache.BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference /maint/lldp LLDP Cache Manipulation Menu [LLDP Menu] port rx tx remodev dump clear Show LLDP port information Show LLDP receive state machine information Show LLDP transmit state machine information Show LLDP remote devices information Show all LLDP information Clear LLDP remote devices information Table 230 describes the LLDP cache manipulation commands. Table 227 LLDP Cache Manipulation Options (/maint/lldp) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) port information. rx Displays information about the LLDP receive state machine. tx Displays information about the LLDP transmit state machine.

To view menu options. BMD00114. mrouter Displays the Multicast Router Port menu. see page 401. August 2009 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 401 . see page 402.1 Command Reference /maint/igmp IGMP Maintenance Menu [IGMP Multicast group mrouter clear Group Menu] Multicast Group Menu IGMP Multicast Router Port Menu Clear group and mrouter tables Table 228 describes the IGMP Maintenance commands.BLADE OS 5. Table 228 IGMP Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/igmp) Command Syntax and Usage snoop Displays the IGMP Snooping Maintenance menu. To view menu options. clear Clears the IGMP group table and Mrouter tables.

detail <IP address> Displays detailed information about a single IGMP multicast group. 402 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu BMD00114. August 2009 . vlan <VLAN number> Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single VLAN. clear Clears the IGMP group tables.1 Command Reference /maint/igmp/snoop IGMP Snooping Maintenance Menu [IGMP Multicast find vlan port trunk detail dump clear Group Menu] Show a single group by IP group address Show groups on a single vlan Show groups on a single port Show groups on a single trunk Show detail of a single group by IP address Show all groups Clear group tables Table 228 describes the IGMP Maintenance commands.BLADE OS 5. dump Displays information for all multicast groups. Table 229 IGMP Multicast Group Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/igmp/group) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address> Displays a single IGMP multicast group by its IP address. trunk <trunk group number> Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single trunk group. port <port number> Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single port.

1 Command Reference /maint/igmp/mrouter IGMP Multicast Routers Maintenance Menu [IGMP Multicast vlan dump clear Routers Menu] Show all multicast router ports on a single vlan Show all multicast router ports Clear multicast router port table Table 230 describes the IGMP multicast router (Mrouter) maintenance commands.BLADE OS 5. clear Clears the IGMP Multicast Router port table. Table 230 IGMP Mrouter Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/igmp/mrouter) Command Syntax and Usage vlan <VLAN number> Shows all IGMP multicast router ports on a single VLAN. BMD00114. August 2009 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 403 . dump Shows all multicast router ports.

and not locked by any application). 404 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu BMD00114.300 lines of data to be displayed on your screen and copied into the file. If you want to capture dump information to a file. In order for any subsequent dump information to be written to flash memory. see page 405. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the uudmp command. the specified ptdmp file must exist prior to executing the ptdmp command. you must manually clear the dump region. captured to a file. /maint/ptdmp <FTP/TFTP server> <filename> FTP/TFTP System Dump Put Use this command to put (save) the system dump to a FTP/TFTP server. The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current dump data. To access dump information. For more information on clearing the dump region. dump information is presented in uuencoded format. August 2009 . the uudmp command will cause approximately 23. and must be writable (set with proper permission.1 Command Reference /maint/uudmp Uuencode Flash Dump Using this command. the following appears: No FLASH dump available. Note – Dump information is not cleared automatically. enter: Maintenance# ptdmp <FTP/TFTP server> <filename> Where server is the FTP/TFTP server IP address or hostname.BLADE OS 5. Note – If the FTP/TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system. enter: Maintenance# uudmp The dump information is displayed on your screen and. Using the uudmp command. If the dump region is empty. This will ensure that you do not lose any information. at the Maintenance# prompt. and filename is the target dump file. if you have configured your communication software to do so. dump information can be read multiple times. at the Maintenance# prompt. The command does not cause the information to be updated or cleared from flash memory. This format makes it easy to capture the dump information as a file or a string of characters. Once entered. To save dump information via FTP/TFTP.

enter: Maintenance# cldmp The switch clears the dump region of flash memory and displays the following message: FLASH dump region cleared.BLADE OS 5. 2009. the following message is displayed when you log on to the switch: Note: A system dump exists in FLASH. BMD00114. The dump was saved at 13:43:22 Wednesday January 30. The region must be cleared before another dump can be saved.1 Command Reference /maint/cldmp Clearing Dump Information To clear dump information from flash memory. August 2009 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 405 . Unscheduled System Dumps If there is an unscheduled system dump to flash memory. the switch displays the following message: FLASH dump region is already clear. at the Maintenance# prompt. If the flash dump region is already clear. Use /maint/uudmp to extract the dump for analysis and /maint/cldmp to clear the FLASH region.

BLADE OS 5.1 Command Reference 406 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu BMD00114. August 2009 .

........84. 200 BLOCKING (port state) .398 dump information ...................... 360 active port VLAN .......... 196 autoconfiguration link ............................................................... 25 admpw (system option) .............. 377 active switch................................... 377 ptcfg ................................. 29 C capture dump information to a file ..................43 Command-Line Interface (CLI) ..............279 bridge priority ...........................................405 FDB entry ......47 B backup configuration block ............... 196...... 246 ACL statistics ..................... 96 administrator account ................................95 A abbreviating commands (CLI) ............... 243.............................................. 21 boot options menu .. 377 addr IP route tag ...................................96 IP route type .......................... 377 restoring ....................................396 routing table................................................................................................................................................ 25...350 BPDU......................... <Emphasis>See Bridge Protocol Data Unit...................Index Symbols ............................................................................................ 390 banner (system option) ... 244......46 stacking .............................................399 command (help) ............. 47 access control user ................ 87 apply (global command).................................................................................................................................... 29 auto-negotiation setup ..................................................... 43 [ ]................281 broadcast IP route tag ........ 233 aging STP information ..... 288.......................................................................................... 360 active switch configuration gtcfg ................................................. 196...... 245.................................281 Bridge Spanning-Tree parameters ................................................................................................ 85 BMD00114............................................. saving and loading configuration ...293 CIST information ................ 88 Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) ........................ 196 applying configuration changes.........................21 global commands ............................................. 19..........................................88 clear ARP entries ........................................ 41 commands abbreviations.......... 368 / command ..............................385 bootstrap protocol .....................................................404 Cisco Ether Channel ..... 85..................... 390 active IP interface ........85....... 233 ACL Port menu ....................................................................................46 tab completion ..................... 15 to 20..................................43 shortcuts ........................................................... 185 active configuration block .47 conventions used in this manual ....................................... for STP ............................ August 2009 407 ..................................................... bridge parameter menu..................... 88 STP transmission frequency ..............

... 239 VRRP ............. 25.............396 Forwarding Database Information Menu .................................... 316 dump command ....393 default gateway information ...................................................... 196 CISTCISTCommon Internal Spanning Tree ........................ 298 flow control .................................................................................................. 351 configuration block active .................................... 239 VLAN IP interface ......................... 214 switch IP address ...............20.......... 390 backup...................................................................................................376 maintenance.......................... viewing changes .. 206...................................................................................................154 Final Steps........ 376 setup command .............166 downloading software............ 275 default gateway interval..................... 390 configuration menu ................... 193 configuring routing information protocol .............................................................................................................................. 85...............................................72 Forwarding Database Menu ...............................390 factory default configuration ........................ 90 fwd (STP bridge option) ................................................................................ 283 CPU statistics .......................................... 293 RIPRIP configurationRouting Information Protocol debugging ........................................................................ August 2009 ........ 196 setup ...298 FDB statistics .................................... for health checks ........386 dump configuration command .................... 326 COS queue information.293 F factory configuration block ...1 Command Reference configuration 802....................... 207 user password .............................................................................................................................................................316 default password .....................................................................320 DISABLED (port state) ............................. 267 administrator password ..........1x ............20................................. 89 STP port option ............................................... 376 SNMPSNMP .......96 flag field...........................................................................................95 directed broadcasts ........................ 195 VLAN default (PVID) .....98 flow control .................19 delete FDB entry .................................... 89.. 341 IPv4 static route ............ bridge port ..................................................................................................................85.........50...................................282 FwdDel (forward delay)............................................. 376 failover . 263 port trunking ......................... ?? to 40 fixed IP route tag ... 315 VLAN tagging ...........242 setup .....BLADE OS 5....... 242 Gigabit Ethernet .............29 forwarding configuration IP forwarding configuration .......... 238 IGMPIGMP ..........393 duplex mode link status ......................393 delete entry ......................... 89 D date setup ....98 diff (global) command.......................... 130 configuring ......... 211 port mirroring ....................... 23 to 39............... 390 selection ......................... 390 factory ...........................20 DNS statistics .................................................85 disconnect idle timeout ........................................................... 184 CPU utilization .......................................................... 213.... 184 cur (system option) ....................................320 forwarding database (FDB) ............................................................................................. 315 TACACS+TACACS+ .................... 316 default gateway IP address .......... 26 failover configuration.........................................................................195 direct (IP route type).............50............93 interval............ 231 E EtherChannel (port trunking) .... 233 view changes.................73....................... 27 system option . 233 apply changes ........................................1x802................ 130 dynamic routes.............................................399 325 save changes ........................... .............................................. 317 LDAPLDAP .. 199 daylight savings time ..................................... 87.................... for health checks ....... 85.................................................. 199 408 Index BMD00114......................................................33 first-time configuration ..................396 designated port................................... 120 cost STP information .......... 87...............................................................396 forwarding state (FWD) .................................................................................................................................................

................................................. 119 Information Menu ....................159 IPv4 Static Route Menu ........................................................... 273 802.........202 Loopback Interface configuration ...............78 statistics ..1 Command Reference G gig (Port Menu option)....................................... 358 hprompt system option ..........................................................315 IP interfaces............................... 85... 167 idle timeout........................................................................................................96 priority increment value (ifs) for VRRP ................................................................ 90 information 802...............................................................................93 IP route tag ................................ 342 IGMP statistics.......399 IP routing .........31 IP configuration via setup ........................................68 Layer 3 Menu ...................85........................... 386 software.....................................92 LEARNING (port state) ......................85 LLDP configuration................95 log (syslog messages) ...... 172 image downloading ........................................................................................................................................157 local (IP route type) .........................................97 configuring default gateway .........1w....................1w .................... 86 IEEE 802............................ 86 IEEE standards 802......................296 link status . 316 hello STP information ................................. 88 help .............93 IP Information ... 389 indirect (IP route type) .........................................BLADE OS 5.........321 IP Route Manipulation Menu .................1d ....................................................................................................................................................................1p ..................... 377 H health checks default gateway interval............................. 238 Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link ............................362 IP network filter configuration...................................................................... retries ..... 235 I ICMP statistics ............................... 130 Link Status Information ......... 43 gtcfg (TFTP load command) ..........................................................................................367 BMD00114....................... 82 IGMP Snooping ............162 IP subnet mask ................................................................................................. 279 802.......... 95 information ......................................................................................................50 command ..... 115 Trunk Group Information....................................................................296 Layer 2 Menu .......................................50................ 316 retry..................... 43 Hot Links configuration .............109................. selecting ............................ 110 IP Information Menu ....................93 IP interface active .......... 273 802............................31. 304 hot-standby failover .......................128 linkt (SNMP option) ........................50......................................................215 LISTENING (port state) .................130 duplex mode .......................................................... 114 IGMP Multicast Router Information....................................................................................................1x ......................................... 130 port speed .....................................................31 IP forwarding directed broadcasts .................... 238 Gigabit Ethernet configuration ..... 89 Link Aggregation Control Protocolconfiguration LACP ...........................................................................................31 ARP information .316 IP interface ...................320 IP forwarding information ..............1s ......................................315 configuring VLANs .1s ..................... 49 Interface change stats ................96 IP statistics ............................................. number of failed health checks ............. 95 Information IGMP Information ................................................................................. August 2009 Index 409 ..................................................................................32 IP switch processor statistics ................ 238 global commands .... 20 IEEE 802..............360 configuring address................ 84............................ 200 HTTPS ........................................ 177 IP address .......................31 tag parameters .................................................................................................317 L LACP .........................................................288 information ....................................................... 86......

.............. declaring a silent router to be down ............................................ 52 manual style conventions ...............338 host routes ........329 interface configuration ......................................................... authentication parameter of a hello packet336 host entry configuration ................................................ 332 MD5 key ......................................336 virtual neighbor..................................................95 Password user access control ................................................................331 virtual link .....333 transit area ............................................................................................... 396 Main Menu ....................................................................BLADE OS 5.335 type ..... 263 mp packet ....... 403 Maintenance Menu .. 273 mxage (STP bridge option) .................335 dead.........331 priority value of the switch interface ..................................................................................336 OSPF Database Information ....................... 89 MD5 cryptographic authentication ..361 passwords ............... multicast IP route type .................................................................................................173 N nbr change statistics ...............334 range number ............................................105 OSPF statistics ..........................................................................................329 interface .............. 383 P parameters tag .....102 OSPF Information ................................................................... <Emphasis>See Management Processor.................... 397 display MAC address ............ metering (ACL)ACL metering ...... 397 monitor port .................................100 OSPF Information Route Codes.......................................335 configuration............................... 43 operations menu ................ 382 operations-level VRRP options .................................. 96 IP route type (filtered out) ............................................ 175 notice .......................................................... 381........................................ 20 summary......................1 Command Reference M MAC (media access control) address ................................... 85. 72.............................................................................329............... <Emphasis>See MAC address...334 link state database ....................................................332 stub area ....174 global ................................................................................ router ID ................................................329 redistribution menu .......................................................................................................................................... 244 information ......... 402 IGMP Multicast Routers ........................................................................................................331 summary range configuration ....... 95 MaxAge (STP information) ................ shortest path first ..... health parameter of a hello packet ..............................339 general .........................................................................330 Not-So-Stubby Area ......... 335 media access control...................................... 95 Multiple Spanning Tree configuration ..........233 password administrator account ....19 default .......336 export ........................................... 393 Management Processor (MP) . 213 NTP synchronization ................................................................329 cost of the selected path .........................330 route redistribution configuration ..................... 52................... 97... 200 NTP server menu.......................................................96 type . 331 authentication key.....................19 user account .... 21 martian IP route tag (filtered) ........................................ 42 Maintenance IGMP ..103 OSPF general..........................................331 transit delay ......................................................................................... 87........................................ 379 Operations-Level Port Options..........339 spf... August 2009 410 Index ....................................................174 hello..................................19 BMD00114.................................................................... 256 Miscellaneous Debug Menu .................19 VRRP authentication .............................................. 401 IGMP Groups.......................................................................329 virtual link configuration ............................................................. 81 online help ...................................... 281 ospf area index ...100 OSPF General Information .......... 181 MP............338 dead..334 cost value of the host ............ 213 O OAM configuration ................. 41 Command-Line Interface (CLI) .......................

....................................................................................... Port Menu configuration options................. 354..............................................................376 setup command......................316 rip IP route tag .................205 secsrv secondary radius server ................................175 S save (global command) ................................................... 51.......................................................96 RIP Information ......................................................... <Emphasis>See flow control....................... 238 configuring Gigabit Ethernet (gig) ......................BLADE OS 5............ 89 STP port priority .................................................................... 377 PVID (port VLAN ID) .... 73 port trunking description ...............................................................................................................325....................165 routing information protocol configuration............... 205 read community string (SNMP option) ............................................196 save command . 242 reference ports ...... 368 BMD00114.............................................390 secret radius server ....................123 port configuration .................................................... 51................... 238 port flow control....................106 RIP information ....... 356 virtual router ................................................. 132 preemption assuming VRRP master routing authority....................205 Secure Shell. 326 RSTP information ......................................376 Q quiet (screen display option) ................. 130 port states UNK (unknown) .........1 Command Reference ping ............................ 130 port speed ................... RMON information ......................................... 98 re-markACL re-mark menu .......................................... 359 priority virtual router .......... 44 restarting switch setup .......................................326 version 1 parameters ................................................. 91 priority ................ 241 information ................. 71.. 326 port configuration . 312 ptcfg (TFTP save command) ......... August 2009 Index 411 ......................................................... 50................96 options ........ 263 Port number ..... <Emphasis>See Routing Information Protocol............... 215 receive flow control .. 28 disabling (temporarily) ...................................................86 rx flow control ....................................................... 132 membership of the VLAN......................... 44 poisoned reverse.................203 setup configuration....... 73 referenced port ............ 205 Private VLAN ................. 107............................................. configuration .......................... 44 R RADIUS server menu .................................................... 283 prisrv primary radius server ..........................................................................................................26 retries radius server .................................................. 132 PVLANProtocol-based VLAN .........150 route statistics ................................................................................................................. 238 port mirroring configuration ......................................................... as used with split horizon ...............................................................................................239 statistics ...... 310 pwd ........................................326 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) .................... 108 RIP...... 293 ports configuration ........................................................................29 Rx/Tx statistics ............ 29.... 293 port trunking configuration ...............205 retry health checks for default gateway ...................106......................................................................................................... 283 VLAN ID ...326 split horizon ..... 258 Remote Monitoring (RMON) ................... 85............................196 noback option ............................................ 359 priority (STP port option) ..............................................326 poisoned reverse .........

..207 TCP ....................... August 2009 412 Index ....................................... 317 statis route add....................................................................... 87...........................................377 TFTP server........... 20..........................................................................................32 subnets .................................................................................... 52 spanning tree configuration .............................................................................206............................................................. 180 Statistics Menu................52 information .......................................................201 system contact (SNMP option).391 syslog system host log configuration ........... 283 root bridge .......... 213................................................. 28 port flow control ............................................34 text conventions ......................................................200 time ............................ 29 restarting ........... 283 port priority option ........ 27 VLAN name ...............52 System Maintenance Menu ...............................52 resetting ..........207 TACACS+ .................... 31 IP subnet mask ..... 231 date...............................................376 telnet radius server ............................233 cur (current system parameters) ..........65 location (SNMP option) ..................................................... 183 Telnet configuring switches using.................... 90 bridge parameters ................................................................................................................. current ...................... 24 IP configuration ........................... 236 shortcuts (CLI) .................... 215 SNMP statistics ...31 IP interface ..BLADE OS 5...............................395 system options admpw (administrator password) ..................200 login banner .............................. 84...............................27 system option ..............................................................26 subnet mask ......................................................... 26 Spanning-Tree Protocol ............................................................... 397 SNMP .............................................................................................................................. 96 static route rem ................................................................... 326 stacking commands (CLI) .......................................................................... 88................. 32 port auto-negotiation mode ................................ 215 set and get access ............................ 89 static IP route tag ............................................. 186 SNMPv3 ...........................................................206 Telnet support optional setup for Telnet support .. 46 snap traces buffer ......... 29 port configuration .........................21 TFTP ....................................... 281 setup (on/off)..................................................................... 135 stopping switch setup ....................................................................................................................................................... 317 statistics management processor ............................. 25 stopping..................233 wport .......295 time setup ...................................................................................377 thash ..........230 system parameters..................................................................... 386 image file and version ................205 BMD00114.. 28 switch reset effect ............................................................................ 217 software image ................................................. 29 VLANs .......................... 25 state (STP information) .................................. 30 VLAN tagging ................................ 391 split horizon ..47 tacacs ........199 tnport ......................... 28 starting .................................. 84................................................. 46 starting switch setup .....................................................................................199 timeout radius server .................................................................... 88 port cost option ....................... 27 system time ........ 26 system date .................230 usrpw (user password)................................................................215 System Information .........................................215 date and time........... 231 T tab completion (CLI) ...........................................................................199 hprompt ........................................ 85.................................................................................................... 136 menu options........................ 279 Spanning-Tree Protocol ..............206.......................................1 Command Reference setup facility ........... 213..........................315 switch name and location ..................................................................160 TCP statistics ............169................................................388 PUT and GET commands ..................................... 30 sFlow configuration ........................................................................... 281 bridge priority ............................................................

.................. 44 virtual router description ............... 29...................215 BMD00114.. 20 timers kickoff.............................................360 configuration. 309 VLAN Number .... 183 UDLD configuration ................. 95 typographic conventions..............................................................................................................................................359 VRRP statistics .... 21 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) authentication parameters for IP interfaces .......................................................................................................117 VRRP master advertisements time interval.........................32 name ..................................... manual ..................................................................................................... 132......71..................308 VLAN tagging port configuration ...356 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol configuration351 virtual routers increasing priority level of ..................................356 master preemption (preem) ........ 91 name setup.............................................30 tagging ................................................................383 password........................... 160 UDP statistics .................................... August 2009 Index 413 ........................................................................................ 356 virtual router group VRRP priority tracking ................................................................................... 233 user account ......91 interface ...............................................................361 priority election for the virtual router............................. 353 transmit flow control.............................................359 master preemption (prio) ...................................... 295 tx flow control...................................................................... 331 type parameters ............... 358 VRRP interface configuration .354 priority increment values (vrs) for VRRP....................................................... 353 priority .............................................. 359 tracking criteria .............71............................ switch software .............................. 386 user access control configuration .............29.......................361 group options (prio) ........................................................... 91 setting default number (PVID) ................................................353............................................... 51............ 243 information .........................................362 VLAN active port................................................................. 358 virtual router group configuration ............. 230 trace buffer ................... 233 Uuencode Flash Dump ..........362 VRRP Information ..................................................................................91 VRID (virtual router ID) ................................ 397 traceroute........................................30 port membership .................309 setup ................ 177 tnport system option ........................................ 90 trunk hash algorithm ..178 U UCB statistics .......................................................................................................31 ARP entry information ............................................................. 404 V verbose .....230 write community string (SNMP option) ...................................... 19 usrpw (system option) .....................................................................................................................97 information ................... 171 unknown (UNK) port state ...................... 360 W watchdog timer ........ 242 Trunk Group Information .... 358 virtual router group priority tracking ............................................................................................................................359 operations-level options.....................................BLADE OS 5.239 port restrictions ......353 tracking configuration ......................................................1 Command Reference timeouts idle connection .................... 405 upgrade.........29 VLANs .......393 weights setting virtual router priority values..354 priority tracking options ................. 80 UDP ................ authentication..........362 wport ......239 setup ................ 29 type of area ospf................................................................................................ 73 Unscheduled System Dump .............................................354 tracking .............................................361 master advertisements ................................... 44 Tracking VRRP .................